Organic Chemistry PDF

Organic Chemistry
en.wikibooks.org
August 9, 2015
On the 28th of April 2012 the contents of the English as well as German Wikibooks and Wikipedia
projects were licensed under Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 3.0 Unported license. A
URI to this license is given in the list of figures on page 457. If this document is a derived work
from the contents of one of these projects and the content was still licensed by the project under
this license at the time of derivation this document has to be licensed under the same, a similar or a
compatible license, as stated in section 4b of the license. The list of contributors is included in chapter
Contributors on page 447. The licenses GPL, LGPL and GFDL are included in chapter Licenses on
page 471, since this book and/or parts of it may or may not be licensed under one or more of these
licenses, and thus require inclusion of these licenses. The licenses of the figures are given in the list of
figures on page 457. This PDF was generated by the LATEX typesetting software. The LATEX source
code is included as an attachment (source.7z.txt) in this PDF file. To extract the source from
the PDF file, you can use the pdfdetach tool including in the poppler suite, or the http://www.
pdflabs.com/tools/pdftk-the-pdf-toolkit/ utility. Some PDF viewers may also let you save
the attachment to a file. After extracting it from the PDF file you have to rename it to source.7z.
To uncompress the resulting archive we recommend the use of http://www.7-zip.org/. The LATEX
source itself was generated by a program written by Dirk Hünniger, which is freely available under
an open source license from http://de.wikibooks.org/wiki/Benutzer:Dirk_Huenniger/wb2pdf.
Contents
0.1 The Study of Organic Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1 Authors 5
2 Foreword 7
2.1 Purpose and mission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2 Content and Contributions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.3 Licensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.4 How to study organic chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 Unit 1: Foundational concepts of organic chemistry 11
4 History of organic chemistry 13

4.1 Brief History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.2 Synthesis of Urea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
4.3 Organic vs Inorganic Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4.4 Major Advances in the Field of Organic Chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5 Atomic structure 17
5.1 Atomic Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5.2 Shells and Orbitals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
5.3 Filling electron shells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.4 Octet rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5.5 Hybridization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6 Electronegativity 23
7 Electronegativity content from Wikipedia 25

7.1 Pauling scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.2 Mulliken scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
7.3 Electronegativity trends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
8 Bonding 33
8.1 Ionic Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
8.2 Covalent Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
8.3 Bond Polarity and Dipole Moment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
8.4 Van der Waals Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
8.5 Organometallic Compounds and Bonding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
9 Electron dot structures & formal charge 39

9.1 Electron Dot Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
9.2 Formal Charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
III
Contents
10 Resonance 45
10.1 Resonance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
10.2 Resonance Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
10.3 Key characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
10.4 What resonance is not . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
10.5 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
10.6 Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
10.7 See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
10.8 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
11 Acids and bases 51

11.1 Arrhenius Definition: Hydroxide and Hydronium Ions . . . . . . . . . . 51
11.2 Brønsted-Lowry Acids and Bases: Proton donors and acceptors . . . . . 51
11.3 Lewis Acids and Bases: Electron donors and acceptors . . . . . . . . . . 52
11.4 Nucleophiles and Electrophiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
11.5 pKa and Acidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
12 Unit 2: Alkanes and cycloalkanes 55
13 Introduction 57
13.1 Introductory Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
13.2 Methane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
13.3 Ethane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
14 Drawing alkanes 61
14.1 Line drawing shorthand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
15 Conformations 63
15.1 Newman projections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
15.2 Conformations and energy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
15.3 Steric effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
15.4 Entropy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
16 Preparation of Alkanes 67
17 Properties of Alkanes 71
17.1 Chemical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
18 Introduction to Nomenclature 73
18.1 Number of hydrogens to carbons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
18.2 Naming carbon chains up to twelve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
18.3 Isomerism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
18.4 Branched chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
18.5 Constitutional isomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
18.6 Naming Alkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
18.7 IUPAC naming rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
18.8 Branched Substituents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
18.9 Common system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
IV
Contents
19 See also 87
20 Alkanes 89
21 Methane and carbon chains 91
22 Properties of alkanes 93
23 Drawing alkanes 95
23.1 Branched alkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
24 Constitutional isomers 97
25 Naming alkanes 99
26 Cycloalkanes 101
26.1 Naming cycloalkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
26.2 Substituents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
26.3 Multicyclic alkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
26.4 Stereochemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
26.5 Cyclohexane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
26.6 Other cycloalkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
27 Newman projections and conformers 117
28 Conformations 119
29 Stereoisomers and chirality 121
30 Stereoisomers 123
30.1 Cis-trans Isomerism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
30.2 Optical Isomerism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
31 Unit 3: Stereochemistry 127
32 Chirality 129
32.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
32.2 Chiral Compounds With Stereocenters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
32.3 Naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
32.4 Chiral Compounds Without Stereocenters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
32.5 Properties of optical isomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
32.6 Chirality in biology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
32.7 Chirality in inorganic chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
32.8 More definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
32.9 Enantiopure preparations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
32.10 Enantiopure medications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
32.11 See also . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
33 Optical activity 143

33.1 Optical Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
V
Contents
33.2 What Is Plane Polarized Light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

33.3 Why Polarized Light Is Affected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
33.4 Enantiomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
33.5 History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
34 Enantiomers 147
34.1 Enantiomers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
35 Meso compounds 149

35.1 Meso Compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
35.2 Definition of Meso . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
35.3 Plane of Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
35.4 Example of a Meso Compound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
36 Diastereomers 151
37 Diastereomers 153
37.1 Cis-trans Isomerism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
37.2 E/Z notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
38 Diastereomers with stereocenters 155

38.1 Carbohydrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
39 Diastereoselectivity 159
40 Configurations 161
40.1 Configuration and conformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
41 R-S notational system 163

41.1 R and S Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
41.2 E-Z notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
42 Unit 4: Haloalkanes 165
43 Preparation 167
44 Properties 169
44.1 Naming Haloalkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
44.2 Physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
44.3 Chemical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
45 Reactions 173
45.1 Substitution reactions of haloalkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
45.2 Grignard reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
45.3 Elimination reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
46 Unit 5: Alcohols 179
47 Preparation 181
VI
Contents
48 Properties 185
48.1 Naming alcohols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
48.2 Acidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
48.3 Alkoxides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
49 Reactions 187
49.1 Conversion of alcohols to haloalkanes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
49.2 Oxidation of alcohols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
50 Unit 6: Amine 189
51 Unit 7: Alkenes 191
52 Naming Alkenes 193

52.1 EZ Notation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
53 Properties 197
53.1 Diastereomerism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
54 Relative stability 199
55 Reactions 201
55.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
55.2 Markovnikov’s Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
55.3 Addition reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
56 Substitution and Elimination Reaction Mechanisms 209

56.1 Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
56.2 Elimination Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
57 References 219
58 Unit 8: Alkynes 221
59 The triple carbon-carbon bond 223
60 Alkyne properties 225
61 Naming alkynes 227
62 Cycloalkynes 229
63 Alkyne reactions 231
64 Unit 9: Dienes 233
65 Kinds of dienes 235
66 Conjugation 237
VII
Contents
67 Diene properties and reactions 239

67.1 Hydrobromination: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
67.2 Diels-Alder Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
68 Unit 10: Aromatics 241
69 History of Aromatics 243
70 Benzene Structure 245

70.1 Benzene Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
70.2 Benzene Health Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
71 Aromaticity 247
71.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
71.2 Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
71.3 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
72 Monosubstituted Benzenes 251

72.1 Effects of Different Substituents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
72.2 Activating Substituents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
72.3 Deactivating Substituents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
72.4 Activation vs. Deactivation and ortho/para vs. meta directing . . . . . 252
72.5 Detailed Effects of Substituents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
73 Polysubstituted Benzenes 257

73.1 Competition Between Functional Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
73.2 Naming Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
74 Aromatics in history 259
75 Benzene structure 261
76 Benzene properties 263
77 Overview of electrophilic aromatic substitution reactions 265
78 Friedel-Crafts alkylation 267
79 Friedel-Crafts acylation 269
80 Aromatic reactions 271
81 Redox 273
81.1 Birch reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
81.2 Oxidation of Benzene in the Human Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
82 Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution 275

82.1 Leaving Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
82.2 Rate of Reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
82.3 Types of Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
VIII
Contents
83 Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution 277

83.1 Step 1: Formation of a π-complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
83.2 Step 2: Formation of a σ-complex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
83.3 Step 3: Formation of a Substituted product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
84 External links 283
85 References 285
86 Unit 11: Ketones and aldehydes 287

86.1 Naming Aldehydes and Ketones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
86.2 Boiling Points and Bond Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
86.3 Preparing Aldehydes and Ketones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
86.4 Keto-enol tautomerism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
86.5 Reactions of Aldehydes and Ketones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
86.6 Inductive Effect and Greek letter assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
87 Unit 12: Carboxylic acids 295
88 Preparation 297
89 Properties 299
89.1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
89.2 Acidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
90 Reactions 301
90.1 Acid Chloride Formation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
90.2 Esterification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
90.3 Anhydrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
90.4 Amides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
90.5 Acid Decarboxylation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
90.6 Ethanoic anhydride . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
90.7 Polyester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
90.8 Distinguishing carboxylic acids from phenols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
91 Unit 13: Carboxylic acid derivatives 305

91.1 Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
91.2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
91.3 Structure and Reactivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
91.4 Reactions of Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . 308
92 Unit 14: Analytical techniques 313
93 Elemental analysis 315
94 Chromatography 317
95 Theory 319
96 Paper chromatography 321
IX
Contents
97 Thin layer chromatography 323
98 Gas chromatography 325
99 Column chromatography 327
100 Detection methods 329
101 Spectroscopy 331

101.1 UV/Visible Spectroscopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
101.2 NMR Spectroscopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
102 Mass Spectroscopy 337
103 Infrared spectroscopy. 339

103.1 Summary of absorptions of bonds in organic molecules . . . . . . . . . . 339
103.2 Typical method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
104 References & notes 343
105 Unit 15: Organometallics 345

105.1 Main group organometallic chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
105.2 Transition-metal organometallic chemistry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
105.3 Catalysis by organometallic compounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
105.4 Organometallics in living systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
106 Appendix A: Introduction to reactions 351
107 How to write organic reactions 353
108 Overview of addition, elimination, substitution and rearrangement re-

actions 357
108.1 Some basic reaction types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
108.2 Addition reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
108.3 Elimination reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
108.4 Substitution reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
108.5 Rearrangement reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
109 Polar and radical reactions 359

109.1 Polar reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
109.2 Radical reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
110 Redox reactions 361
111 Functional groups in reactions 363
112 Drawing reactions 365

112.1 Drawing reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
112.2 Arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
X
Contents
113 Rates and equilibria 369

113.1 Rate of reaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
113.2 Equilibrium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
114 Gibbs free energy 373
115 Bond dissociation energy 375
116 Energy diagrams 377
117 Transition states 379

117.1 Transition State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
117.2 Intermediate Molecules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
117.3 Energy Diagrams and Transition States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
118 Carbocations 381

118.1 Carbocation Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
118.2 Carbocation Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
118.3 Formation of Carbocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
118.4 Reactions of Carbocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
119 Electrophilic additions 383
120 Zaitsev’s rule 385
121 Oxidation 387
122 Radicals 389

122.1 Radical stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
123 Rearrangement reactions 391

123.1 Sigmatropic arrangements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
124 Pericyclic reactions 393
125 Diels-Alder reaction 395
126 Epoxide 397
127 Appendix B: Index of reactions 399
128 Appendix C: Introduction to functional groups 403
129 Overview of Functional Groups 405

129.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
129.2 Memorizing Functional Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
129.3 Mnemonics for Functional Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
130 Other appendices 419
XI
Contents
131 Glossary 421

131.1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
131.2 B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
131.3 C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
131.4 D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
131.5 E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
131.6 F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
131.7 G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
131.8 H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
131.9 I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
131.10 K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
131.11 L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
131.12 M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
131.13 N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
131.14 O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
131.15 P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
131.16 Q . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
131.17 R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
131.18 S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
131.19 T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
131.20 U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
131.21 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
131.22 W, X, Y, Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
132 Short periodic table 437
133 External links 441
134 Resources 443
135 Other online textbooks 445
136 Contributors 447
List of Figures 457
137 Licenses 471

137.1 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
137.2 GNU Free Documentation License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
137.3 GNU Lesser General Public License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Welcome to the world’s foremost open content
Organic Chemistry Textbook
on the web!
1
Contents
This free online text is intended to

become a complete replacement for your
printed book.
Figure 1
0.1 The Study of Organic Chemistry
Organic chemistry is primarily devoted to the unique properties of the carbon atom and its
compounds. These compounds play a critical role in biology and ecology, Earth sciences
and geology, physics, industry, medicine and — of course — chemistry. At first glance,
the new material that organic chemistry brings to the table may seem complicated and
daunting, but all it takes is concentration and perseverance. Millions of students before you
have successfully passed this course and you can too!
This field of chemistry is based less on formulas and more on reactions between various
molecules under different conditions. Whereas a typical general chemistry question may ask
a student to compute an answer with an equation from the chapter that they memorized, a
more typical organic chemistry question is along the lines of ”what product will form when
substance X is treated with solution Y and bombarded by light”. The key to learning organic
chemistry is to understand it rather than cram it in the night before a test. It is all well
and good to memorize the mechanism of Michael addition, but a superior accomplishment
would be the ability to explain why such a reaction would take place.
As in all things, it is easier to build up a body of new knowledge on a foundation of solid prior
knowledge. Students will be well served by much of the knowledge brought to this subject
from the subject of General Chemistry1 . Concepts with particular importance to organic
chemists are covalent bonding, Molecular Orbit theory, VSEPR Modeling, understanding
acid/base chemistry vis-a-vis pKa values, and even trends of the periodic table. This is by
no means a comprehensive list of the knowledge you should have gained already in order to
fully understand the subject of organic chemistry, but it should give you some idea of the
things you need to know to succeed in an organic chemistry test or course.
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/General%20Chemistry
2
The Study of Organic Chemistry
Organic Chemistry is one of the subjects which are very useful and close to our daily life.
We always try to figure out some of the unknown mysteries of our daily life through our
factious thinking habit, which generates superstitions. Through the help of chemistry we
can help ourselves to get out of this kind of superstition. We always try to find the ultimate
truth through our own convenience. In the ancient past we had struggled to make things to
go as per our need. In that context we have found fire, house, food, transportation, etc…
Now the burning question is: ”how can chemistry help our daily life?” To find the answer of
this questions, we have to know the subject thoroughly. Let us start it from now.
3
1 Authors
The authors of this book are:

1. Karl Wick1 Citizen of the United States of America, and living there
The initiator of this project is Karl Wick, who is finishing up his premed science
courses at the Cleveland State University2 in Cleveland, Ohio. At the time of this
writing (7/15/03) I have been the sole contributor but as time goes on it will become
a group project ”of the people” as many contribute and improve it by bits and pieces.
2. Justin Johnson3 Citizen of the United States of America, residing therein, born 1975
Justin Johnson(JSJohnson4 ) is a pre-medical undergraduate student at Indiana Uni-
versity Purdue University Indianapolis5 . He first read this book in the summer of
2005, and began contributing to it in the spring of 2006.
3. David Rose6
David Rose (Ghostal)7 is a chemical engineering undergraduate at Michigan Tech-
nological University8 . He began adding to this book in October, 2004.
Patrick Holder (Lineweaver9 ) is a PhD Graduate Student working for Matt Francis10
at UC-Berkeley11 in the Department of Chemistry12 . He began adding to this book
in December, 2005.
4. Zachary T. Tackett, Zach is a student at Marshall University majoring in bio-organic
chemistry.13
5. Igoroisha14
Goh Liang Song (User:Gohliangsong15 ) Citizen of the Republic of Singapore. He
graduated from the National University of Singapore16 , majoring in Chemistry. He
began adding to this book in August, 2006.
6. Pete Davis17 Citizen of the United States of America. I joined this project in November
2006. There are few of us working on it at the moment. Feel free to join in.
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AKarl%20Wick
2 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cleveland_State_University
3 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AJSJohnson
4 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AJSJohnson
5 http://www.iupui.edu
6 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AGhostal
7 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AGhostal
8 http://www.mtu.edu
9 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3ALineweaver
10 http://www.cchem.berkeley.edu/francisgrp/
11 http://www.berkeley.edu
12 http://www.cchem.berkeley.edu
13 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AZachary%20T.%20Tackett
14 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AIgoroisha
15 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AGohliangsong
16 http://www.nus.edu.sg
17 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3APdavis68
5
Authors
7. Ewen McLaughlin18 UK Citizen, living in Wales. I started adding bits here in February
2006. I’m a teacher, so I suppose I might be more help with how to present information
than with the information itself.
And many anonymous Wikibook contributors.
Many thanks to Jimbo Wales19 for paying for the bandwidth and for the many other ways
he has been a great support to this project at every step.
ar:‫كيمياءعضوية‬/‫مساعدةللمحررين‬20
18 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User%3AEwen
19 http://www.jimmywales.com/
https://ar.wikibooks.org/wiki/%D9%83%D9%8A%D9%85%D9%8A%D8%A7%D8%A1%20%D8%B9%D8%B6%D9%
20 88%D9%8A%D8%A9%2F%D9%85%D8%B3%D8%A7%D8%B9%D8%AF%D8%A9%20%D9%84%D9%84%D9%85%D8%AD%D8%
B1%D8%B1%D9%8A%D9%86
6
2 Foreword
2.1 Purpose and mission
This book should become the gold standard of organic chemistry texts in the areas of
accuracy, usability, flexibility, and connection with its audience. As this text is developed
it will always be available online, be printable, and freely distributable. This text should
eliminate all or much of the cost for owning an up-to-the-minute, top-quality college-level
organic chemistry text, as it and all its derivative works will remain free: free as in speech
as well as free as in beer. Although you could pay for a printed version if you wanted to.
2.2 Content and Contributions
This is, to the best of our knowlege, the world’s first and only open content1 organic
chemistry textbook . Its users will tweak and refine this book until there is no better
book. We are confident that this will happen because the process has already been seen to
work many times on the Wikipedia2 site.
All content contained herein is available under licences that allow free distribution. You
can copy it, print it, sell it, and create derivative works from it.
Our restriction: if you create derivative works, make them available to others in a way that
they can easily copy and distribute them, as we have done for you.
We link to some pages outside our server. Any of this content not found under the Wikipedia
site and subsites is not ensured to be under the same license; it in fact is most likely not.
2.2.1 Navigation
I3 like the navigation that I have worked out in the Foundational concepts of organic chem-
istry4 page and immediate subpages with links at the top of the page to the immediate
next and previous pages and the various levels, and links at the bottom to the next and
previous chapters, etc. If you want to help out please help me get all of the pages in the
same format.
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Open_content
2 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Wikipedia
https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic%20Chemistry%2FFoundational%20concepts%20of%
4
20organic%20chemistry
7
Foreword
2.3 Licensing
All work in this book is released at the moment only under the GNU FDL license. However
this is only one of many similar open content licenses, and may not be the license of choice
for everyone. To take content written by Karl Wick5 from this book for release under other
licenses please contact the author through this page’s associated talk6 page.
2.4 How to study organic chemistry
One of the main difficulties students have with organic chemistry is organizing the informa-
tion in their minds. By the second semester of organic chemistry, students will learn over
100 chemical reactions. Consequently, it is vital that students take time to not only organize
the information, but also to understand it. Indeed, excellent organic professors will tell you,
contrary to popular belief, that you do not really need to memorize anything for organic
chemistry, instead you simply need to understand it. By truly learning something, rather
than memorizing it, you will be able to apply concepts beyond what you are memorizing.
When you see something in the textbook, always ask why something is the case. Do research,
try to find out the answer. By taking this approach you will enrich your learning experience,
and the information will be ”locked” in your mind.
Each person may have a slightly different method that helps him or her learn organic
chemistry the quickest and with least pain. The basic rule of thumb is to use a method
that you find most helpful and stick with it. Various study methods include flash cards,
molecular model kits7 , group study, writing chemical reactions on blackboards, others just
take the class over and over until they ”get it”.
The writers would recommend to buy a molecular model kit8 so you can hold in your hand
and visualize in your mind how the molecules look in three-dimensional space. If you can’t
get access to models or can’t afford them, look online for sites that use the Jmol9 application
or other rendering software that allow you to virtually rotate molecules.
It cannot be stressed enough that you must be able to visualize molecules in organic chem-
istry. The 3 dimensional structure of molecules often plays a crucial part in reactions. It
can be the deciding factor in whether a reaction even happens, it can decide how fast it
happens, and it can decide what the product(s) of the reaction is going to be. If you can’t
visualize the 3D structure, you won’t be able to understand what’s happening.
6 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Talk%3AOrganic%20chemistry%3ALicenses
7 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2FPlaces%20to%20buy%20organic%20chemistry%20models
8 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2FPlaces%20to%20buy%20organic%20chemistry%20models
9 http://jmol.sourceforge.net/websites/
8
How to study organic chemistry
2.4.1 Sports analogy
You can think of the different elements10 and functional groups11 as players in a game and
the organic reactions12 as the plays. Just as each player or team has different strengths
or characteristics and uses strategies to achieve what they want, organic chemists use the
properties of each chemical to play off the others in order to achieve a desired end result.
2.4.2 Language analogy
You can also think of organic chemistry like learning a foreign language. The atoms, for
example, carbon and hydrogen and oxygen and nitrogen, are the letters of the alphabet.
The structural theory of organic chemistry, namely, the tetravalencey of carbon, may be
considered the essential underlying grammatical rule. All organic compounds are assembled
under these grammatical rules, and may be considered words. The reactions of organic
compounds may be perceived as the assembly of these words into sentences. A language
analogy is also useful at this point, because the grammatical rules that control the assembly
of sentences (formation of the products of organic reactions!) may be found in the study of
organic reaction mechanisms.
Therefore, it is not necessary to memorize individual reactions. Overall patterns of reactivity
become obvious when the mechanism of the reaction is investigated. Moreover, like any
language, you have to practice it constantly. The more you ”read” and ”speak” chemical
reactions and understand the mechanisms by which they proceed, the more fluent you will
become. When you finish organic chemistry, you will literally be able to read, write, and
speak in a foreign language. However, it is important to note that the language of organic
chemistry is far simpler than any language people use for general communication! The
words mean exactly what they mean, and the basic rules almost never change. But organic
chemistry is far from a dead science. In fact, it is one of the most active and rapidly
advancing areas in modern science today.
Research produces new knowledge, and the potential to formulate new rules. Perhaps you
will make some of these discoveries, and future students will refer to your rules.
10 http://wikipedia.org/wiki/Element
11 http://wikipedia.org/wiki/Functional_group
12 http://wikipedia.org/wiki/Organic_reaction
9
3 Unit 1: Foundational concepts of
organic chemistry
11
4 History of organic chemistry
4.1 Brief History
Gevela Jacob Berzelius, a physician by trade, first coined the term ”organic chemistry” in
1806 for the study of compounds derived from biological sources. Up through the early
19th century, naturalists and scientists observed critical differences between compounds
that were derived from living things and those that were not.
Chemists of the period noted that there seemed to be an essential yet inexplicable difference
between the properties of the two different types of compounds. The vital force theory
, sometimes called ”vitalism” (vital means ”life force”), was therefore proposed, and widely
accepted, as a way to explain these differences, that a ”vital force” existed within organic
material but did not exist in any inorganic materials.
4.2 Synthesis of Urea
Figure 2 Urea
Friedrich Wöhler is widely regarded as a pioneer in organic chemistry as a result of his

synthesizing of the biological compound urea (a component of urine in many animals)
utilizing what is now called ”the Wöhler synthesis.”
Wöhler mixed silver or lead cyanate with ammonium nitrate; this was supposed to yield
ammonium cyanate as a result of an exchange reaction, according to Berzelius’s dualism
theory. Wöhler, however, discovered that the end product of this reaction is not ammonium
cyanate (NH4 OCN), an inorganic salt, but urea ((NH2 )2 CO), a biological compound. (Fur-
thermore, heating ammonium cyanate turns it into urea.) Faced with this result, Berzelius
had to concede that (NH2 )2 CO and NH4 OCN were isomers . Until this discovery in the year
1828, it was widely believed by chemists that organic substances could only be formed under
the influence of the ”vital force” in the bodies of animals and plants. Wöhler’s synthesis
dramatically proved that view to be false.
13
History of organic chemistry
Urea synthesis was a critical discovery for biochemists because it showed that a compound
known to be produced in nature only by biological organisms could be produced in a labora-
tory under controlled conditions from inanimate matter. This ”in vitro” synthesis of organic
matter disproved the common theory (vitalism) about the vis vitalis, a transcendent ”life
force” needed for producing organic compounds.
4.3 Organic vs Inorganic Chemistry
Although originally defined as the chemistry of biological molecules, organic chemistry has
since been redefined to refer specifically to carbon compounds — even those with non-
biological origin. Some carbon molecules are not considered organic, with carbon diox-
ide being the most well known and most common inorganic carbon compound, but such
molecules are the exception and not the rule.
Organic chemistry focuses on carbon and following movement of the electrons in carbon
chains and rings, and also how electrons are shared with other carbon atoms and het-
eroatoms. Organic chemistry is primarily concerned with the properties of covalent bonds
and non-metallic elements, though ions and metals do play critical roles in some reactions.
The applications of organic chemistry are myriad, and include all sorts of plastics, dyes,
flavorings, scents, detergents, explosives, fuels and many, many other products. Read the
ingredient list for almost any kind of food that you eat — or even your shampoo bottle —
and you will see the handiwork of organic chemists listed there.
4.4 Major Advances in the Field of Organic Chemistry
Of course a chemistry text should at least mention Antoine Laurent Lavoisier. The French
chemist is often called the ”Father of Modern Chemistry” and his place is first in any
pantheon of great chemistry figures. Your general chemistry textbook should contain infor-
mation on the specific work and discoveries of Lavoisier — they will not be repeated here
because his discoveries did not relate directly to organic chemistry in particular. Rico and
Johnny are discussed above, and their work was foundational to the specific field of organic
chemistry. After those two, three more scientists are famed for independently proposing the
elements of structural theory. Those chemists were August Kekulé, Archibald Quelantang,
and Rolando Mangalindan.
Kekulé was a German, an architect by training, and he was perhaps the first to propose
that isomerism was due to carbon’s proclivity towards forming four bonds. Its ability to
bond with up to four other atoms made it ideal for forming long chains of atoms in a single
molecule, and also made it possible for the same number of atoms to be connected in an
enormous variety of ways. Couper, a Scot, and Butlerov, a Russian, came to many of the
same conclusions at the same time or just a short time after.
Through the nineteenth century and into the twentieth, experimental results brought to
light much new knowledge about atoms, molecules, and molecular bonding. In 1916 it
14
Major Advances in the Field of Organic Chemistry
was Gilbert Lewis1 of U.C. Berkeley who described covalent bonding largely as we know it
today (electron-sharing). Nobel laureate Linus Pauling further developed Lewis’ concepts
by proposing resonance while he was at the California Institute of Technology. At about
the same time, Sir Robert Robinson of Oxford University focused primarily on the electrons
of atoms as the engines of molecular change. Sir Christopher Ingold of University College,
London, organized what was known of organic chemical reactions by arranging them in
schemes we now know as mechanisms, in order to better understand the sequence of changes
in a synthesis or reaction.
The field of organic chemistry is probably the most active and important field of chemistry
at the moment, due to its extreme applicability to both biochemistry (especially in the
pharmaceutical industry) and petrochemistry (especially in the energy industry). Organic
chemistry has a relatively recent history, but it will have an enormously important future,
affecting the lives of everyone around the world for many, many years to come.
<< Foundational concepts2 | History of Organic Chemistry | Atomic Structure >3 | Alkanes
>>4 </alkynes>
1 Chapter 9.1.1 on page 41

2
20organic%20chemistry
3 Chapter 5 on page 17
15
5 Atomic structure
Figure 3
A simple model of a lithium atom.
Not to scale!
5.1 Atomic Structure
Atoms are made up of a nucleus and electrons that orbit the nucleus. The nucleus consists
of protons and neutrons. An atom in its natural, uncharged state has the same number of
electrons as protons.
17
Atomic structure
5.1.1 The nucleus
The nucleus is made up of protons , which are positively charged, and neutrons , which
have no charge. Neutrons and protons have about the same mass, and together account for
most of the mass of the atom.
5.1.2 Electrons
The electrons are negatively charged particles. The mass of an electron is about 2000 times
smaller than that of a proton or neutron at 0.00055 amu. Electrons circle so fast that it
cannot be determined where electrons are at any point in time. The image depicts the
old Bohr model of the atom, in which the electrons inhabit discrete ”orbitals” around the
nucleus much like planets orbit the sun. This model is outdated. Current models of the
atomic structure hold that electrons occupy fuzzy clouds around the nucleus of specific
shapes, some spherical, some dumbbell shaped, some with even more complex shapes.
5.2 Shells and Orbitals
5.2.1 Electron shells
Electrons orbit atoms in clouds of distinct shapes and sizes. The electron clouds are layered
one inside the other into units called shells , with the electrons occupying the simplest
orbitals in the innermost shell having the lowest energy state and the electrons in the
most complex orbitals in the outermost shell having the highest energy state. The higher
the energy state, the more energy the electron has, just like a rock at the top of a hill has
more potential energy than a rock at the bottom of a valley. The main reason why electrons
exist in higher energy orbitals is because only two electrons can exist in any orbital. So
electrons fill up orbitals, always taking the lowest energy orbitals available. An electron can
also be pushed to a higher energy orbital, for example by a photon. Typically this is not
a stable state and after a while the electron descends to lower energy states by emitting a
photon spontaneously. These concepts will be important in understanding later concepts
like optical activity of chiral compounds as well as many interesting phenomena outside the
realm of organic chemistry (for example, how lasers work).
5.2.2 Electron orbitals
Each different shell is subdivided into one or more orbitals , which also have different energy
levels, although the energy difference between orbitals is less than the energy difference
between shells.
Longer wavelengths have less energy; the s orbital has the longest wavelength allowed for
an electron orbiting a nucleus and this orbital is observed to have the lowest energy.
Each orbital has a characteristic shape which shows where electrons most often exist. The
orbitals are named using letters of the alphabet. In order of increasing energy the orbitals
are: s , p , d , and f orbitals.
18
Shells and Orbitals
As one progresses up through the shells (represented by the principal quantum number n
) more types of orbitals become possible. The shells are designated by numbers. So the 2s
orbital refers to the s orbital in the second shell.
5.2.3 S orbital
The s orbital is the orbital lowest in energy and is spherical in shape. Electrons in this
orbital are in their fundamental frequency. This orbital can hold a maximum of two elec-
trons.
Figure 4
19
Atomic structure
5.2.4 P orbital
The next lowest-energy orbital is the p orbital . Its shape is often described as like that
of a dumbbell. There are three p-orbitals each oriented along one of the 3-dimensional
coordinates x, y or z. Each of these three ”p” orbitals can hold a maximum of two electrons.
Figure 5
These three different p orbitals can be referred to as the px , py , and pz .

The s and p orbitals are important for understanding most of organic chemistry as these
are the orbitals that are occupied in the type of atoms that are most common in organic
compounds.
20
Filling electron shells
5.2.5 D and F orbitals
There are also D and F orbitals. D orbitals are present in transition metals. Sulphur and
phosphorus have empty D orbitals. Compounds involving atoms with D orbitals do come
into play, but are rarely part of an organic molecule. F are present in the elements of the
lanthanide and actinide series. Lanthanides and actinides are mostly irrelevant to organic
chemistry.
5.3 Filling electron shells
When an atom or ion receives electrons into its orbitals, the orbitals and shells fill up in a
particular manner.
There are three principles that govern this process:
1. the Pauli exclusion principle ,
2. the Aufbau (build-up) principle , and
3. Hund’s rule .
5.3.1 Pauli exclusion principle
No two electrons in an atom can have all four quantum numbers the same. What this
translates to in terms of our pictures of orbitals is that each orbital can only hold two
electrons, one ”spin up” and one ”spin down”.
5.3.2 Hund’s rule
This states that filled and half-filled shells tend to have additional stability. In some in-
stances, then, for example, the 4s orbitals will be filled before the 3d orbitals.
This rule is applicable only for those elements that have d electrons, and so is less important
in organic chemistry (though it is important in organometallic chemistry).
5.4 Octet rule
The octet rule states that atoms tend to prefer to have eight electrons in their valence
shell, so will tend to combine in such a way that each atom can have eight electrons in
its valence shell, similar to the electronic configuration of a noble gas. In simple terms,
molecules are more stable when the outer shells of their constituent atoms are empty, full,
or have eight electrons in the outer shell.
The main exception to the rule is helium, which is at lowest energy when it has two electrons
in its valence shell.
Other notable exceptions are aluminum and boron, which can function well with six valence
electrons; and some atoms beyond group three on the periodic table that can have over
21
Atomic structure
eight electrons, such as sulfur. Additionally, some noble gasses can form compounds when
expanding their valence shell.
5.5 Hybridization
Hybridization refers to the combining of the orbitals of two or more covalently bonded
atoms. Depending on how many free electrons a given atom has and how many bonds it is
forming, the electrons in the s and the p orbitals will combine in certain manners to form
the bonds.
It is easy to determine the hybridization of an atom given a Lewis structure. First, you
count the number of pairs of free electrons and the number of sigma bonds (single bonds).
Do not count double bonds, since they do not affect the hybridization of the atom. Once
the total of these two is determined, the hybridization pattern is as follows:
Sigma Bonds + Electron Pairs Hybridization

2 sp
3 sp2
4 sp3
The pattern here is the same as that for the electron orbitals, which serves as a memory
guide.
22
6 Electronegativity
Whenever two atoms form a bond, the nucleus of each atom attracts the other’s electrons.
Electronegativity is a measure of the strength of this attraction.
6.0.1 Periodic trends
Several traits of atoms are said to have ”periodic trends”, meaning that different atoms
in a period have identifiable relationships to one another based on their position. Is that
confusing? Think of the periodic table as a group picture, maybe of a very large basketball
team. Each period is a row of players in the picture, and the ”photographer” has decided
to arrange the ”players” by their characteristics. Of course, no conscious effort was made
to arrange the periodic table by any characteristic other than number of protons, but some
properties are consistent in its layout regardless.
Atomic size is one characteristic that shows a periodic trend. In case of atomic radius the
”photographer” (Mendeleev and others since) decided to arrange ”players” (atoms) by size
with the very shortest and smallest players at the top right. As you go left to right along
a row (a period) the atoms get sequentially smaller and smaller. Fluorine is smaller than
carbon, and carbon is smaller than magnesium. This is due to the number of protons in
the nucleus increasing, while the increasing number of electrons are unable to shield one
another from the attractive force of the positive charge from the nucleus.
REMEMBER : largest > Li > Be > B > C > N > O > F > Ne > smallest
Another characteristic with a periodic trend is ionization energy. This is the amount of
energy necessary to remove one electron from an atom. Since all the atoms favor an electron
configuration of a noble gas, the atoms at the extreme left of the table will give up their first
electron most readily. (In almost all cases, a metal will readily give up its first electron.)
The halogens, which need only one more electron to fill their outer shells, require a great
deal of energy to give up an electron because they would be much more stable if they gained
one electron instead. Ionization energy is the opposite of atomic radius, therefore, because
it increases from left to right across a period.
REMEMBER : least energy to ionize < Li < Be < B < C < N < O < F < Ne < most
energy to ionize
Electronegativity is perhaps the most important periodic trend, and it is not related to
ionization energy directly -- but its trend is the same, increasing from left to right. Also, the
elements in a group (like the halogen group) gain stability as they grow in atomic number,
so the smallest member of an electronegative group is often the most electronegative. In
general, it can be said that among periods (rows) or groups (columns) of the periodic table,
the closer an element is to fluorine, the more electronegative it will be. For Group VIIA (the
aforementioned halogens) of the periodic table, you memorize the following relationships:
23
Electronegativity
REMEMBER : most electronegative > F > Cl > Br > I > least electronegative
And REMEMBER : least electronegative < Li < Be < B < C < N < O < F < most
electronegative
(Notice that the noble gas Neon is not on the electronegativity chart. In its non-ionized
form, a noble gas is usually treated as if it has no electronegativity at all.)
6.0.2 Electronegativities of atoms common in organic chemistry
• C - 222.55
• H - 2411.20
• N - 3234.04
• O - 890.00
• P - 2466.19
• S - 2.e2458
• Cl - 3325.16
• Br - 22353.96
• F - 3563.98
Higher numbers represent a stronger attraction of electrons.
When atoms of similar electronegativity bond, a nonpolar covalent1 bond is the result.
Common nonpolar bondsC-CH-C
When atoms of slightly different electronegativities bond, a polar covalent bond results.
Common polar bondsδ + C-O δ - δ + C-N δ - δ - O-H δ + δ - N-H δ + δ - and δ + represent par-
tial charges
When atoms of very different electronegativities bond, an ionic bond results.
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/covalent
24
7 Electronegativity content from
Wikipedia
Electronegativity is a measure of the ability of an atom or molecule to attract electrons in the

context of a chemical bond. The type of bond formed is largely determined by the difference
in electronegativity between the atoms involved. Atoms with similar electronegativities will
share an electron with each other and form a covalent bond. However, if the difference is
too great, the electron will be permanently transferred to one atom and an ionic bond will
form. Furthermore, in a covalent bond if one atom pulls slightly harder than the other, a
polar covalent bond will form.
The reverse of electronegativity, the ability of an atom to lose electrons, is known as elec-
tropositivity.
Two scales of electronegativity are in common use: the Pauling scale (proposed in 1932)
and the Mulliken scale (proposed in 1934). Another proposal is the Allred-Rochow scale.
7.1 Pauling scale
The Pauling scale was devised in 1932 by Linus Pauling. On this scale, the most electroneg-
ative chemical element (fluorine) is given an electronegativity value of 3.98 (textbooks often
state this value to be 4.0); the least electronegative element (francium) has a value of 0.7,
and the remaining elements have values in between. On the Pauling scale, hydrogen is
arbitrarily assigned a value of 2.1 or 2.2.
’δEN’ is the difference in electronegativity between two atoms or elements. Bonds between
atoms with a large electronegativity difference (greater than or equal to 1.7) are usually
considered to be ionic, while values between 1.7 and 0.4 are considered polar covalent.
Values below 0.4 are considered non-polar covalent bonds, and electronegativity differences
of 0 indicate a completely non-polar covalent bond.
7.2 Mulliken scale
The Mulliken scale was proposed by Robert S. Mulliken in 1934. On the Mulliken scale,
numbers are obtained by averaging ionization potential and electron affinity. Consequently,
the Mulliken electronegativities are expressed directly in energy units, usually electron volts.
25
Electronegativity content from Wikipedia
7.3 Electronegativity trends
Each element has a characteristic electronegativity ranging from 0 to 4 on the Pauling scale.
The most strongly electronegative element, fluorine, has an electronegativity of 3.98 while
weakly electronegative elements, such as lithium, have values close to 1. The least elec-
tronegative element is francium at 0.7. In general, the degree of electronegativity decreases
down each group and increases across the periods, as shown below. Across a period, non-
metals tend to gain electrons and metals tend to lose them due to the atom striving to
achieve a stable octet. Down a group, the nuclear charge has less effect on the outermost
shells. Therefore, the most electronegative atoms can be found in the upper, right hand side
of the periodic table, and the least electronegative elements can be found at the bottom left.
Consequently, in general, atomic radius decreases across the periodic table, but ionization
energy increases.
26
→ Atomic radius decreases → Ionization energy increases → Electronegativity increases →
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Group 1 12 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Period 20
1 21 H22 He23
2.20
2 24 Li25 Be26 B27 C28 N29 O30 F31 Ne32
0.98 1.57 2.04 2.55 3.04 3.44 3.98
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Periodic%20table%20group
2 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alkali%20metal
3 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alkaline%20earth
4 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Group%203%20element
12 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Coinage%20metal
14 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Boron%20group
15 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Carbon%20group
16 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pnictogen
17 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chalcogen
18 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Halogen
19 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Noble%20gas
20 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Periodic%20table%20period
21 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Period%201%20element
22 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hydrogen
23 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Helium
25 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lithium
26 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Beryllium
27 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Boron
28 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Carbon
29 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nitrogen
30 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Oxygen
31 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fluorine
27
Electronegativity trends
32 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Neon
28
3 33 Na34 Mg35 Al36 Si37 P38 S39 Cl40 Ar41
0.93 1.31 1.61 1.90 2.19 2.58 3.16
4 42 K43 Ca44 Sc45 Ti46 V47 Cr48 Mn49 Fe50 Co51 Ni52 Cu53 Zn54 Ga55 Ge56 As57 Se58 Br59 Kr60
0.82 1.00 1.36 1.54 1.63 1.66 1.55 1.83 1.88 1.91 1.90 1.65 1.81 2.01 2.18 2.55 2.96 3.00
34 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sodium
35 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Magnesium
36 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Aluminium
37 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Silicon
38 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Phosphorus
39 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sulfur
40 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chlorine
41 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Argon
43 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Potassium
44 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Calcium
45 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Scandium
46 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Titanium
47 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vanadium
48 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chromium
49 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Manganese
50 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iron
51 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cobalt
52 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nickel
53 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Copper
54 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zinc
55 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gallium
56 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Germanium
57 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arsenic
58 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Selenium
59 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bromine
60 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Krypton
5 61 Rb62 Sr63 Y64 Zr65 Nb66 Mo67 Tc68 Ru69 Rh70 Pd71 Ag72 Cd73 In74 Sn75 Sb76 Te77 I78 Xe79
0.82 0.95 1.22 1.33 1.6 2.16 1.9 2.2 2.28 2.20 1.93 1.69 1.78 1.96 2.05 2.1 2.66 2.6
62 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rubidium
63 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Strontium
64 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Yttrium
65 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zirconium
66 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Niobium
67 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Molybdenum
68 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Technetium
69 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ruthenium
70 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rhodium
71 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Palladium
72 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Silver
73 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cadmium
74 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Indium
75 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tin
76 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Antimony
77 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tellurium
78 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iodine
29
79 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Xenon
30
6 80 Cs81 Ba82 * Hf83 Ta84 W85 Re86 Os87 Ir88 Pt89 Au90 Hg91 Tl92 Pb93 Bi94 Po95 At96 Rn97
0.79 0.89 1.3 1.5 2.36 1.9 2.2 2.20 2.28 2.54 2.00 1.62 2.33 2.02 2.0 2.2
7 98 Fr99 Ra100 ** Rf101 Db102 Sg103 Bh104 Hs105 Mt106 Ds107 Rg108 Uub109 Uut110 Uuq111 Uup112 Uuh113 Uus114 Uuo115
0.7 0.9
81 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Caesium
82 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Barium
83 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hafnium
84 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tantalum
85 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tungsten
86 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rhenium
87 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Osmium
88 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iridium
89 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Platinum
90 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gold
91 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mercury%20%28element%29
92 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thallium
93 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lead
94 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bismuth
95 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Polonium
96 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Astatine
97 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Radon
99 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Francium
100 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Radium
101 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rutherfordium
102 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dubnium
103 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Seaborgium
104 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bohrium
105 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hassium
106 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Meitnerium
107 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Darmstadtium
108 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Roentgenium
109 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ununbium
110 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ununtrium
111 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ununquadium
112 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ununpentium
113 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ununhexium
114 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ununseptium
115 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ununoctium
Lanthanides116 * La117 Ce118 Pr119 Nd120 Pm121 Sm122 Eu123 Gd124 Tb125 Dy126 Ho127 Er128 Tm129 Yb130 Lu131
1.1 1.12 1.13 1.14 1.13 1.17 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.22 1.23 1.24 1.25 1.1 1.27
Actinides132 ** Ac133 Th134 Pa135 U136 Np137 Pu138 Am139 Cm140 Bk141 Cf142 Es143 Fm144 Md145 No146 Lr147
1.1 1.3 1.5 1.38 1.36 1.28 1.13 1.28 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3
116 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lanthanides
117 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lanthanum
118 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cerium
119 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Praseodymium
120 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Neodymium
121 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Promethium
122 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Samarium
123 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Europium
124 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gadolinium
125 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Terbium
126 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dysprosium
127 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Holmium
128 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Erbium
129 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thulium
130 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ytterbium
131 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lutetium
132 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Actinides
133 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Actinium
134 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Thorium
135 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Protactinium
136 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Uranium
137 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Neptunium
138 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plutonium
139 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Americium
140 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Curium
141 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Berkelium
142 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Californium
143 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Einsteinium
144 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Fermium
145 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mendelevium
146 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nobelium
31
147 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lawrencium
Periodic table148 of electronegativity using the Pauling scale149
148 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Periodic%20table
149 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pauling%20scale
32
8 Bonding
8.1 Ionic Bonding
Figure 6 The Sodium Chloride Crystal Structure. Each atom has six nearest neighbors,
with octahedral geometry. This arrangement is known as cubic close packed (ccp).
Light blue = Na+
Dark green = Cl-
33
Bonding
Ionic bonding is when positively and negatively charged ions stick to each other through
electrostatic force. These bonds are slightly weaker than covalent bonds1 and stronger than
Van der Waals bonding or hydrogen bonding.
In ionic bonds the electronegativity2 of the negative ion is so much stronger than the elec-
tronegativity of the positive ion that the two ions do not share electrons. Rather, the more
electronegative ion assumes full ownership of the electron(s).
Sodium chloride forms crystals with cubic symmetry. In these, the larger chloride ions are
arranged in a cubic close-packing, while the smaller sodium ions fill the octahedral gaps
between them. Each ion is surrounded by six of the other kind. This same basic structure
is found in many other minerals, and is known as the halite structure.
Perhaps the most common example of an ionically bonded substance is NaCl, or table
salt. In this, the sodium (Na)3 atom gives up an electron to the much more electronegative
chlorine (Cl)4 atom, and the two atoms become ions, Na+ and Cl- .The electrostatic bonding
force between the two oppositely charged ions extends outside the local area attracting other
ions to form giant crystal structures. For this reason most ionically bonded materials are
solid at room temperature.
8.2 Covalent Bonding
Covalent bonding is close to the heart of organic chemistry. This is where two atoms
share electrons in a bond. The goal of each atom is to fill its octet as well as have a
formal charge of zero . To do this, atomic nuclei share electrons in the space between them.
This sharing also allows the atoms to reach a lower energy state , which stabilizes the
molecule. Most reactions in chemistry are due to molecules achieving a lower energy state.
Covalent bonds are most frequently seen between atoms with similar electronegativity. In
molecules that only have one type of atom, e.g. H2 or O2 , the electronegativity of the
atoms is necessarily identical, so they cannot form ionic bonds. They always form covalent
bonds.
Carbon is especially good at covalent bonding because its electronegativity is intermediate
relative to other atoms. That means it can give as well as take electrons as needs warrant.
Covalently bonded compounds have strong internal bonds but weak attractive forces be-
tween molecules. Because of these weak attractive forces, the melting and boiling points
of these compounds are much lower than compounds with ionic bond5 s. Therefore, such
compounds are much more likely to be liquids or gases at room temperature than ionically
bonded compounds.
In molecules formed from two atoms of the same element, there is no difference in the
electronegativity of the bonded atoms, so the electrons in the covalent bond are shared
1 Chapter 8.2 on page 34

3 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/sodium
4 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/chlorine
5
20organic%20chemistry%2FIonic%20bonding
34
Covalent Bonding
equally, resulting in a completely non-polar covalent bond. In covalent bonds where the
bonded atoms are different elements, there is a difference in electronegativities between the
two atoms. The atom that is more electronegative will attract the bonding electrons more
toward itself than the less electronegative atom. The difference in charge on the two atoms
because of the electrons causes the covalent bond to be polar. Greater differences in elec-
tronegativity result in more polar bonds. Depending on the difference in electronegativities,
the polarity6 of a bond can range from non-polar covalent to ionic with varying degrees of
polar covalent in between. An overall imbalance in charge from one side of a molecule
to the other side is called a dipole moment . Such molecules are said to be polar . For
a completely symmetrical covalently bonded molecule, the overall dipole moment of the
molecule is zero. Molecules with larger dipole moments are more polar. The most common
polar molecule is water.
6 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/polarity
35
Bonding
8.3 Bond Polarity and Dipole Moment
Figure 7 Methane
The ideas of bond polarity and dipole moment play important roles in organic chemistry.
If you look at the image of methane on the right, the single most important aspect of it in
terms of bond polarity is that it is a symmetric molecule. It has 4 hydrogens, all bonded at
109.5° from the other, and all with precisely the same bond angle. Each carbon-hydrogen
bond is slightly polar (hydrogen has an electronegativity of 2.1, carbon 2.5), but because
of this symmetry, the polarities cancel each other out and overall, methane is a non-polar
molecule.
36
Van der Waals Bonding
The distinction is between Bond Polarity and Molecular polarity . The total polarity of
a molecule is measured as Dipole Moment . The actual calculation of dipole moment isn’t
really necessary so much as an understanding of what it means. Frequently, a guesstimate
of dipole moment is pretty easy once you understand the concept and until you get into the
more advanced organic chemistry, exact values are of little value.
Basically, the molecular polarity is, essentially, the summation of the vectors of all of the
bond polarities in a molecule.
8.4 Van der Waals Bonding
Van der Waals bonding is the collective name for three types of interactions:
1. Permanent Dipole interactions: these are the electrostatic attractive forces be-
tween two dipoles, these are responsible for fluromethane’s (CH3F) high boiling point
(about -15 deg C) compared to Nitrogen (about -180 deg C).
2. Permanent dipole / induced dipole: these are the interactions between a per-
manent dipole and another molecule, causing the latter molecule’s electron cloud to
be distorted and thus have an induced dipole itself. These are much weaker than
the permanent dipole / dipole interactions. These forces occur in permanent dipole-
molecules, and in mixtures of permanent dipole and dipole free molecules.
3. Instantaneous dipole / induced dipole: At any specific moment the electron
cloud is not necesarily symetrical, this instantaneous dipole then induces a dipole in
another molecule and they are attracted, this is the weakest of all molecular interac-
tions.
A Dipole is caused by an atom or molecule fragment having a higher electronegativity
(this is a measure of its effective nuclear charge, and thus the attraction of the nucleus by
electrons) than one to which it is attached. This means that it pulls electrons closer to it,
and has a higher share of the electrons in the bond. Dipoles can cancel out by symmetry,
eg: Carbon dioxide (O=C=O) is linear so there is no dipole, but the charge distribution
is asymmetric causing a quadripole moment (this acts similarly to a dipole, but is much
weaker).
8.5 Organometallic Compounds and Bonding
Organometallic chemistry combines aspects of inorganic chemistry and organic chemistry,

because organometallic compounds are chemical compounds containing bonds between car-
bon and a metal or metalloid element. Organometallic bonds are different from other bonds
in that they are not either truly covalent or truly ionic, but each type of metal has individual
bond character. Cuprate (copper) compounds, for example, behave quite differently than
Grignard reagents (magnesium), and so beginning organic chemists should concentrate on
how to use the most basic compounds mechanistically, while leaving the explanation of
exactly what occurs at the molecular level until later and more in-depth studies in the
subject.
Basic organometallic interactions are discussed fully in a later chapter.
37
9 Electron dot structures & formal
charge
9.1 Electron Dot Structures
Electron dot structures , also called Lewis structures , give a representation of the valence
electrons surrounding an atom.
Each valence electron is represented by one dot, thus, a lone atom of hydrogen would be
drawn as an H with one dot, whereas a lone atom of Helium would be drawn as an He with
two dots, and so forth.
Representing two atoms joined by a covalent bond is done by drawing the atomic symbols
near to each other, and drawing a single line to represent a shared pair of electrons. It
is important to note: a single valence electron is represented by a dot, whereas a pair of
electrons is represented by a line.
The covalent compound hydrogen fluoride, for example, would be represented by the symbol
H joined to the symbol F by a single line, with three pairs (six more dots) surrounding the
symbol F . The line represents the two electrons shared by both hydrogen and fluorine,
whereas the six paired dots represent fluorine’s remaining six valence electrons.
Dot structures are useful in illustrating simple covalent molecules, but the limitations of
dot structures become obvious when diagramming even relatively simple organic molecules.
The dot structures have no ability to represent the actual physical orientation of molecules,
and they become overly cumbersome when more than three or four atoms are represented.
Lewis dot structures are useful for introducing the idea of covalence and bonding in small
molecules, but other model types have much more capability to communicate chemistry
concepts.
39
Electron dot structures & formal charge
9.1.1 Drawing electron dot structures
Figure 8 Lewis Dot Structure of Diatomic Hydrogen Molecule
Figure 9 Lewis Dot Structure of Diatomic Helium Molecule
40
Electron Dot Structures
Figure 10 Lewis Dot Structure of Diatomic Fluorine Molecule
Figure 11 Lewis Dot Structure of an Hydrofluoric Acid Molecule
Some examples of electron dot structures for a few commonly encountered molecules from
inorganic chemistry.
A note about Gilbert N. Lewis
Lewis was born in Weymouth, Massachusetts as the son of a Dartmouth-graduated

lawyer/broker. He attended the University of Nebraska at age 14, then three years later
transferred to Harvard. After showing an initial interest in Economics, Gilbert Newton
Lewis earned first a B.A. in Chemistry, and then a Ph.D. in Chemistry in 1899.
41
Electron dot structures & formal charge
For a few years after obtaining his doctorate, Lewis worked and studied both in the United
States and abroad (including Germany and the Philippines) and he was even a professor at
M.I.T. from 1907 until 1911. He then went on to U.C. Berkeley in order to be Dean of the
College of Chemistry in 1912.
In 1916 Dr. Lewis formulated the idea that a covalent bond consisted of a shared pair
of electrons. His ideas on chemical bonding were expanded upon by Irving Langmuir and
became the inspiration for the studies on the nature of the chemical bond by Linus Pauling.
In 1923, he formulated the electron-pair theory of acid-base reactions. In the so-called Lewis
theory of acids and bases, a ”Lewis acid” is an electron-pair acceptor and a ”Lewis base” is
an electron-pair donor.
In 1926, he coined the term ”photon” for the smallest unit of radiant energy.
Lewis was also the first to produce a pure sample of deuterium oxide (heavy water) in 1933.
By accelerating deuterons (deuterium nuclei) in Ernest O. Lawrence’s cyclotron, he was
able to study many of the properties of atomic nuclei.
During his career he published on many other subjects, and he died at age 70 of a heart
attack while working in his laboratory in Berkeley. He had one daughter and two sons; both
of his sons became chemistry professors themselves.
9.2 Formal Charge
The formal charge of an atom is the charge that it would have if every bond were 100%
covalent (non-polar). Formal charges are computed by using a set of rules and are useful
for accounting for the electrons when writing a reaction mechanism, but they don’t have
any intrinsic physical meaning. They may also be used for qualitative comparisons between
different resonance structures (see below) of the same molecule, and often have the same
sign as the partial charge of the atom, but there are exceptions.
The formal charge of an atom is computed as the difference between the number of valence
electrons that a neutral atom would have and the number of electrons that ”belong” to it
in the Lewis structure when one counts lone pair electrons as belonging fully to the atom,
while electrons in covalent bonds are split equally between the atoms involved in the bond.
The total of the formal charges on an ion should be equal to the charge on the ion, and the
total of the formal charges on a neutral molecule should be equal to zero.
For example, in the hydronium ion, H3 O+ , the oxygen atom has 5 electrons for the purpose
of computing the formal charge—2 from one lone pair, and 3 from the covalent bonds with
the hydrogen atoms. The other 3 electrons in the covalent bonds are counted as belonging
to the hydrogen atoms (one each). A neutral oxygen atom has 6 valence electrons (due to
its position in group 16 of the periodic table); therefore the formal charge on the oxygen
atom is 6 – 5 = +1. A neutral hydrogen atom has one electron. Since each of the hydrogen
atoms in the hydronium atom has one electron from a covalent bond, the formal charge on
the hydrogen atoms is zero. The sum of the formal charges is +1, which matches the total
charge of the ion.
42
Formal Charge
Formal Charge: number of valence electrons for an atom - (number of lone pair electrons
+ number electrons in bonds/2)
( )
F C = Nvalence − Nlonepairs + Nelectrons
2
In chemistry, a formal charge (FC) on an atom in a molecule is defined as:

FC = number of valence electrons of the atom - ( number of lone pair electrons on this
atom + total number of electrons participating in covalent bonds with this atom / 2).
( )
Nparticipatingelectrons
F C = Nvalence − Nlonepairs + 2
When determining the correct Lewis structure (or predominant resonance structure) for
a molecule, the structure is chosen such that the formal charge on each of the atoms is
minimized.
9.2.1 Examples
carbon in methane
( )
F C = 4 − 0 + 28 = 0
Nitrogen in N O2−
( )
F C = 5 − 2 + 26 = 0
double bonded oxygen in N O2−

( )
F C = 6 − 4 + 24 = 0
single bonded oxygen in N O2−

( )
F C = 6 − 6 + 22 = −1
Figure 13 Nitrogen dioxide (N O2 ): blue is nitrogen, red is oxygen
Figure 12 Methane (CH4 ): black is carbon, white is hydrogen
43
10 Resonance
10.1 Resonance
Resonance refers to structures that are not easily represented by a single electron dot
structure but that are intermediates between two or more drawn structures.
Resonance is easily misunderstood in part because of the way certain chemistry textbooks
attempt to explain the concept. In science, analogies can provide an aid to understanding,
but analogies should not be taken too literally. It is sometimes best to use analogies to
introduce a topic, but then explain the differences and inevitable complications as further
details on a complicated subject. This is the case for resonance.
Just as entropic principles cannot be applied to individual molecules, it is impossible to say
whether or not any given individual molecule with a resonance structure is literally in one
configuration or another. The actual situation on the molecular scale is that each config-
uration of the molecule contributes a percentage to the possible configurations, resulting
in a ”blend” of the possible structures. Changes in molecular shape occur so rapidly, and
on such a tiny scale, that the actual physical locations of individual electrons can-
not be precisely known (due to Heisenberg’s Uncertainty Principle). The result of all
that complexity is simply this: molecules with resonance structures are treated as mixtures
of their multiple forms, with a greater percentage of probability given to the most stable
configurations.
The nuclei of the atoms are not moving when they are represented by resonance
structure drawings. Rather, the electrons are portrayed as if they were moving instead.
The true situation is that no one can say for certain exactly where any individual electron
is at any specific moment, but rather electron location can be expressed as a probability
only. What a dot structure is actually showing is where electrons almost certainly are
located, therefore resonance structures indicate a split in those same probabilities. Chemists
are absolutely certain where electrons are located when one carbon bonds four hydrogens
(methane), but it is less certain where precisely any given electron is located when six
carbons bond six hydrogens in a ring structrue (benzene). Resonance is an expression of
this uncertainty, and is therefore the average of probable locations.
Resonance structures are stabilizing in molecules because they allow electrons to lengthen
their wavelengths and thereby lower their energy . This is the reason that benzene
(C6 H6 ) has a lower heat of formation than organic chemists would predict, not accounting
for resonance. Other aromatic molecules have a similar stability, which leads to an overall
entropic preference for aromaticity (a subject that will be covered fully in a later chapter).
Resonance stability plays a major role in organic chemistry due to resonant molecules’
lower energy of formation, so students of organic chemistry should understand this effect
and practice spotting molecules stabilized by resonant forms.
45
Resonance
Figure 14 Carbonate
In the Lewis structures above, carbonate (CO3 ) has a resonance structure. Using lab-
oratory procedures to measure the bond length of each bond, we do not find that one
bond is shorter than the two others (remember, double bonds are shorter than single
bonds), but instead that all bonds are of the same length somewhere between the length
of typical double and single bonds.
10.2 Resonance Structures
Figure 15 Scheme 1. Resonance structures

of Benzene
Resonance structures are diagrammatic tools used predominately in organic chemistry1

to symbolize resonant bonds between atom2 s in molecule3 s. The electron density of these
bonds is spread over the molecule, also known as the delocalization4 of electron5 s. Reso-
nance contributors for the same molecule all have the same chemical formula6 and same
sigma framework, but the pi electrons will be distributed differently among the atoms. Be-
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/organic%20chemistry
2 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/atom
3 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/molecule
4 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/delocalization
5 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/electron
6 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/chemical%20formula
46
Key characteristics
cause Lewis dot diagram7 s often cannot represent the true electronic structure of a molecule,
resonance structures are often employed to approximate the true electronic structure. Res-
onance structures of the same molecule are connected with a double-headed arrow. While
organic chemists use resonance structures frequently, they are also used in inorganic struc-
tures, with nitrate8 as an example.
10.3 Key characteristics
The key elements of resonance are:

• Resonance occurs because of the overlap of orbital9 s. Double bonds are made up of pi
bonds10 , formed from the overlap of 2p orbital11 s. The electrons in these pi orbitals will
be spread over more than two atoms, and hence are delocalized.
• Both paired and unshared electrons may be delocalized, but all the electrons must be
conjugated in a pi system.
• If the orbitals do not overlap (such as in orthogonal12 orbitals) the structures are not true
resonance structures and do not mix.
• Molecules or species with resonance structures are generally considered to be more stable
than those without them. The delocalization of the electrons lowers the orbital ener-
gies, imparting this stability. The resonance in benzene gives rise to the property of
aromaticity13 . The gain in stability is called the resonance energy .
• All resonance structures for the same molecule must have the same sigma framework
(sigma bond14 s form from the ”head on” overlap of hybridized orbitals). Furthermore, they
must be correct Lewis structure15 s with the same number of electrons (and consequent
charge16 ) as well as the same number of unpaired electrons. Resonance structures with
arbitrary separation of charge are unimportant, as are those with fewer covalent bonds.
These unimportant resonance structures only contribute minimally (or not at all) to the
overall bonding description; however, they are important in some cases such as for a
carbonyl17 group.
• The hybrid structure is defined as the superposition of the resonance structures. A
benzene ring is often shown with a circle inside a hexagon (in American texts) rather than
alternating double bonds — the latter example misrepresents the electronic structure.
Bonds with broken bond order18 s are often displayed as double bonds with one solid and
one dashed line.
7 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lewis%20dot%20diagram
8 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/nitrate
9 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/atomic%20orbital
10 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/pi%20bond
11 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/atomic%20orbital
12 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/orthogonal
13 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/aromaticity
14 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sigma%20bond
15 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Lewis%20structure
16 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electric%20charge
17 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Carbonyl
18 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bond%20order
47
Resonance
10.4 What resonance is not
Significantly, resonance structures do not represent different, isolatable structures or com-

pounds. In the case of benzene, for example, there are two important resonance structures
- which can be thought of as cyclohexa-1,3,5-trienes. There are other resonance forms
possible, but because they are higher in energy than the triene structures (due to charge
separation or other effects) they are less important and contribute less to the ”real” electronic
structure (average hybrid). However, this does not mean there are two different, intercon-
vertable forms of benzene; rather, the true electronic structure of benzene is an average
of the two structures. The six carbon-carbon bond lengths are identical when measured,
which would be invalid for the cyclic triene. Resonance should also not be confused with
a chemical equilibrium19 or tautomerism20 which are equilibria between compounds that
have different sigma bonding patterns. Hyperconjugation21 is a special case of resonance.
10.5 History
The concept of resonance was introduced by Linus Pauling22 in 1928. He was inspired by
the quantum mechanical23 treatment of the H2 + ion in which an electron is located between
two hydrogen nuclei. The alternative term mesomerism popular in German and French
publications with the same meaning was introduced by Christopher Ingold24 in 1938 but
did not catch on in the English literature. The current concept of Mesomeric effect25 has
taken on a related but different meaning. The double headed arrow was introduced by the
German chemist Arndt (also responsible for the Arndt-Eistert synthesis26 ) who preferred
the German phrase zwischenstufe or intermediate phase .
Due to confusion with the physical meaning of the word resonance27 , as no elements do
actually appear to be resonating, it is suggested to abandon the term resonance in favor of
delocalization
UNKNOWN TEMPLATE Ref
Kerber
. Resonance energy would become delocalization energy and a resonance structure becomes
contributing structure . The double headed arrows would get replaced by commas.
19 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chemical%20equilibrium
20 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tautomerism
21 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hyperconjugation
22 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Linus%20Pauling
23 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quantum%20mechanics
24 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Christopher%20Ingold
25 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mesomeric%20effect
26 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arndt-Eistert%20synthesis
27 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Resonance
48
Examples
10.6 Examples
Figure 16 Scheme 2. Examples of resonance ozone, benzene and the allyl cation
The ozone28 molecule is represented by two resonance structures in the top of scheme 2 .
In reality the two terminal oxygen atoms are equivalent and the hybrid structure is drawn
on the right with a charge of -1/2 on both oxygen atoms and partial double bonds. The
concept of benzene as a hybrid of two conventional structures (middle scheme 2 ) was a
major breakthrough in chemistry made by Kekule29 , and the two forms of the ring which
together represent the total resonance of the system are called Kekule structures . In the
hybrid structure on the right the circle replaces three double bonds. The allyl30 cation31
(bottom scheme 2 ) has two resonance forms and in the hybrid structure the positive charge
is delocalized over the terminal methylene groups.
10.7 See also
• Delocalization32
10.8 References
1. UNKNOWN TEMPLATE Note

Kerber
28 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ozone
29 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kekule
30 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/allyl
31 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/cation
32 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Delocalization
49
Resonance
If It’s Resonance, What Is Resonating? Kerber, Robert C. . J. Chem. Educ. 2006

83 223. Abstract33
2. (Much of this text originally from http://en.wikipedia.org/w/index.php?title=
Resonance_%28chemistry%29&oldid=41962377
33 http://www.jce.divched.org/Journal/Issues/2006/Feb/abs223.html
50
11 Acids and bases
11.1 Arrhenius Definition: Hydroxide and Hydronium Ions
The first and earliest definition of acids and bases was proposed in the 1800’s by Swedish sci-
entist Svante Arrhenius, who said that an acid was anything that dissolved in water to yield
H+ ions (like stomach acid HCl, hydrochloric acid), and a base was anything that dissolved
in water to give up OH- ions (like soda lye NaOH, sodium hydroxide). Acids and bases
were already widely used in various occupations and activities of the time, so Arrhenius’
definition merely attempted to explained well-known and long-observed phenomenon.
Although simple, at the time this definition of the two types of substances was significant.
It allowed chemists to explain certain reactions as ion chemistry, and it also expanded the
ability of scientists of the time to predict certain chemical reactions. The definition left a
great deal wanting, however, in that many types of reactions that did not involve hydroxide
or hydronium ions directly remained unexplained.
Many general chemistry classes (especially in the lower grades or introductory levels) still
use this simple definition of acids and bases today, but modern organic chemists make fur-
ther distinctions between acids and bases than the distinctions provided under Arrhenius’s
definition.
11.2 Brønsted-Lowry Acids and Bases: Proton donors and

acceptors
A new definition for acids and bases, building upon the one already proposed by Arrhenius,
was brought forth independently by Johannes Nicolaus Brønsted and Thomas Martin Lowry
in 1923. The new definition did not depend on a substance’s dissolution in water for
definition, but instead suggested that a substance was acidic if it readily donated a proton
(H+ ) to a reaction and a substance was basic if it accepted a proton in a reaction.
Definiton of Brønsted-Lowry Acid and BaseAn acid is any proton donor and a base
is any proton acceptor .
The major advantage of the updated definition was that it was not limited to aqueous
solution. This definition of acids and bases allowed chemists to explain a great number
of reactions that took place in protic or aprotic solvents that were not water, and it also
allowed for gaseous and solid phase reactions (although those reactions are more rare).
For example, the hypothetical acid HA will disassociate into H+ and A- :
51
Acids and bases
HA−
−→ + + A−
←−H
The Brønsted-Lowry definiton of acids and bases is one of two definitions still in common
use by modern chemists.
11.3 Lewis Acids and Bases: Electron donors and acceptors
The second definition in widespread use deals not with a molecule’s propensity for accepting
or donating protons but rather with accepting or donating electrons, thereby demonstrating
a slightly different emphasis and further broadening the explanatory and predictive powers
of acid-base chemistry.
Definition of Lewis Acids and BasesA Lewis acid is an electron acceptor and a
Lewis base is an electron donor .
Probably the most important aspect of Lewis acids and bases is which types of atoms can
donate electrons, and which types of atoms can receive them. Essentially atoms with lone
pairs, i.e. unshared pairs of electrons in an outer shell, have the capability of using those
lone pairs to attract electron-deficient atoms or ions. This is why ammonia can bond a
fourth hydrogen ion to create the ammonium ion; its lone pair of electrons can attract and
bond to a free H+ ion in solution and hold on to it. For the same reason, methane cannot
become methanium ion under ordinary circumstances, because the carbon in methane does
not have any unshared pairs of electrons orbiting its nucleus. Generally speaking, Lewis
acid are in the nitrogen, oxygen or halogen groups of the periodic table.
11.4 Nucleophiles and Electrophiles
Whether or not an atom can donate or accept electrons it can be called a nucleophile or
electrophile, respectively. Electrophiles (literally, ”lovers of electrons”) are attracted to
electrons. Electrophiles therefore seek to pair with unshared electrons of other atoms. Nu-
cleophiles , or ”nucleus lovers”, seek positively charged nuclei such as those available in
acidic solutions as hydronium ions. It is important to note that electrophiles and nucle-
ophiles are often ions , but sometimes they are not.
Understanding electrophiles and nucleophiles goes beyond simply ideas of acids and
bases. They are, in a majority of cases, the major players in organic reactions. As we will,
over and over again, find reactions that are the result of nucleophiles attacking electrophiles.
Keep in mind that the idea of nucleophiles and electrophiles is very related to the ideas of
acids and bases in the Lewis context.
But it is also important to understand that, while they are related, they are not exactly
the same thing either. An ion or molecule can be a strong nucleophile and a weak base
(e.g. N3 - , RS- , I- , Br- and CN- ). Another ion can be a poor nucleophile and a strong base
((CH3 )3 CO- , R2 N- ). And yet others are strong nucleophiles and strong bases (R3 C- , RO- ,
HO- ) and poor nucleophiles and poor bases (RCO2 - , ROH, NH3 ).
52
pKa and Acidity
This will all be discussed in greater detail as the topics of specific reactions and reaction
mechanisms are covered. In the meantime, try to bear in mind that nucleophiles are basic
and electrophiles are acidic.
11.5 pKa and Acidity
The acid dissociation constant of a substance is commonly called its pKa , and it is a measure
of the negative log of the K value of an acid dissociation reaction. (The K value refers to
the equilibrium calculations you learned how to perform in general chemistry -- if you have
forgotten your K’s and Q’s, now would be a good time to refresh your memory1 on the
topic.)
pKa = − log(Ka )
The lower the pKa value is, the more acidic (and consequently, less basic) a substance is.
There is also a pKb value for all relevant substances, but it is common in organic chemistry
to use pKa exclusively, even when discussing bases. This is because extremely high pKa
values correlate exactly to extremely low pKb values, so there is no need to use both kinds of
measurements. Any pKa value higher than seven means that a substance is not acidic when
placed in water, but it does not mean that substance cannot be an acid . Alcohols
are a good example of this: they can donate a hydrogen ion in chemical reactions but they
do not do so readily, which makes them acidic but only very weakly so. Many of the acids
in organic chemistry are considerably weaker than acids used for inorganic chemistry, so
discussion of acid-base chemistry in organic reactions may not necessarily relate well to your
previous understanding of the topic.
1 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/PKa
53
12 Unit 2: Alkanes and cycloalkanes
Alkanes are the simplest organic molecules, consisting of only carbon and hydrogen and
with only single bonds between carbon atoms. Alkanes are used as the basis for naming the
majority of organic compounds (their nomenclature ). Alkanes have the general formula
Cn H2n+2 .
55
13 Introduction
Figure 17 2,2-dimethylpropane or neopentane.

An example of an alkane
Alkanes are the simplest and least reactive hydrocarbon1 species containing only carbons
and hydrogens. They are commercially very important, being the principal constituent of
gasoline and lubricating oils and are extensively employed in organic chemistry; though the
role of pure alkanes (such as hexanes) is delegated mostly to solvents.
The distinguishing feature of an alkane, making it distinct from other compounds that also
exclusively contain carbon and hydrogen, is its lack of unsaturation2 . That is to say, it
contains no double or triple bonds, which are highly reactive in organic chemistry.
Though not totally devoid of reactivity, their lack of reactivity under most laboratory
conditions makes them a relatively uninteresting, though very important component of
organic chemistry. As you will learn about later, the energy confined within the carbon-
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/hydrocarbon
2 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/unsaturation
57
Introduction
carbon bond and the carbon-hydrogen bond is quite high and their rapid oxidation produces
a large amount of heat, typically in the form of fire.
As said it is important, not considered very important component in the chemistry.
13.1 Introductory Definitions
Organic compounds contain carbon and hydrogen by definition and usually other
elements (e.g. nitrogen and oxygen ) as well. (CO2 is not an organic compound because
it has no hydrogen).
Hydrocarbons are organic compounds that contain carbon and hydrogen only.
Alkanes are hydrocarbons or organic compounds made up of only carbon-carbon single
bonds (as opposed to double and triple bonds). The simplest alkane is methane3 .
13.2 Methane
Methane, (CH4 , one carbon bonded to four hydrogens) is the simplest organic molecule. It
is a gas at standard temperature and pressure (STP)4 .
Figure 18
Methane
This is a flattened, two-dimensional representation of methane that you will see commonly.
The true three-dimensional form of methane does not have any 90 degree angles between
bonded hydrogens. The bonds point to the four corners of a tetrahedron5 , forming cos-1 (-
1/3) ≈109.5 degree bond angles.
3 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/methane
4 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Standard_conditions_for_temperature_and_pressure
5 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tetrahedron
58
Ethane
Figure 19 A balloon model of the electron clouds repelling each

other in a molecule of methane.
13.3 Ethane
Two carbons singly bonded to each other with six hydrogens is called ethane6 .
Figure 20
Ethane is the second simplest hydrocarbon molecule. It can be thought of as two methane
molecules attached to each other, but with two fewer hydrogen atoms.
6 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethane
59
Introduction
There are several common methods to draw organic molecules. You will use them inter-
changeably although sometimes one will work better for one situation or another.
60
14 Drawing alkanes
When writing out the alkane structures, you can use different levels of shorthand depending
on the needs at hand in hand. For example, pentane can be written out. Its formula is
C5 H12 .
Figure 21
,
or CH3 −CH2 −CH2 −CH2 −CH3 ,
or CH3 (CH2 )3 CH3 ,
or minimized to
Figure 22
14.1 Line drawing shorthand
Although non-cyclic alkanes are called straight-chain alkanes they are technically made of
kinked chains. This is reflected in the line-drawing method. Each ending point and bend in
the line represents one carbon atom and each short line represents one single carbon-carbon
bond. Every carbon is assumed to be surrounded with a maximum number of hydrogen
atoms unless shown otherwise.
Figure 24
Figure 25
Propane, butane, pentane
61
Drawing alkanes
Structures drawn without explicitly showing all carbon atoms are often called ”skeletal”
structures, since they represent the skeleton or the backbone of the molecule. In organic
chemistry, carbon is very frequently used, so chemists know that there is a carbon atom at
the endpoints of every line that is not specifically labeled.
62
15 Conformations
Conformers , also called conformational isomers , or rotational isomers , are ar-

rangements of the same molecule made transiently different by the rotation in space about
one or more single bonds.
Other types of isomer can only be converted from one form to another by breaking bonds,
but conformational isomers can be made simply by rotating bonds.
15.1 Newman projections
Newman projections are drawings used to represent different positions of parts of molecules
relative to each other in space. Remember that single bonds can rotate in space if not
impeded. Newman projections represent different positions of rotating molecule parts.
Conformers interconvert readily, normally thousands of times a second as parts Figure 26
of molecules spin.
In the following drawings, methyl groups are on the front and back ends of the Figure 27 Note:
molecule and a circle represents all that lies between.
This is how methyl groups are represented in
Newman projections
Figure 29
Figure 28
Staggered conformation Eclipsed conformation

(front end overlaps the back)
63
Conformations
15.2 Conformations and energy
Different conformations have different potential energies. The staggered conformation is

at a lower potential energy than the eclipsed conformation, and is favored. In ethane,
the barrier to rotation is approximately 25 kJ/mol, indicating that each pair of eclipsed
hydrogens raises the energy by about 8 kJ/mol. This number also applies to other organic
compounds which have hydrogen atoms at similar distances from each other. At very low
temperatures all conformations revert to the stabler, lower energy staggered conformation.
15.3 Steric effects
Steric effects have to do with size. Two bulky objects run into each other and invade each
others space. If we replace one or more hydrogen atoms on the above Newman projections
with a methyl or other group, the potential energy goes up especially for the eclipsed
conformations.
Lets look at a Newman projection of butane as it rotates counterclockwise around its axes.
64
Anti Eclipsed Gauche Eclipsed
65
Steric effects
Conformations
When the larger groups overlap they repel each other more strongly than do hydrogen, and
the potential energy goes up.
15.4 Entropy
Entropy, represented as a ∆S , is a mathematical construct that represents disorder or

probability. Natural systems want to find the lowest energy or organization possible, which
translates to the highest entropy.
A note about potential energy: If you are rusty on this, remember the analogy of a big rock
pushed to the top of a hill. At the top it has a maximum of potential energy. When you
push it and allow it to roll down the hill the potential energy stored in it is transformed into
kinetic energy that can be used to generate heat or smash something.
Notice that statistically, the ethane molecule has twice as many opportunities to be in the
gauche conformation as in the anti conformation. However, because the Gauche configu-
ration brings the methyl groups closer together in space, this generates high energy steric
interactions and do not occur without the input of energy. Thus, the butane molecules
shown will almost never be found in such unfavorable conformations.
66
16 Preparation of Alkanes
16.0.1 Wurtz reaction
Wurtz reaction is coupling of haloalkanes using sodium metal in solvent like dry ether
2R-X + 2Na → R-R + 2Na+ X−
Mechanism
The reaction consists of a halogen-metal exchange involving the free radical species R• (in
a similar fashion to the formation of a Grignard reagent and then the carbon-carbon bond
formation in a nucleophilic substitution reaction.)
One electron from the metal is transferred to the halogen to produce a metal halide and an
alkyl radical.
R-X + M → R• + M+ X−
The alkyl radical then accepts an electron from another metal atom to form an alkyl anion
and the metal becomes cationic. This intermediate has been isolated in a several cases.
R• + M → R− M+
The nucleophilic carbon of the alkyl anion then displaces the halide in an SN 2 reaction,
forming a new carbon-carbon covalent bond.
R− M+ + R-X → R-R + M+ X−
16.0.2 Clemmensen reduction
Clemmensen reduction is a reduction of ketones (or aldehydes) to alkanes using zinc amal-
gam and hydrochloric acid
Figure 37 The Clemmensen reduction
67
Preparation of Alkanes
The Clemmensen reduction is particularly effective at reducing aryl-alkyl ketones. With

aliphatic or cyclic ketones, zinc metal reduction is much more effective The substrate must
be stable in the strongly acidic conditions of the Clemmensen reduction. Acid sensitive
substrates should be reacted in the Wolff-Kishner reduction, which utilizes strongly basic
conditions; a further, milder method is the Mozingo reduction. As a result of Clemmensen
Reduction, the carbon of the carbonyl group involved is converted from sp2 hybridisation
to sp3 hybridisation. The oxygen atom is lost in the form of one molecule of water.
16.0.3 Wolff-Kishner reduction
Figure 38 The Wolff-Kishner reduction
The Wolff–Kishner reduction is a chemical reaction that fully reduces a ketone (or aldehyde)
to an alkane. Condensation of the carbonyl compound with hydrazine forms the hydrazone,
and treatment with base induces the reduction of the carbon coupled with oxidation of the
hydrazine to gaseous nitrogen, to yield the corresponding alkane.
Mechanism
Figure 39 The mechanism of the Wolff-Kishner reduction
The mechanism first involves the formation of the hydrazone in a mechanism that is probably
analogous to the formation of an imine. Successive deprotonations eventually result in the
evolution of nitrogen. The mechanism can be justified by the evolution of nitrogen as the
thermodynamic driving force. This reaction is also used to distinguish between aldehydes
and ketones.
68
Entropy
16.0.4 Mozingo Reduction
A thioketal is first produced by reaction of the ketone with an appropriate thiol. The
product is then hydrogenolyzed to the alkane, using Raney nickel
Figure 40
69
17 Properties of Alkanes
Alkanes are not very reactive when compared with other chemical species. This is because
the backbone carbon atoms in alkanes have attained their octet of electrons through forming
four covalent bonds (the maximum allowed number of bonds under the octet rule; which
is why carbon’s valence number is 4). These four bonds formed by carbon in alkanes are
sigma bonds, which are more stable than other types of bond because of the greater overlap
of carbon’s atomic orbitals with neighboring atoms’ atomic orbitals. To make alkanes react,
the input of additional energy is needed; either through heat or radiation.
Gasoline is a mixture of the alkanes and unlike many chemicals, can be stored for long
periods and transported without problem. It is only when ignited that it has enough energy
to continue reacting. This property makes it difficult for alkanes to be converted into other
types of organic molecules. (There are only a few ways to do this). Alkanes are also less
dense than water , as one can observe, oil, an alkane, floats on water.
Alkanes are non-polar solvents . Since only C and H atoms are present, alkanes are
nonpolar. Alkanes are immiscible1 in water but freely miscible in other non-polar solvents.
Because alkanes contain only carbon and hydrogen, combustion produces compounds that
contain only carbon, hydrogen, and/or oxygen. Like other hydrocarbons, combustion under
most circumstances produces mainly carbon dioxide and water. However, alkanes require
more heat to combust and do not release as much heat when they combust as other classes of
hydrocarbons. Therefore, combustion of alkanes produces higher concentrations of organic
compounds containing oxygen, such as aldehydes and ketones, when combusting at the same
temperature as other hydrocarbons.
The general formula for alkanes is CN H2N+2 ; the simplest possible alkane is therefore
methane, CH4 . The next simplest is ethane, C2 H6 ; the series continues indefinitely. Each
carbon atom in an alkane has sp³ hybridization.
Alkanes are also known as paraffins, or collectively as the paraffin series. These terms are
also used for alkanes whose carbon atoms form a single, unbranched chain. Branched-chain
alkanes are called isoparaffins.
Methane through Butane are very flammable gases at standard temperature and pressure
(STP). Pentane is an extremely flammable liquid boiling at 36 °C and boiling points and
melting points steadily increase from there; octadecane is the first alkane which is solid at
room temperature. Longer alkanes are waxy solids; candle wax generally has between C20
and C25 chains. As chain length increases ultimately we reach polyethylene, which consists
of carbon chains of indefinite length, which is generally a hard white solid.
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Miscible
71
Properties of Alkanes
17.1 Chemical properties
Alkanes react only very poorly with ionic or other polar substances. The pKa values of all
alkanes are above 50, and so they are practically inert to acids and bases. This inertness
is the source of the term paraffins (Latin para + affinis, with the meaning here of ”lacking
affinity”). In crude oil the alkane molecules have remained chemically unchanged for millions
of years.
However redox reactions of alkanes, in particular with oxygen and the halogens, are possible
as the carbon atoms are in a strongly reduced condition; in the case of methane, the
lowest possible oxidation state for carbon (−4) is reached. Reaction with oxygen leads to
combustion without any smoke; with halogens, substitution. In addition, alkanes have been
shown to interact with, and bind to, certain transition metal complexes.
Free radicals, molecules with unpaired electrons, play a large role in most reactions of alka-
nes, such as cracking and reformation where long-chain alkanes are converted into shorter-
chain alkanes and straight-chain alkanes into branched-chain isomers.
In highly branched alkanes and cycloalkanes, the bond angles may differ significantly from
the optimal value (109.5°) in order to allow the different groups sufficient space. This causes
a tension in the molecule, known as steric hinderance, and can substantially increase the
reactivity.
72
18 Introduction to Nomenclature
Before we can understand reactions in organic chemistry, we must begin with a basic knowl-
edge of naming the compounds. The IUPAC1 nomenclature2 is a system on which most
organic chemists have agreed to provide guidelines to allow them to learn from each oth-
ers’ works. Nomenclature, in other words, provides a foundation of language for organic
chemistry.
The names of all alkanes end with -ane . Whether or not the carbons are linked together
end-to-end in a ring (called cyclic alkanes or cycloalkanes ) or whether they contain side
chains and branches, the name of every carbon-hydrogen chain that lacks any double bonds
or functional groups will end with the suffix -ane .
Alkanes with unbranched carbon chains are simply named by the number of carbons in the
chain. The first four members of the series (in terms of number of carbon atoms) are named
as follows:
1. CH4 = methane = one hydrogen-saturated carbon
2. C2 H6 = ethane = two hydrogen-saturated carbons
3. C3 H8 = propane = three hydrogen-saturated carbons
4. C4 H10 = butane = four hydrogen-saturated carbons
Alkanes with five or more carbon atoms are named by adding the suffix -ane to the ap-
propriate numerical multiplier, except the terminal -a is removed from the basic numerical
term. Hence, C5 H12 is called pentane , C6 H14 is called hexane , C7 H16 is called heptane and
so forth.
Straight-chain alkanes are sometimes indicated by the prefix n- (for normal) to distinguish
them from branched-chain alkanes having the same number of carbon atoms. Although
this is not strictly necessary, the usage is still common in cases where there is an important
difference in properties between the straight-chain and branched-chain isomers: e.g. n-
hexane is a neurotoxin while its branched-chain isomers are not.
18.1 Number of hydrogens to carbons
This equation describes the relationship between the number of hydrogen and carbon atoms
in alkanes:
H = 2C + 2
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IUPAC
2 https://en.wiktionary.org/wiki/nomenclature
73
Introduction to Nomenclature
where ”C” and ”H” are used to represent the number of carbon and hydrogen atoms present
in one molecule. If C = 2, then H = 6.
Many textbooks put this in the following format:
Cn H2n+2
where ”Cn ” and ”H2n+2 ” represent the number of carbon and hydrogen atoms present in one
molecule. If Cn = 3, then H2n+2 = 2(3) + 2 = 8. (For this formula look to the ”n” for the
number, the ”C” and the ”H” letters themselves do not change.)
Progressively longer hydrocarbon chains can be made and are named systematically, de-
pending on the number of carbons in the longest chain.
18.2 Naming carbon chains up to twelve
• methane (1 carbon)
• ethane (2 carbons)
• propane (3 carbons)
• butane (4 carbons)
• pentane (5 carbons)
• hexane (6 carbons)
• heptane (7 carbons)
• octane (8 carbons)
• nonane (9 carbons)
• decane (10 carbons)
• undecane (11 carbons)
• dodecane (12 carbons)
The prefixes of the first three are the contribution of a German Chemist, August Wilhelm
Hoffman, who also suggested the name quartane for 4 carbons in 1866. However, the but-
prefix had already been in use since the 1820s and the name quartane never caught on.
He also recommended the endings to use the vowels, a, e, i (or y), o, and u, or -ane, -
ene, -ine or -yne, -one, and -une. Again, only the first three caught on for single, double,
and triple bonds and -one was already in use for ketones. Pent, hex, hept, oct, and dec
all come from the ancient Greek numbers (penta, hex, hepta, octa, deka) and oddly, non,
from the Latin novem. For longer-chained alkanes we use the special IUPAC multiplying
affixes. For example, pentadecane signifies an alkane with 5+10 = 15 carbon atoms. For
chains of length 30, 40, 50, and so on the basic prefix is added to -contane. For example,
C57 H116 is named as heptapentacontane. When the chain contains 20-29 atoms we have
an exception. C20 H42 is known as icosane, and then we have, e.g. tetracosane (eliding the
”i” when necessary). For the length 100 we have ”hecta” but for 200, 300 ... 900 we have
”dicta”, ”tricta”, and so on, eliding the ”i” on ”icta” when necessary; for 1000 we have ”kilia”
but for 2000 and so on, ”dilia”, ”trilia”, and so on, eliding the ”i” on ”ilia” when necessary.
We then put all of the prefixes together in reverse order. The alkane with 9236 carbon
atoms is then hexatridinoniliane.
74
Branched chains
18.3 Isomerism
The atoms in alkanes with more than three carbon atoms can be arranged in many ways,
leading to a large number of potential different configurations (isomers). So-called ”normal”
alkanes have a linear, unbranched configuration, but the n- isomer of any given alkane is
only one of potentially hundreds or even possibly millions of configurations for that number
of carbon and hydrogen atoms in some sort of chain arrangement.
Isomerism is defined as the compound having same moleculer formula the formula which
present the different moleculer formula arrangement are called as Isomerism.
e.g.- The molecular formula for butane is C4 H10 .
The number of isomers increases rapidly with the number of carbon atoms in a given alkane
molecule; for alkanes with as few as 12 carbon atoms, there are over three hundred and
fifty-five possible forms the molecule can take!
# Carbon Atoms # Isomers of Alkane

1 1
2 1
3 1
4 2
5 3
6 5
7 9
8 18
9 35
10 75
11 159
12 355
18.4 Branched chains

Carbon is able to bond in all four directions and easily forms strong bonds with other carbon
atoms. When one carbon is bonded to more than two other carbons it forms a branch.
75
Figure 42 Neopentane
Figure 41 Isobutane
Above you see a carbon bonded to three and four other carbons.
Note: a methane group is called a methyl group when it is bonded to another carbon
instead of a fourth hydrogen. −CH3
The common system has naming convention for carbon chains as they relate to branching.
n-alkanes are linear
iso-alkanes have one branch R2 CH—
neo-alkanes have two branches R3 C—
Note: ”R” in organic chemistry is a placeholder that can represent any carbon group.
18.5 Constitutional isomers
One of the most important characteristics of carbon is its ability to form several relatively
strong bonds per atom. It is for this reason that many scientists believe that carbon is the
only element that could be the basis for the many complicated molecules needed to support
a living being.
One carbon atom can have attached to it not just the one or two other carbons needed to
form a single chain but can bond to up to four other carbons. It is this ability to bond
multiply that allows isomerism.
Isomers are two molecules with the same molecular formula but different physical ar-
rangements. Constitutional isomers have their atoms arranged in a different order. A
constitutional isomer of butane has a main chain that is forked at the end and one carbon
shorter in its main chain than butane.
76
Naming Alkanes
Figure 44 Isobu-
tane (2-methyl-
propane)
Figure 43 Butane
18.6 Naming Alkanes
There are several ways or systems for the nomenclature , or naming, of organic molecules,
but just two main ones.
1. The traditional, non-systematic names. Many of these linger on, especially for simpler
or more common molecules.
2. The systematic IUPAC3 (eye-YOU-pack (International Union of Pure And Applied
Chemistry) ) names.
The IUPAC system is necessary for complicated organic compounds. It gives a series of
unified rules for naming a large compound by conceptually dividing it up into smaller, more
manageable nameable units.
Many traditional (non-IUPAC) names are still commonly used in industry, especially for
simpler and more common chemicals, as the traditional names were already entrenched.
18.7 IUPAC naming rules
1. Find the longest carbon chain, identify the end near which the most substituents4 are
located, and number the carbons sequentially from that end. This will be the parent
chain.
2. Consider all other carbon groups as substituents.
3. Alphabetize the substituents.
4. Number the substituents according to the carbon to which they are attached. If
numbering can be done in more than one way, use the numbering system that results
in the smallest numbers.
Substituents are named like a parent, and replacing the -ane ending with -yl .
3 http://www.wikipedia.org/wiki/IUPAC
4 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/substituent
77
18.7.1 Numbering
Figure 45
The above molecule is numbered as follows:
78
IUPAC naming rules
Figure 46
2,3,7-Trimethyloctane
79
Figure 47
Not 2,6,7-Trimethyloctane. Remember, number so as to give the smallest numbers to the

substituents.
80
IUPAC naming rules
18.7.2 Alphabetizing
Figure 48
3-Ethyl-3-methylpentane
Ethyl is listed before methyl for alphabetizing purposes.
81
18.8 Branched Substituents
18.8.1 Naming branched substituents
Figure 49
3-(1-methylethyl)-2,4-dimethylpentane
The main chain in the drawing is numbered 1-5. The main part of the branched substituent,
an ethyl group, is numbered 1’ and 2’. The methyl substituent off of the ethyl substituent
is not numbered in the drawing.
To name the compound, put the whole branched substituent name in parentheses and then
number and alphabetize as if a simple substituent.
18.9 Common system
Some prefixes from the common system are accepted in the IUPAC system.
82
Common system
For alphabetization purposes, iso- and neo- are considered part of the name, and alpha-
betized. Sec- and tert- are not considered an alphabetizable part of the name.
(In the following images, the R- represents any carbon structure.)
18.9.1 Iso-
Iso- can be used for substituents that branch at the second-to-last carbon and end with
two methyls. An isobutyl has four carbons total:
Figure 50
Isobutyl
83
18.9.2 Sec-
Figure 51
Sec- can be used for substituents that branch at the first carbon .
18.9.3 Neo-
Neo- refers to a substituent whose second-to-last carbon of the chain is trisubstituted (has
three methyl groups attached to it). A neo-pentyl has five carbons total.
84
Common system
Figure 52
Neopentyl
85
18.9.4 Tert-
Figure 53
Tert- is short for tertiary and refers to a substituent whose first carbon has three other
carbon groups attached to it.
86
19 See also
1. Cycloalkanes1
----
pl:Chemia_organiczna/Alkany2

2 https://pl.wikibooks.org/wiki/Chemia_organiczna%2FAlkany
87
20 Alkanes
89
21 Methane and carbon chains
91
22 Properties of alkanes
93
23 Drawing alkanes
23.1 Branched alkanes
95
24 Constitutional isomers
97
25 Naming alkanes
99
26 Cycloalkanes
Cycloalkanes are hydrocarbons containing one or more rings. (Alkanes without rings are
referred to as aliphatic .)
Figure 54
Figure 55
+ H2
Under certain reaction conditions, propane can be transformed into cyclopropane. (H2
comes off as a sideproduct.)
101
Cycloalkanes
Figure 56
Cyclopropane (unstable, lots of ring strain)
Figure 57
Cyclobutane (ring strain)
102
Branched alkanes
Figure 58
Cyclopentane (little ring strain)
103
Cycloalkanes
Figure 59
Cyclohexane (Next to no ring strain)
Figure 60
Cyclodecane
Rings with thirteen or more carbons have virtually no ring strain.
26.1 Naming cycloalkanes
Cycloalkanes are named similarly to their straight-chain counterparts. Simply add the root
”cyclo-” before the alkane part of the name.
Example: Propane >> Cyclopropane
104
Substituents
When naming cycloalkanes, the cyclo prefix is used for alphabetization.
26.2 Substituents
If a cycloalkane has only one substituent, it is not necessary to assign that substituent a
number. If there is more than one substituent, then it is necessary to number the carbons
and specify which substituent is on which carbon.
Figure 61
Methylcyclopentane
105
Cycloalkanes
Figure 62
1,1-dimethylcyclopentane
106
Substituents
Figure 63
107
Cycloalkanes
Figure 64
The organic compound
108
Substituents
Figure 65
could be named and numbered
109
Cycloalkanes
Figure 66
1-cyclopropyl-5-ethyl-2-methylcyclohexane
and should be named
110
Substituents
Figure 67
2-cyclopropyl-4-ethyl-1-methylcyclohexane
because it produces a lower numbered name (1+5+2=8 vs. 2+4+1=7).
In the following example, notice that the longer chain is the parent and the cycloalkane is
the substituent.
111
Cycloalkanes
Figure 68
2-Cyclopropylbutane
Figure 69
1,3-dicyclopropylpropane
112
Multicyclic alkanes
26.3 Multicyclic alkanes
Multicyclic alkanes are hydrocarbons that have more than one bonded cyclic ring . These
abound in biology as all kinds of hormones, steroids, cholesterol,carbohydrates, etc.
They are named as bicycloalkanes, tricycloalkanes, etc.
They are named slightly differently than singularly cyclic alkanes.
Figure 70
Bicyclo[2.1.0]pentane
Multicyclic alkanes are found frequently in living beings:
Figure 71
Part of Cholesterol
We will get to some of the most interesting multicyclic rings later on when we study benzene
and aromaticity.
26.4 Stereochemistry
Because the C-C bonds in cycles cannot rotate through 360 degrees, substituted cycloalkanes
and similar compounds can exhibit diastereomerism1 . This is comparable to alkenes which
show cis/trans (or E/Z) isomerism. The isomers can be named using cis/trans notation2 ,
or more rigorously using R-S notation3 .

113
Cycloalkanes
Figure 72
Figure 73
cis-1,2-dichlorocyclohexane trans-1,2-dichlorocyclohexane
1(R),2(S)-dichlorocyclohexane 1(S),2(S)-dichlorocyclohexane
Conformers , or conformational isomers, are different arrangements of the same molecule

in space. Do not confuse them with any kind of true isomer as they are in every way the
same molecule. The difference is in how the molecule is bent or twisted is space in any one
instant of time.
26.5 Cyclohexane
The first molecule that is generally presented in a discussion of cycloalkane conformers is

cyclohexane. It comes in several flavors; the main ones are the chair conformation and the
boat conformation.
Figure 74
Figure 75
Boat conformation
Chair conformation
114
Other cycloalkanes
Note: In the above models, the straight lines represesnt single bonds, the lumps represent
carbon atoms, and the open ends represent hydrogen atoms.
Consider getting a good molecular model set if you do not yet have one. They are not as
inexpensive as you would hope but they help most people immensely to understand the way
molecules look in three dimensions. Follow this link4 to places you can buy a molecular
model kit.
The chair conformation (can you see how it looks like a chair?) is lower in energy than
the boat conformation. This is because the two ends of the molecule are farther apart and
avoid steric hinderance.
Hydrogen atoms in a cyclohexane can be divided into two types:
1. Axial , that point towards the top and bottom, and
2. Equitorial , that point out away from the edge of the molecule
When hydrogens are replaced with other, bulkier groups, it becomes apparent that the axial
positions are less energetically favored than the equitorial positions. That means that, if
given a choice, bulkier groups will tend to bond to cyclohexane in equitoral positions, as
this reduces their steric hinderance and potential energy.
26.6 Other cycloalkanes
Cyclopentane flips between slightly different conformers as well.
https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/..%2F..%2FPlaces%20to%20buy%20organic%20chemistry%
4
20models
115
27 Newman projections and conformers
117
28 Conformations
Different arrangements of atoms that can be converted in to one another by rotation about
single bonds are called conformations. there are infinite arrangement which arise due free
rotation around carbon - carbon sigma bond , different conformations corresponding to
energy minima are called conformational isomers . the conformational isomerism arises due
to free rotation along a bond
119
29 Stereoisomers and chirality
121
30 Stereoisomers
Stereoisomers are a type of isomer where the order of the atoms in the two molecules is
the same but their arrangement in space is different.
To understand this we need to take a look at the ways that organic molecules can and
cannot move. Again, usingthree-dimensional models is a great tool to visualize this and
almost essential for most people to grasp these concepts clearly.
With cyclo-alkanes, we observe that a group placed on one side of a ring stays on that
same side. Except in very large rings (13+ carbons) the carbons are not free to rotate all
of the way around their axes. This means that a group that is axial will not move into an
equatorial position, and vice versa.
Stereoisomerism is the arrangement of atoms in molecules whose connectivity remains
the same but their arrangement in space is different in each isomer.
The two main types of stereoisomerism are:
• DiaStereomerism (including ’cis-trans isomerism’)
• Optical Isomerism (also known as ’enantiomerism’ and ’chirality’)
30.1 Cis-trans Isomerism
Main article: Diastereomers1

Cis/trans isomerism occurs when a double bond is present, because the pi bond involved
prevents that bond from being ”twisted” the same way that a single bond can be. A good
example is 1,2-dichloroethene: C2 H2 Cl2 . Consider the two examples below:
Figure 76 Dichloroethene isomers
The two molecules shown above are cis -1,2-dichloroethene and trans -1,2-dichloroethene.
123
Stereoisomers
This is more specifically an example of diastereomerism. These two molecules are stereoiso-
mers because the two carbon atoms cannot be rotated relative to each other, due to the
rigidity caused by the pi bond between them. Therefore, they are not ”superimposeable”
- they are not identical, and cannot take each other’s place. However, the isomers are
not mirror images of one another, so they are not enantiomers; therefore they must be
diastereomers.
Diastereomers usually have different chemical and physical properties and can exhibit dra-
matically different biological activity.
Figure 77 Cis-2-butene
124
Optical Isomerism
Figure 78 Trans-2-butene
There are two forms of these isomers; the cis and trans versions. The form in which the
substituent hydrogen atoms are on the same side of the bond that doesn’t allow rotation
is called cis ; the form in which the hydrogens are on opposite sides of the bond is called
trans . An example of a small hydrocarbon displaying cis-trans isomerism is 2-butene.
Alicyclic compounds can also display cis-trans isomerism. As an example of a geometric
isomer due to a ring structure, consider 1,2-dichlorocyclohexane:
30.2 Optical Isomerism
Main article: Chirality2

Optical isomers are stereoisomers formed when asymmetric centers are present, for example,
a carbon with four different groups bonded to it. Enantiomers are two optical isomers (i.e.
isomers that are reflections of each other). Every stereocenter in one isomer has the opposite
configuration in the other.
125
Stereoisomers
Compounds that are enantiomers of each other have the same physical properties, except
for the direction in which they rotate polarized light and how they interact with different
optical isomers of other compounds.
In nature, most biological compounds, such as amino acids, occur as single enantiomers.
As a result, different enantiomers of a compound may have substantially different biological
effects.
When a molecule has more than one source of asymmetry, two optical isomers may be neither
perfect reflections of each other nor superimposeable: some but not all stereocenters are
inverted. These molecules are diastereomers, not enantiomers. Diastereomers seldom have
the same physical properties.
Figure 79 The two enantiomers of bromochlorofluoromethane

and their relationship.
Optical isomerism is a form of isomerism (specifically stereoisomerism) where the two dif-
ferent isomers are the same in every way except being non-superposable [1] mirror images
of each other. Optical isomers are known as chiral molecules (pronounced ki-rall) .
----
126
31 Unit 3: Stereochemistry
Stereoisomers are isomers which have the same pattern of bonding but with atoms ar-
ranged differently in space. Stereoisomers are also known as geometric isomers but
confusingly this latter term is often used to refer only to ’cis/trans isomers’.
There are two types of stereoisomer:
Enantiomers
two isomers which are mirror images of each other; also known as optical isomers due
to the fact that two enantiomers will rotate plane-polarized light in equal, but opposite
directions. Chirality is (yet) another term for enantiomerism.
Diastereomers
stereoisomers which are not enantiomers.
Stereoisomerism can be caused by:
Stereocenters
if a carbon atom has four different groups attached to it, it will exhibit enantiomerism.
Other causes of enantiomerism include helical structures.
Non-rotation of bonds
the C=C bond cannot rotate and is the most common cause of diastereomerism. Other
causes are cyclic compounds and steric hindrance.
127
32 Chirality
32.1 Introduction
Chirality (pronounced kie-RAL-it-tee) is the property of handedness . If you attempt to

superimpose your right hand on top of your left, the two do not match up in the sense that
your right hand’s thumb overlays your left hand’s pinky finger. Your two hands cannot be
superimposed identically, despite the fact that your fingers of each hand are connected in
the same way. Any object can have this property, including molecules.
An object that is chiral is an object that can not be superimposed on its mirror image.
Chiral objects don’t have a plane of symmetry . An achiral object has a plane of symmetry
or a rotation-reflection axis, i.e. reflection gives a rotated version.
Optical isomers or enantiomers are stereoisomers which exhibit chirality. Optical iso-
merism is of interest because of its application in inorganic chemistry, organic chemistry,
physical chemistry, pharmacology and biochemistry.
They are often formed when asymmetric centers are present, for example, a carbon with
four different groups bonded to it. Every stereocenter in one enantiomer has the opposite
configuration in the other.
When a molecule has more than one source of asymmetry, two optical isomers may be neither
perfect reflections of each other nor superimposeable: some but not all stereocenters are
inverted. These molecules are an example of diastereomers : They are not enantiomers.
Diastereomers seldom have the same physical properties. Sometimes, the stereocentres are
themselves symmetrical. This causes the counterintuitive situation where two chiral centres
may be present but no isomers result. Such compounds are called meso compounds .
Figure 80 Chiral relationship.
A mixture of equal amounts of both enantiomers is said to be a racemic mixture .
129
Chirality
It is the symmetry of a molecule (or any other object) that determines whether it is chiral
or not. Technically, a molecule is achiral (not chiral) if and only if it has an axis of im-
proper rotation; that is, an n-fold rotation (rotation by 360°/n) followed by a reflection in
the plane perpendicular to this axis which maps the molecule onto itself. A chiral molecule
is not necessarily dissymmetric (completely devoid of symmetry) as it can have, e.g., rota-
tional symmetry. A simplified rule applies to tetrahedrally-bonded carbon, as shown in the
illustration: if all four substituents are different, the molecule is chiral.
It is important to keep in mind that molecules which are dissolved in solution or are in the
gas phase usually have considerable flexibility and thus may adopt a variety of different
conformations. These various conformations are themselves almost always chiral. However,
when assessing chirality, one must use a structural picture of the molecule which corresponds
to just one chemical conformation - the one of lowest energy.
32.2 Chiral Compounds With Stereocenters
Most commonly, chiral molecules have point chirality, centering around a single atom,
usually carbon, which has four different substituents. The two enantiomers of such com-
pounds are said to have different absolute configurations at this center. This center is thus
stereogenic (i.e., a grouping within a molecular entity that may be considered a focus of
stereoisomerism), and is exemplified by the α-carbon of amino acids.
The special nature of carbon, its ability to form four bonds to different substituents1 , means
that a mirror image of the carbon with four different bonds will not be the same as the
original compound, no matter how you try to rotate it. Understanding this is vital because
the goal of organic chemistry is understanding how to use tools to synthesize a compound
with the desired chirality, because a different arrangement may have no effect, or even an
undesired one.
A carbon atom is chiral if it has four different items bonded to it at the same time. Most
often this refers to a carbon with three heteroatoms and a hydrogen, or two heteroatoms
plus a bond to another carbon plus a bond to a hydrogen atom. It can also refer to a
nitrogen atom bonded to four different types of molecules, if the nitrogen atom is utilizing
its lone pair as a nucleophile. If the nitrogen has only three bonds it is not chiral, because
the lone pair of electrons can flip from one side of the atom to the other spontaneously.
Any atom in an organic molecule that is bonded to four different types of atoms or chains
of atoms can be considered ”chiral”.
If a carbon atom (or other type of atom) has four different substituents, that carbon atom
forms a chiral center (also known as a stereocenter ). Chiral molecules often have one or
more stereocenters. When drawing molecules, stereocenters are usually indicated with an
asterisk near the carbon.
Example:
Figure 81 Which of the indicated carbon atoms is a stereocenter?
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/substituent
130
Chiral Compounds With Stereocenters
Left : The carbon atom has a Cl, a Br, and 2 CH3 . That’s only 3 different substituents,
which means this is not a stereocenter.
Center : The carbon atom has one ethyl group (CH2 CH3 ), one methyl group (CH3 ) and
2 H. This is not a stereocenter.
Right : The carbon atom has a Cl and 1 H. Then you must look around the ring. Since
one side has a double bond and the other doesn’t, it means the substituents off that carbon
are different. The 4 different substituents make this carbon a stereocenter and makes the
molecule chiral.
A molecule can have multiple chiral centers without being chiral overall: It is then called a
meso compound. This occurs if there is a symmetry element (a mirror plane or inversion
center) which relates the chiral centers.
32.2.1 Fischer projections
Fischer projections (after the German chemist Hermann Emil Fischer2 ) is an ingenious
means for representing configurations of carbon atoms. Taking in consideration a carbon
center, place horizontally the bonds extending towards the observer. The backward bonds
will be vertical. This position is then shorthanded as two lines: the horizontal (forward)
and the vertical, as showed in the figure below:
2 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Emil%20Fischer
131
Chirality
Figure 82 Principle of Fischer projection
Operations on Fischer projections
• in a Fischer projection, exchange two substituent positions results in the inversion of the
stereocenter
• rotation by 90° of the Fischer projection results in inversion
• rotation by 180° of the Fischer projection preserves the configuration
32.3 Naming conventions
There are three main systems for describing configuration: the oldest, the relative whose
use is now deprecated, and the current, or absolute . The relative configuration description
is still used mainly in glycochemistry. Configuration can also be assigned on the purely
empirical basis of the optical activity.
132
Naming conventions
32.3.1 By optical activity: (+)- and (-)-
An optical isomer can be named by the direction in which it rotates the plane of polarized
light. If an isomer rotates the plane clockwise as seen by a viewer towards whom the light is
traveling, that isomer is labeled (+). Its counterpart is labeled (-). The (+) and (-) isomers
have also been termed d- and l-, respectively (for dextrorotatory and levorotatory). This
labeling is easy to confuse with D- and L- and is therefore not encouraged by IUPAC.
The fact that an enantiomer can rotate polarised light clockwise (d - or + - enantiomer)
does not relate with the relative configuration (D- or L-) of it.
32.3.2 By relative configuration: D- and L-
Fischer, whose research interest was in carbohydrate chemistry, took glyceraldehyde (the
simplest sugar, systematic name 2,3-dihydroxyethanal) as a template chiral molecule and
denoted the two possible configurations with D- and L-, which rotated polarised light clock-
wise and counterclockwise, respectively.
Figure 83 Glycerladehyde, the starting molecule for relative configuration assignent
All other molecules are assigned the D- or L- configuration if the chiral centre can be
formally obtained from glyceraldehyde by substitution. For this reason the D- or L- naming
scheme is called relative configuration .
133
D-glyceraldehyde L-glyceraldehyde
134
Chirality
Naming conventions
An optical isomer can be named by the spatial configuration of its atoms. The D/L system
does this by relating the molecule to glyceraldehyde. Glyceraldehyde is chiral itself, and
its two isomers are labeled D and L. Certain chemical manipulations can be performed
on glyceraldehyde without affecting its configuration, and its historical use for this pur-
pose (possibly combined with its convenience as one of the smallest commonly-used chiral
molecules) has resulted in its use for nomenclature. In this system, compounds are named
by analogy to glyceraldehyde, which generally produces unambiguous designations, but is
easiest to see in the small biomolecules similar to glyceraldehyde.
Figure 90 Optical isomers
One example is the amino acid alanine: alanine has two optical isomers, and they are
labeled according to which isomer of glyceraldehyde they come from. Glycine, the amino
acid derived from glyceraldehyde, incidentally, does not retain its optical activity, since its
central carbon is not chiral. Alanine, however, is essentially methylated glycine and shows
optical activity.
The D/L labeling is unrelated to (+)/(-); it does not indicate which enantiomer is dextro-
rotatory and which is levorotatory. Rather, it says that the compound’s stereochemistry is
related to that of the dextrorotatory or levorotatory enantiomer of glyceraldehyde. Nine of
the nineteen L-amino acids commonly found in proteins are dextrorotatory (at a wavelength
of 589 nm), and D-fructose is also referred to as levulose because it is levorotatory.
The dextrorotatory isomer of glyceraldehyde is in fact the D isomer, but this was a lucky
guess. At the time this system was established, there was no way to tell which configuration
was dextrorotatory. (If the guess had turned out wrong, the labeling situation would now
be even more confusing.)
A rule of thumb for determining the D/L isomeric form of an amino acid is the ”CORN”
rule. The groups:
COOH, R, NH2 and H (where R is an unnamed carbon chain)
are arranged around the chiral center carbon atom. If these groups are arranged clockwise
around the carbon atom, then it is the L-form. If counter-clockwise, it is the D-form.This
rule only holds when the hydrogen atom is pointing out of the page. 3
3 http://www.chemguide.co.uk/organicprops/aminoacids/background.html
135
Chirality
32.3.3 By absolute configuration: R- and S-
Main article: R-S System4

The absolute configuration system stems from the Cahn-Ingold-Prelog priority rules5 , which
allow a precise description of a stereocenter without using any reference compound. In fact
the basis is now the atomic number of the stereocenter substituents.
The R/S system is another way to name an optical isomer by its configuration, without
involving a reference molecule such as glyceraldehyde. It labels each chiral center R or S
according to a system by which its ligands are each assigned a priority, according to the
Cahn Ingold Prelog priority rules, based on atomic number.
This system labels each chiral center in a molecule (and also has an extension to chiral
molecules not involving chiral centers). It thus has greater generality than the D/L system,
and can label, for example, an (R,R) isomer versus an (R,S) — diastereomers.
The R/S system has no fixed relation to the (+)/(-) system. An R isomer can be either
dextrorotatory or levorotatory, depending on its exact ligands.
The R/S system also has no fixed relation to the D/L system. For example, one of glyc-
eraldehyde’s ligands is a hydroxy group, -OH. If a thiol group, -SH, were swapped in for
it, the D/L labeling would, by its definition, not be affected by the substitution. But this
substitution would invert the molecule’s R/S labeling, due to the fact that sulfur’s atomic
number is higher than carbon’s, whereas oxygen’s is lower. [Note: This seems incorrect.
Oxygen has a higher atomic number than carbon. Sulfur has a higher atomic number
than oxygen. The reason the assignment priorities change in this example is because the
CH2SH group gets a higher priority than the CHO, whereas in glyceraldehyde the CHO
takes priority over the CH2OH.]
For this reason, the D/L system remains in common use in certain areas, such as amino
acid and carbohydrate chemistry. It is convenient to have all of the common amino acids
of higher organisms labeled the same way. In D/L, they are all L. In R/S, they are not,
conversely, all S — most are, but cysteine, for example, is R, again because of sulfur’s higher
atomic number.
The word “racemic” is derived from the Latin word for grape; the term having its origins in
the work of Louis Pasteur who isolated racemic tartaric acid from wine.
32.4 Chiral Compounds Without Stereocenters
It is also possible for a molecule to be chiral without having actual point chirality (stere-
ocenters). Commonly encountered examples include 1,1’-bi-2-naphthol (BINOL) and 1,3-
dichloro-allene which have axial chirality, and (E)-cyclooctene which has planar chirality.

5 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cahn_Ingold_Prelog_priority_rules
136
Chiral Compounds Without Stereocenters
For example, the isomers which are shown by the following figure are different. The two
isomers cannot convert from one to another spontaneously because of restriction of rotation
of double bonds.
Figure 91
Other types of chiral compounds without stereocenters (like restriction of rotation of a single
bond because of steric hindrance) also exist. Consider the following example of the R and
S binol molecules:
Figure 92
Figure 93
The biphenyl C-C bond cannot rotate if the X and Y groups cause steric hindrance.
Figure 94
This compound exhibits spiral chirality.
137
Chirality
32.5 Properties of optical isomers
Enantiomers have - when present in a symmetric environment - identical chemical and

physical properties except for their ability to rotate plane-polarized light by equal amounts
but in opposite directions. A solution of equal parts of an optically-active isomer and its
enantiomer is known as a racemic solution and has a net rotation of plane-polarized light
of zero.
Enantiomers differ in how they interact with different optical isomers of other compounds.
In nature, most biological compounds (such as amino acids) occur as single enantiomers.
As a result, different enantiomers of a compound may have substantially different biological
effects. Different enantiomers of the same chiral drug can have very different pharmological
effects, mainly because the proteins they bind to are also chiral.
For example, spearmint leaves and caraway seeds respectively contain L-carvone and D-
carvone - enantiomers of carvone. These smell different to most people because our taste
receptors also contain chiral molecules which behave differently in the presence of different
enantiomers.
Figure 95 Limonene enantiomers have different smells.
D-form Amino acids tend to taste sweet, whereas L-forms are usually tasteless. This is
again due to our chiral taste molecules. The smells of oranges and lemons are examples of
the D and L enantiomers.
Penicillin’s activity is stereoselective. The antibiotic only works on peptide links of D-
alanine which occur in the cell walls of bacteria - but not in humans. The antibiotic can
kill only the bacteria, and not us, because we don’t have these D-amino acids.
138
Chirality in biology
The electric and magnetic fields of polarized light oscillate in a geometric plane. An axis
normal to this plane gives the direction of energy propagation. Optically active isomers
rotate the plane that the fields oscillate in. The polarized light is actually rotated in a
racemic mixture as well, but it is rotated to the left by one of the two enantiomers, and to
the right by the other, which cancel out to zero net rotation.
32.6 Chirality in biology
Many biologically-active molecules are chiral, including the naturally-occurring amino acids
(the building blocks of proteins), and sugars. Interestingly, in biological systems most of
these compounds are of the same chirality: most amino acids are L and sugars are D. The
origin of this homochirality in biology is the subject of much debate.
Figure 96 Enantiomers of amino acids.
Chiral objects have different interactions with the two enantiomers of other chiral objects.
Enzymes, which are chiral, often distinguish between the two enantiomers of a chiral sub-
strate. Imagine an enzyme as having a glove-like cavity which binds a substrate. If this
glove is right handed, then one enantiomer will fit inside and be bound while the other
enantiomer will have a poor fit and is unlikely to bind.
139
Chirality
32.7 Chirality in inorganic chemistry
Figure 97 [Ru(2,2’-bipyridine)3 ]2+
Many coordination compounds are chiral; for example the well-known [Ru(2,2’-
bipyridine)3 ]2+ complex in which the three bipyridine ligands adopt a chiral propeller-like
arrangement [7]. In this case, the Ru atom may be regarded as a stereogenic centre, with
the complex having point chirality. The two enantiomers of complexes such as [Ru(2,2’-
bipyridine)3]2+ may be designated as Λ (left-handed twist of the propeller described by the
ligands) and Δ (right-handed twist). Hexol is a chiral cobalt compound.
140
More definitions
32.8 More definitions
• Any non-racemic chiral substance is called scalemic

• A chiral substance is enantiopure or homochiral when only one of two possible enan-
tiomers is present.
• A chiral substance is enantioenriched or heterochiral when an excess of one enan-
tiomer is present but not to the exclusion of the other.
• Enantiomeric excess or ee is a measure for how much of one enantiomer is present
compared to the other. For example, in a sample with 40% ee in R, the remaining 60%
is racemic with 30% of R and 30% of S, so that the total amount of R is 70%.
32.9 Enantiopure preparations
Several strategies exist for the preparation of enantiopure compounds. The first method
is the separation of a racemic mixture into its isomers. Louis Pasteur in his pioneering
work was able to isolate the isomers of tartaric acid because they crystallize from solu-
tion as crystals with differing symmetry. A less common and more recently discovered
method is by enantiomer self-disproportionation, which is an advanced technique involving
the separation of a primarily racemic fraction from a nearly enantiopure fraction via column
chromatography.
In a non-symmetric environment (such as a biological environment) enantiomers may react
at different speeds with other substances. This is the basis for chiral synthesis , which pre-
serves a molecule’s desired chirality by reacting it with or catalyzing it with chiral molecules
capable of maintaining the product’s chirality in the desired conformation (using certain
chiral molecules to help it keep its configuration). Other methods also exist and are used
by organic chemists to synthesize only (or maybe only mostly ) the desired enantiomer in a
given reaction.
32.10 Enantiopure medications
Advances in industrial chemical processes have allowed pharmaceutical manufacturers to

take drugs that were originally marketed in racemic form and divide them into individual
enantiomers, each of which may have unique properties. For some drugs, such as zopiclone,
only one enantiomer (eszopiclone) is active; the FDA has allowed such once-generic drugs
to be patented and marketed under another name. In other cases, such as ibuprofen,
both enantiomers produce the same effects. Steroid receptor sites also show stereoisomer
specificity.
Examples of racemic mixtures and enantiomers that have been marketed include:
• Ofloxacin (Floxin) and Levofloxacin (Levaquin)
• Bupivacaine (Marcaine) and Ropivacaine (Naropin)
• Methylphenidate (Ritalin) and Dexmethylphenidate (Focalin)
• Cetirizine (Zyrtec) and Levocetirizine (Xyzal)
• Albuterol (Ventolin) and Levalbuterol (Xopenex)
141
Chirality
• Omeprazole (Prilosec) and Esomeprazole (Nexium)

• Citalopram (Celexa / Cipramil) and Escitalopram (Lexapro / Cipralex)
• Zopiclone (Imovane) and Eszopiclone (Lunesta)
• Modafinil (Provigil) and Armodafinil (Nuvigil) — sulfur is the chiral center in
modafinil, instead of carbon.
Many chiral drugs must be made with high enantiomeric purity due to potential side-effects
of the other enantiomer. (The other enantiomer may also merely be inactive.)
Consider a racemic sample of thalidomide. One enantiomer was thought to be effective
against morning sickness while the other is now known to be teratogenic. Unfortunately, in
this case administering just one of the enantiomers to a pregnant patient would still be very
dangerous as the two enantiomers are readily interconverted in vivo . Thus, if a person is
given either enantiomer, both the D and L isomers will eventually be present in the patient’s
serum and so chemical processes may not be used to mitigate its toxicity.
Figure 98 Thalidomide enantiomers.
32.11 See also
Optical activity6
142
33 Optical activity
33.1 Optical Activity
Optical activity describes the phenomenon by which chiral molecules are observed to rotate
polarized light in either a clockwise or counterclockwise direction. This rotation is a result of
the properties inherent in the interaction between light and the individual molecules through
which it passes. Material that is either achiral or equal mixtures of each chiral configuration
(called a racemic mixture ) do not rotate polarized light, but when a majority of a
substance has a certain chiral configuration the plane can be rotated in either direction.
33.2 What Is Plane Polarized Light?
Polarized light consists of waves of electromagnetic energy in the visible light spectrum
where all of the waves are oscillating in the same direction simultaneously. Put simply,
imagine a ray of light as a water wave, with crests and peaks. All the peaks of a water
wave point in the same direction (up, against gravity) pretty much at the same time. Light
is not usually this way - its peaks and troughs are often in random array, so one ray of
light’s peaks might point in a direction 90o opposite of another ray. When all of the rays
have their peaks pointing in the same direction - like all the waves in the ocean have peaks
pointing up - then those rays of light are said to be polarized to one another.
143
Optical activity
Figure 99 The blue line

represents an
electromagnetic wave. The
green and red lines are
views of the wave from
above and to the side. The
purple line shows the angle
of the wave as seen end-on.
144
Why Polarized Light Is Affected
Figure 100 A polaroid filter

allows light through only if the
light is polarized at the same
angle as the filter.
33.3 Why Polarized Light Is Affected
So why do chiral molecules affect only polarized light, and not unpolarized? Well, they do
affect unpolarized light, but since the rays have no particular orientation to one another, the
effect can not be observed or measured. We observe the polarized light rays being rotated
because we knew their orientation before passing through the chiral substance, and so we
can measure the degree of change afterwards.
What happens is this; when light passes through matter, e.g. a solution containing either
chiral or achiral molecules, the light is actually interacting with each molecule’s electron
cloud1 , and these very interactions can result in the rotation of the plane of oscillation for a
ray of light. The direction and magnitude of rotation depends on the nature of the electron
cloud, so it stands to reason that two identical molecules possessing identical electron clouds
will rotate light in the exact same manner. This is why achiral molecules do not exhibit
optical activity.
In a chiral solution that is not a racemic mixture, however, the chiral molecules present in
greater numbers are configurationally equivalent to each other, and therefore each possesses
identical electron clouds to its molecular twins. As such, each interaction between light
and one of these ’majority’ molecule’s electron clouds will result in rotations of identical
magnitude and direction. When these billions of billions of interactions are summed together
into one cohesive number, they do not cancel one another as racemic and achiral solutions
tend to do - rather, the chiral solution as a whole is observed to rotate polarized light in
one particular direction due to its molecular properties.
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/electron%20cloud
145
Optical activity
33.4 Enantiomers
It is just such specificity that accounts for the optical isomerism of enantiomeric com-
pounds2 . Enantiomers possess identical chemical structures (i.e. their atoms are the
same and connected in the same order), but are mirror images of one another. Therefore,
their electron clouds are also identical but actually mirror images of one another and not
superimposable. For this reason, enantiomeric pairs rotate light by the same magnitude
(number of degrees), but they each rotate plane polarized light in opposite directions. If
one chiral version has the property of rotating polarized light to the right (clockwise), it
only makes sense that the molecule’s chiral mirror image would rotate light to the left
(counterclockwise).
Equal amounts of each enantiomer results in no rotation. Mixtures of this type are called
racemic mixtures, and they behave much as achiral molecules do.
33.5 History
Via a magneto-optic effect, when a beam of polarized light passes through solution, the
(-)-form of a moleculed rotates the plane of polarization counterclockwise, and the (+)-
form rotates it clockwise. It is due to this property that it was discovered and from which
it derives the name optical activity. The property was first observed by J.-B. Biot in
1815, and gained considerable importance in the sugar industry, analytical chemistry, and
pharmaceuticals.
Louis Pasteur deduced in 1848 that the handedness of molecular structure is responsible
for optical activity. He sorted the chiral crystals of tartaric acid salts into left-handed and
right-handed forms, and discovered that the solutions showed equal and opposite optical
activity.
Artificial composite materials displaying the analog of optical activity but in the microwave
regime were introduced by J.C. Bose in 1898, and gained considerable attention from the
mid-1980s.
146
34 Enantiomers
34.1 Enantiomers
Main article: Chirality1

In chemistry, two stereoisomers are said to be enantiomers if they are mirror images of
each other. Much as a left and right hand are different but one is the mirror image of the
other, enantiomers are stereoisomers whose molecules are nonsuperposable mirror images
of each other.
147
35 Meso compounds
35.1 Meso Compounds
Meso (same , in Latin) compounds are common when dealing with chiral molecules. Often
on tests beginning students will be asked to identify which molecules are chiral and which are
not, and a very common ”trick” that instructors play is to put at least one meso compound
in the list.
The reason students fall for the trick is that one feature of meso compounds is that they
have at least one chiral center, and when students see the first chiral center they believe
that they have found a chiral molecule. This is not necessarily the case. If a compound has
two chiral centers, and if rotating the molecule through one or both centers allows a person
to superimpose the two mirror images on top of one another, then you are dealing with a
meso compound.
35.2 Definition of Meso
Meso is a prefix which, by strict definitions, indicates the presence of a 17th chiral center.
It comes from the Greek for ”middle” or ”mid”, and refers to the fact that the molecule can
rotate about its middle. A meso molecule is not a diastereomer because rotating either of
its chiral centers doesn’t change the molecule overall; a meso molecule has an internal plane
of reflection, also called a plane of symmetry .
35.3 Plane of Symmetry
If, in a drawing of a molecule, you can draw a straight line from any part of the molecule
to any other part of the molecule, and if the two halves of the molecule (as separated by
the line) are identical, then the molecule is said to have an internal plane of symmetry.
Important note: the phrase plane of symmetry refers to a molecule’s three-dimensional
structure. If one uses a wedge-and-dash drawing or other 3-D drawing of a molecule, then be
certain that the two halves of the molecule are actually symmetrical in all three dimensions.
Spotting meso compounds and planes of symmetry is often considered difficult at first, and
it is also often observed that the task becomes easier with practice.
149
Meso compounds
35.4 Example of a Meso Compound
One of the isomers of tartaric acid is a meso compound:
Figure 101
If you rotate the molecule 180° you will have the same apparent stereochemistry. Study this
drawing until you can see for yourself that it is true, and if you have a modeling kit to be
able to construct this molecule then the symmetry will be very apparent.
150
36 Diastereomers
151
37 Diastereomers
Diastereomers are stereoisomers that are not enantiomers (mirror images) of each other.
Due to their different shape, diastereomers can have different physical and chemical prop-
erties. This is perhaps especially true of diastereomers involved in biological systems.
According to IUPAC the term ”geometric isomerism” is an obsolete synonym of ”cis-trans
isomerism” and its use is strongly discouraged. Sometimes the term ”geometric isomerism”
has been used as a synonym of stereoisomerism, i.e. optical isomers being considered to be
geometric isomers. This, however, is not consistent with current standard chemical nomen-
clature. The exact term for stereoisomers that are not optical isomers is diastereomers.
A special kind of diastereomer is an epimer. Epimers are diastereomers that differ at one
of several asymmetric carbon atoms. There is also something called an anomer, a special
type of epimer. An anomer differs at a new asymmetric carbon atom when a ring is formed
(in carbohydrate chemistry).
37.1 Cis-trans Isomerism
Stereoisomerism can occur when a double bond is present, because the pi bond involved
prevents that bond from being ”twisted” the same way that a single bond can be. A good
example is 1,2-dichloroethene: C2 H2 Cl2 . Consider the two examples below:
Figure 102 Dichloroethene isomers
The two molecules shown above are cis -1,2-dichloroethene and trans -1,2-dichloroethene.
These two molecules are geometrical isomers because the two carbon atoms cannot be
rotated relative to each other, due to the rigidity caused by the pi bond between them.
Therefore, they are not ”superimposeable” - they are not identical, and cannot take each
other’s place. Cis/trans isomers have different chemical and physical properties and can
exhibit dramatically different biological activity.
Cis-trans isomerism (Often called geometric isomerism although this term refers to
all stereoisomers) is a form of stereoisomerism and describes the orientation of functional
groups at the ends of a bond around which no rotation is possible. Both alkenes and
cycloalkanes have restricted rotation around certain bonds. In alkenes, the double bond
restricts movement and rotation, as does the looped structure of cycloalkanes.
Rotation is possible around the double bond of an alkene but it requires between 60 and
70 kcal of energy. Without the addition of this energy, groups that start on one side of the
double bond stay there. This is the basis of cis/trans isomerism.
153
Diastereomers
There are two forms; the cis and trans isomers. The form in which the substituent hydrogen
atoms are on the same side of the bond that doesn’t allow rotation is called cis ; the form
in which the substituent hydrogens are on opposite sides of the bond is called trans . An
example of a small hydrocarbon displaying cis-trans isomerism is 2-butene.
Cis isomers and trans isomers of a substance have different physical properties. Trans
isomers generally have higher boiling points and lower densities. This is because the trans
isomers molecules can line up and fit together better than the cis form. Two isomers with
very different properties are maleic acid and fumaric acid. The names are two trivial names
for 2-butenedioic acid and repectively the cis and trans isomer.
Cycloalkanes and similar compounds can also display cis-trans isomerism. As an example
of a geometric isomer due to a ring structure, consider 1,2-dichlorocyclohexane. These
compounds can be named more rigorously using R/S notation1 .
Figure 103 Figure 104
cis-1,2-dichlorocyclohexane trans-1,2-dichlorocyclohexane
1(R),2(S)-dichlorocyclohexane 1(S),2(S)-dichlorocyclohexane
37.2 E/Z notation
Main article: E-Z System2

The trans/cis system for naming isomers breaks down when there are more than two dif-
ferent substituents on a double bond. (The cis/trans system should only be used when
the carbon atoms involved each have a hydrogen atoms attached). The E/Z notation is
unamibiguous. Z (from the German zusammen ) means together and usually corresponds
to the term cis ; E (from the German entgegen ) means opposite and usually corresponds
to the term trans .
Usually, E isomers are more stable than Z isomers because of steric effects. When two large
groups are closer to each other, as they often are with Z, they interfere more with each
other and have a higher potential energy than with E, where the large groups are farther
apart and interfere less with each other.

154
38 Diastereomers with stereocenters
In simple terms, two stereoisomers are diastereoisomers of each other if only one chiral
center differs between the two stereoisomers. That is to say, if both molecules contain two
or more chiral centers, but if only one of the chiral centers in each molecule is different than
the other, then the two molecules are diastereoisomers of one another.
If a molecule contains a single asymmetric carbon atom or stereocenter , it will have two
mirror image forms. If a molecule contains two asymmetric carbons, there are four possible
configurations, and it would be mathematically and physically impossible for all four to be
mirror images of each other. The more chiral centers in a molecule, the more possibilities
there are for different conformers, and therefore the more possible diastereomers exist.
As an example, tartaric acid contains two asymmetric centers, but two of the configura-
tions of the tartaric acid molecule are equivalent to one another -- and together they are
called meso compounds. This configuration is not optically active, while the remaining two
configurations are D- and L- mirror images. For this reason, the meso form of tartaric acid
is a diastereomer of the other forms.
Figure 105 Figure 106 Figure 107
(natural) tartaric acid D-(-)-tartaric acid mesotartaric acid
L-(+)-tartaric acid levotartaric acid
dextrotartaric acid
(1:1)
DL-tartaric acid
”racemic acid”
The meso form of tartaric acid (right) is a diastereomer of the other forms.
Two common prefixes used to distinguish diastereomers are threo and erythro . When
drawn in the Fischer projection the erythro isomer has two identical substituents on the
same side and the threo isomer has them on opposite sites.
38.1 Carbohydrates
The families of 5 and 6 carbon carbohydrates contain many diastereomers because of the
large numbers of asymmetric centers in these molecules. Since each carbon in the primary
chain of an aldose (one type of carbohydrate) and all but one of the carbons in in the primary
chain of a ketose (another type of carbohydrate) have both a hydrogen and a hydroxyl group
attached, most of the carbons in any given sugar are actually chiral. Since the number of
possible conformers for a chiral molecule is 2 raised to the n power (2n ), where n is the
number of chiral centers, this makes for a great deal of variability in carbohydrates and a
large number of diastereomers.
155
Diastereomers with stereocenters
Figure 108
Figure 109 Figure 110 Figure 111

D-glucose L-glucose D-galactose D-mannose
D-glucose and L-glucose are enantiomers. Other pairs of sugars (e.g. L-glucose and
D-mannose)are diastereomers.
Glucose adopts a ring structure in solution. This is awkward to show with a Fischer pro-
jection so a Haworth projection is usually used instead:
Figure 112
156
Carbohydrates
Figure 113
Figure 114
157
Diastereomers with stereocenters
Figure 115
-OH groups on the right of a Fischer projection are drawn below the ring in the Haworth
projection.
158
39 Diastereoselectivity
Diastereoselectivity is the preference for the formation of one or more than one diastere-
omer over the other in an organic reaction.
159
40 Configurations
40.1 Configuration and conformation
Conformation is the set of possible shapes a molecule can have by means of rotation about
single bonds only .
Configuration is the relative position of the atoms in a molecule that can be changed exclu-
sively by cleaving and forming new chemical bonds.
Isomers have different configurations, although the distinction may be blurred in compounds
where steric hindrance occurs.
161
41 R-S notational system
Stereoisomers are properly named using the Cahn-Ingold-Prelog (CIP) priority rules to
decide which parts of the molecule to consider first.
The rules have evolved to cover many situations, but the basic rules are:
1. Consider the first atom of each part of the molecule. An atom with higher atomic
number has higher priority. (e.g. I > Cl > C > H)
2. If the first atom of two groups is the same, consider the second atom(s) in the same
way as the first. (e.g. -C(CH3 )3 > -CH(CH3 )2 > -CH2 CH3 > -CH3 ). If this does not
assign priority, consider the next atoms until there is a difference.
Realize that when you do this it will mean that sometimes groups with higher total weights
will have lower priority because of a lower weight of the atom that connects them.
41.1 R and S Notation
R- and S-notation use the CIP priority rules for the assignment of the absolute configuration
around a stereocenter.
First, assign priorities as described above to each bonded group surrounding the stereocenter
(1, highest to 4, lowest).
Second, point the lowest priority (4) atom away from you. Follow the direction of the
remaining 3 priorities from highest to lowest priority (lowest to highest number, 1<2<3).
A counterclockwise direction is an S (Latin for sinister , left) configuration. A clockwise
direction is an R (Latin for rectus , right) configuration.
Figure 116 Direction of the travel 1-2-3 dictates configuration
163
R-S notational system
R-S system RULES OF PRIORITY ORDER:-
(1)According to the atomic number when only atom is present and in a group the
direct attached atom is considered with atomic number.
(2)When two or more groups have similar first atom, the priority is determined
by considering the atomic number of second atom.
(3)If the first atom of two same groups have same substitutes of higher no will
get more priority.
(4)More atomic number containing atom and how many atoms are present of the
higher atomic number containing elements.
41.2 E-Z notation
The R-/S- notation is valid only for the the absolute configuration of a center having single
bonds only. In the case of a double bond, the traditional cis /trans nomenclature system is
not sufficiently accurate and the E- /Z- is currently preferred.
The basis is again the CIP priority rules.
See main discussion: E-Z notation1
----
164
42 Unit 4: Haloalkanes
Haloalkanes are alkanes that contain one or more members of the halogen family. The
halogens found in organic molecules are chlorine, bromine, fluorine, and iodine. Some texts
refer to this class of compounds as halogenoalkanes or alkyl halides . This text will
frequently use both haloalkane and alkyl halide , so it’s important to remember that
they are the same thing.
Note: The X in R-X represents a generic halogen atom.
165
43 Preparation
Methods for preparation are found elsewhere in this text:

• Preparation from Alcohols1 (nucleophilic substitution)
• Preparation from Alkanes2 (radical substitution)
• Preparation from Alkenes3 (electrophilic addition)
• Preparation by halogen exchange.*It is generally used for preparing iodoalkanes.
• Preparation from silver salts of acids*

2 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Alkanes
3 Chapter 55.3.6 on page 208
167
44 Properties
44.1 Naming Haloalkanes
Haloalkanes are named by adding a prefix to the name of the alkane from which they are
derived. The prefix denotes the particular halogen used.
F = Fluoro-
Cl = Chloro-
Br = Bromo-
I = Iodo-
If other substituents need to be named, all prefixes are still put in alphabetical order. When
necessary, numbers identify substituent locations.
44.1.1 Example names of haloalkanes
IUPAC name Common name

CH3 —F Fluoromethane Methyl fluoride
CH3 —Cl Chloromethane Methyl chloride
CH3 —Br Bromomethane Methyl bromide
CH3 —I Iodomethane Methyliodide
F—CH2 —F Difluoromethane Methylene fluoride
Cl—CH2 —Cl Dichloromethane Methylene chloride
F—CH2 —Cl Chlorofluoromethane
CHBrClF Bromochlorofluoromethane
HCCl3 Trichloromethane Chloroform
CHX3 Haloforms (X=halogen)
CCl4 Tetrachloromethane Carbon tetrachlo-
ride
CH3 CHCl2 1,1-Dichloroethane
(Dibromomethyl)cyclohexane
Figure 117
169
Properties
Equatorial (Dibro-
momethyl)cyclohexane
Figure 118
Figure 119 1,6-Dichloro-2,5-
dimethylhexane
1,1-Dichloro-3-
methylcyclobutane
44.2 Physical properties
R-X bond polarity: C—F > C—Cl > C—Br > C—I
atom | electronegativity | difference from C (= 2.5) |

F 4.0 1.5
Cl 3.0 0.5
Br 2.8 0.3
I 2.5 0.0
The difference in electronegativity of the carbon-halogen bonds range from 1.5 in C-F to
almost 0 in C-I. This means that the C-F bond is extremely polar, though not ionic, and
the C-I bond is almost nonpolar.
Physical appearance: Haloalkanes are colourless when pure. However bromo and iodo
alkanes develop colour when exposed to light. Many volatile halogen compounds have sweet
smell.
Boiling point: Haloalkanes are generally liquids at room temperature. Haloalkanes gen-
erally have a boiling point that is higher than the alkane they are derived from. This is
due to the increased molecular weight due to the large halogen atoms and the increased
intermolecular forces due to the polar bonds, and the increasing polarizabilty of the halogen.
For the same alkyl group, the boiling point of haloalkanes decreases in the order RI > RBr
> RCl > RF.This is due to the increase in van der Waals forces1 when the size and mass
of the halogen atom increases.
For isomeric haloalkanes, the boiling point decrease with increase in branching. But boiling
points of dihalobenzenes are nearly same; however the para-isomers have higher melting
points as it fits into the crystal lattice better when compared to ortho- and meta-isomers.
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/van%20der%20Waals%20forces
170
Chemical properties
Density: Haloalkanes are generally more dense than the alkane they are derived from and
usually more dense than water. Density increases with the number of carbon and halogen
atom. It also increases with the increase in mass of halogen atom.
Solubility: The haloalkanes are only very slightly soluble in water, but dissolves in organic
solvents. This is because for dissolving haloalkanes in water the strong hydrogen bonds
present in the latter has to be broken. When dissolved in organic (non polar) solvents, the
intermolecular attractions are almost same as that being broken.
Bond Length: C—F < C—Cl < C—Br < C—I
bond length (pm)

C-F 138
C-Cl 177
C-Br 193
C-I 214
Larger atoms means larger bond lengths, as the orbitals on the halogen is larger the heavier
the halogen is. In F, the orbitals used to make the bonds is 2s and 2p, in Cl, it’s 3s and 3p,
in Br, 4s and 4p, and in I, 5s and 5p. The larger the principal quantum number, the bigger
the orbital. This is somewhat offset by the larger effective nuclear charge, but not enough
to reverse the order.
44.3 Chemical properties
Bond strength: C—F > C—Cl > C—Br > C—I
bond strength (kJ mol-1 )

C-F 484
C-Cl 338
C-Br 276
C-I 238
The orbitals C uses to make bonds are 2s and 2p. The overlap integral is larger the closer
the principal quantum number of the orbitals is, so the overlap is larger in the bonds to
lighter halogens, making the bond formation energetically favorable.
Bond reactivity: C—F < C—Cl < C—Br < C—I
Stronger bonds are more difficult to break, making them less reactive. In addition, the
reactivity can also be determined by the stability of the corresponding anion formed in
solution. One of the many trends on the periodic table states that the largest atoms are
located on the bottom right corner, implying that iodine is the largest and fluorine being
the smallest. When fluorine leaves as fluoride (if it does) in the reaction, it is not so stable
compared to iodide. Because there are no resonance forms and inductive stabilizing effects
171
Properties
on these individual atoms, the atoms must utilize their own inherent abilities to stabilize
themselves. Iodide has the greatest surface area out of these four elements, which gives it
the ability to better distribute its negative charge that it has obtained. Fluorine, having
the least surface area, is much more difficult to stabilize. This is the reason why iodine is
the best leaving group out of the four halogens discussed.
172
45 Reactions
Determination of Haloalkanes: A famous test used to determine if a compound is a

haloalkane is the Beilstein test, in which the compound tested is burned in a loop of copper
wire. The compound will burn green if it is a haloalkane. The numbers of fluorine, chlorine,
bromine and iodine atoms present in each molecule can be determined using the sodium
fusion reaction, in which the compound is subjected to the action of liquid sodium, an
exceptionally strong reducing agent, which causes the formation of sodium halide salts.
Qualitative analysis can be used to discover which halogens were present in the original
compound; quantitative analysis is used to find the quantities.
45.1 Substitution reactions of haloalkanes
R-X bonds are very commonly used throughout organic chemistry because their polar bonds
make them reasonably reactive. In a substitution reaction , the halogen (X) is replaced
by another substituent (Y). The alkyl group (R) is not changed.
The ”: ” in a chemical equation represents a pair of unbound electrons.
A general substitution reaction Y: + R—X → R—Y + X:
Substitutions involving haloalkanes involve a type of substition called Nucleophilic sub-

stitution , in which the substituent Y is a nucleophile . A nucleophile is an electron pair
donor. The nucleophile replaces the halogen, an electrophile , which becomes a leaving
group . The leaving group is an electron pair acceptor. Nuclephilic substition reactions
are abbreviated as SN reactions.
”Nu” represents a generic nucleophile.
General nucleophilic substitution reactionsNu:- + R—X → R—Nu + X:-

Nu: + R—X → R—Nu+ + X:-
Common Nucleophiles
Reagent Nucleophile Name Product Product name

NaOH/KOH :O- H Hydroxide R—OH Alcohol
NaOR’ :O- R’ Alkoxide R—O—R’ Ether
:S- H Hydrosulfide R—SH Thiol
NH3 :NH3 Ammonia R—NH3 + Alkylammonium
ion
173
Reactions
KCN :C- N Cyanide R—CN Nitrile

AgCN Ag-CN: Silver R-NC isonitrile
cyanide
:C- ≡C—H Acetylide R-C≡C—H Alkyne
NaI :I- Iodide R—I Alkyl Iodide
R’- M+ :R’- Carbanion R-R’ Alkane
KNO2 O=N—O Nitrite R−O—N=O Alkyl nitrite
AgNO2 Ag—Ö—N=O Silver nitrite R—NO2 Nitroalkane
LiAlH4 H Hydrogen RH alkane
R’COOAg R’COO- Alkanoate R’COOR Ester
Example: Suggest a reaction to produce the following molecule.
Figure 121
Answer:
Figure 122
Figure 123 Ethanolate
OR
Figure 124
174
Substitution reactions of haloalkanes
Figure 125
Bromoethane
Any halogen could be used instead of Br
45.1.1 Reaction mechanisms
Nucleophilic substitution can occur in two different ways. SN 2 involves a backside attack
. SN 1 involves a carbocation intermediate .
SN 2 mechanism
Figure 126 Illustration of the Sn2 mechanism. First, the electrons in the nucleophile
attack the central carbon atom from the side opposite the leaving group (in this case, a
halogen). The electrons forming the bond between the central carbon atom and the
halogen move to the halogen, causing the halogen to leave the molecule.
SN 1 mechanism
Figure 127 Illustration of the Sn1 mechanism. First, in the presence of a polar solvent,
the C-X bond breaks, forming the carbocation. This carbocation intermediate is highly
reactive. In this case, it reacts with water. Note that the water may attack from either
side.
45.1.2 Comparison of SN 1 and SN 2 mechanism
Stereochemistry:
SN 2 - Configuration is inverted (i.e. R to S and vice-versa).
SN 1 - Product is a mixture of inversion and retention of orientation because the carbocation

can be attacked from either side. In theory the products formed are usually racemic due to
the 50% change of attack from the planar conformation. Interestingly, the amount of the
inverted product is often up to 20% greater than the amount of product with the original
orientation. Saul Winstein has proposed that this discrepancy occurs through the leaving
group forming an ion pair with the substrate, which temporarily shields the carbocation
from attack on the side with the leaving group.
Rate of reaction:
SN 2 - Rate depends on concentrations of both the haloalkane and the nucleophile. SN 2
175
Reactions
reactions are fast.
SN 1 - Rate depends only on the concentration of the haloalkane. The carbocation forms
much slower than it reacts with other molecules. This makes SN 1 reactions slow.
Role of solvent:
SN 2 - Polar aprotic solvents favored. Examples: Acetone, THF (an ether), dimethyl
sulfoxide, n,n-dimethylformamide, hexamethylphosphoramide (HMPA).
Nonpolar solvents will also work, such as carbon tetrachloride (CCl4 )
Protic solvents are the worst type for SN 2 reactions because they ”cage,” or solvate, the
nucleophile, making it much less reactive.
SN 1 - Polar protic solvents favored. Examples: H2 O, Formic acid, methanol.
Aprotic solvents will work also, but protic solvents are better because they will stabilize
the leaving group, which is usually negatively charged, by solvating it. Nonpolar solvents
are the worst solvent for SN 1 reactions because they do nothing to stabilize the carbocation
intermediate.
Role of nucleophile:
SN 2 - Good nucleophiles favored
SN 1 - Any nucleophile will work (since it has no effect on reaction rate)
Carbocation stability:
◦
3 carbon - most stable = SN 1 favored
◦
2 carbon - less stable = either could be favored
◦
1 carbon - seldom forms = SN 2 favored
CH3 + - never forms = SN 2 favored
The reason why the tertiary carbocation is most favored is due to the inductive effect. In
the carbocation intermediate, there is a resulting formal charge of +1 on the carbon that
possessed the haloalkane. The positive charge will attract the electrons available. Because
this is tertiary, meaning that adjacent carbon atoms and substituents are available, it will
provide the most electron-density to stabilize this charge.
176
Grignard reagents
45.1.3 Example
Predict whether the following reactions will undergo SN 2 or SN 1 and tell why.
1:
Figure 128
2:
Figure 129
3:
Figure 130
Answers:
1) SN 2. Good nucleophile, polar solvent.
2) SN 1. Tertiary carbon, polar solvent. Very slow reaction rate.
3) SN 2. Primary carbon, good nucleophile, nonpolar solvent.
45.2 Grignard reagents
Grignard reagents are created by reacting magnesium metal with a haloalkane. The mag-
nesium atom gets between the alkyl group and the halogen atom with the general reaction:
R-Br + Mg → R-Mg-Br
Gringard reagents are very reactive and thus provide a means of organic synthesis from
haloalkanes. For example, adding water gives the alcohol R-OH. Basic: R-X + Mg →
R-Mg-X For example (X=Cl and R=CH3): CH3-Cl + Mg → CH3MgCl (methylmagne-
siumchloride)
45.3 Elimination reactions
With alcoholic potassium hydroxide, haloalkanes lose H-X and form the corresponding
alkene. Very strong bases such as KNH2 /NH3 convert vic-dihalides (haloalkanes with two
halogen atoms on adjacent carbons) into alkynes.
----
177
46 Unit 5: Alcohols
Alcohols are the family of compounds that contain one or more hydroxyl (-OH) groups
attached to a single bonded alkane. Alcohols are represented by the general formula -OH.
Alcohols are important in organic chemistry because they can be converted to and from
many other types of compounds. Reactions with alcohols fall into two different categories.
Reactions can cleave the R-O bond or they can cleave the O-H bond.
Ethanol (ethyl alcohol, or grain alcohol) is found in alcoholic beverages, CH3 CH2 OH.
179
47 Preparation
In the Alkenes1 section, we already covered a few methods for synthesizing alcohols. One
is the hydroboration-oxidation of alkenes and the other is the oxymercuration-reduction of
alkenes. But there are a great many other ways of creating alcohols as well.
A common source for producing alcohols is from carbonyl compounds. The choice of car-
bonyl type (ketone, aldehyde, ester, etc.) and the type of reaction (Grignard addition or
Reduction), will determine the product(s) you will get. Fortunately, there are a number of
variations of carbonyls, leading to a number of choices in product.
There are primarily two types of reactions used to create alcohols from carbonyls: Grignard
Addition reactions and Reduction reactions. We’ll look at each type of reaction for each
type of carbonyl.
47.0.1 Grignard Addition Reactions
As we learned previously, Grignard reagents2 are created by reacting magnesium metal with
an alkyl halide (aka haloalkanes3 ). The magnesium atom then gets between the alkyl group
and the halogen atom with the general reaction:
R-X + Mg → R-Mg-X
In our examples, we’ll be using bromine in our Grignard reagents because it’s a common
Grignard halogen and it will keep our examples a little clearer without the need for X.
Figure 131 Mechanism of Grignard reagent reacting with a carbonyl
The general mechanism of a Grignard reagent reacting with a carbonyl (except esters)
involves the creation of a 6-membered ring transition state. The pi bond of the oxygen
attacks a neighboring magnesium bromide which in turn, releases from its R group leaving a
carbocation. At the same time, the magnesium bromide ion from another Grignard molecule
is attacked by the carbocation and has its magnesium bromide ion stolen (restoring it to
its original state as a Grignard reagent). The second molecule’s carbocation is then free
to attack the carbanion resulting from the vacating pi bond, attaching the R group to the
carbonyl.
At this point, there is a magnesium bromide on the oxygen of what was a carbonyl. The
proton from the acidic solvent easily displaces this magnesium bromide ion and protonates

181
Preparation
the oxygen, creating a primary alcohol with formaldehyde, a secondary alcohol with an
aldehyde and a tertiary alcohol with a ketone.
With esters, the mechanism is slightly different. Two moles of Grignard are required for
each mole of the ester. Initially, the pi bond on the carbonyl oxygen attacks the magnesium
bromide ion. This opens up the carbon for attack from the R group of the Grignard. This
part of the reaction is slow because of the dual oxygens off of the carbon providing some
resonance stabilization. The oxygen’s pi bond then re-forms, expelling the O-R group of the
ester which then joins with the magnesium bromide, leaving R-O-MgBr and a ketone. The
R-O-MgBr is quickly protonated from the acidic solution and the ketone is then attacked
by Grignard reagent via the mechanism described earlier.
Synthesis from Formaldehyde
Figure 132 Synthesis of alcohol from formaldehyde and Grignard reagent
The image above shows the synthesis of an alcohol from formaldehyde reacted with a Grig-
nard reagent. When a formaldehyde is the target of the Grignard’s attack, the result is a
primary alcohol.
Synthesis from an Aldehyde
Figure 133 Synthesis of alcohol from an aldehyde and Grignard reagent
The image above shows the synthesis of an alcohol from an aldehyde reacted with a Grignard
reagent. When an aldehyde is the target of the Grignard’s attack, the result is a secondary
alcohol.
Synthesis from a Ketone
Figure 134 Synthesis of alcohol from an ketone and Grignard reagent
The image above shows the synthesis of an alcohol from a ketone reacted with a Grignard
reagent. When a ketone is the target of the Grignard’s attack, the result is a tertiary
alcohol.
182
Elimination reactions
Synthesis from an Ester
Figure 135 Synthesis of alcohol from an ester and Grignard reagent
The image above shows the synthesis of an alcohol from an ester reacted with a Grignard
reagent. When an ester is the target of the Grignard’s attack, the result is a tertiary alcohol
and a primary alcohol. The primary alcohol is always from the -O-R portion of the ester
and the tertiary alcohol is the other R groups of the ester combined with the R group from
the Grignard reagent.
Synthesis from an Epoxide
Figure 136 Synthesis of alcohol from an epoxide and Grignard reagent
We will discuss reactions with Epoxides later when we cover epoxides, but for now, we’ll
briefly discuss the synthesis of an alcohol from an epoxide. The nature of the reaction is
different than with the carbonyls, as might be expected. The reaction of Grignard reagents
with epoxides is regioselective. The Grignard reagent attacks at the least substituted side
of the carbon-oxygen bonds, if there is one. In this case, one carbon has 2 hydrogens and
the other has 1, so the R group attacks the carbon with 2 hydrogens, breaking the bond
with oxygen which is then protonated by the acidic solution. leaving a secondary alcohol
and a concatenated carbon chain. The R group can be alkyl or aryl.
Organolithium Alternative
As an alternative to Grignard reagents, organolithium reagents can be used as well. Organo-

lithium reagents are slightly more reactive, but produce the same general results as Grignard
reagents, including the synthesis from epoxides.
183
Preparation
47.0.2 Reduction
Synthesis from an Aldehyde
Figure 137 Synthesis of alcohol from an aldehyde by reduction.
The image above shows the synthesis of an alcohol from an aldehyde by reduction.
Synthesis from a Ketone
Figure 138 Synthesis of alcohol from an aldehyde by reduction
The image above shows the synthesis of an alcohol from a ketone by reduction.
Synthesis from an Ester
Figure 139 Synthesis of alcohol from an ester by reduction
The image above shows the synthesis of an alcohol from an ester by reduction. Esters can
be hydrolysed to form an alcohol and a carboxylic acid.
Synthesis from a Carboxylic Acid
Figure 140 Synthesis of alcohol from a carboxylic acid by reduction
The image above shows the synthesis of an alcohol from a carboxylic acid reacted by re-
duction.
184
48 Properties
48.1 Naming alcohols
Follow these rules to name alcohols the IUPAC way:

1. find the longest carbon chain containing at least one OH group, this is the parent
a) if there are multiple OH groups, look for the chain with the most of them, and
the way to count as many carbons in that chain
b) name as an alcohol, alkane diol, triol, etc.
2. number the OH groups, giving each group the lowest number possible when different
numbering possibilities exist
3. treat all other groups as lower priority substituents (alcohol / hydroxy groups are the
highest priority group for naming)
48.1.1 Example alcohols
IUPAC name Common name

CH3 CH2 OH Ethanol Ethyl alcohol
CH3 CH2 CH2 -OH 1-Propanol n-Propyl alcohol
(CH3 )2 CH-OH 2-Propanol Isopropyl alcohol (Note: Isopropanol
would be incorrect. Cannot mixand match
between systems.)
2-Ethylbutan-1-ol 2-Ethylbutanol
3-Methyl-3-pentanol
2,2-Dimethylcyclopropanol
Multiple OH functional groups
1,2-Ethanediol Ethylene glycol
1,1-Ethanediol Acetaldehyde hydrate
1,4-Cyclohexanediol
(form that body fat is stored as) 1,2,3-Propanetriol Glycerol
-
OH can be named as a substituent hy-
droxyl group (hydroxyalkanes)
1,2-Di(hydroxymethyl)cyclohexane
2-(hydroxymethyl)-1,3-propanediol
Find the longest chain of carbons contain-
ing the maximum number of- OH groups
1-(1-hydroxyethyl)-1-methylcyclopropane
2-(1-methylcyclopropyl)ethanol
2-(2-hydroxyethyl)-2-methylcyclopropanol
3-(2-hydroxyethyl)-3-methyl-1,2-
cyclopropanediol
48.2 Acidity
In an O-H bond, the O steals the H’s electron due to its electronegativity, and O can carry
a negative charge (R-O- ). This leads to deprotonation in which the nucleus of the H,
a proton, leaves completely. This makes the -OH group (and alcohols) Bronsted acids.
185
Properties
Alcohols are weak acids, even weaker than water. Ethanol has a pKa of 15.9 compared to
water’s pKa of 15.7. The larger the alcohol molecule, the weaker an acid it is.
On the other hand, alcohols are also weakly basic. This may seem to be contradictory--how
can a substance be both an acid and a base? However, substances exist that can be an
acid or a base depending on the circumstances. Such a compound is said to be amphoteric
or amphiprotic. As a Bronsted base, the oxygen atom in the -OH group can accept a
proton (hydrogen ion.) This results in a positively-charged species known as an oxonium
ion. Oxonium ions have the general formula ROH2 + , where R is any alkyl group.
48.3 Alkoxides
When O becomes deprotonated, the result is an alkoxide . Alkoxides are anions. The names
of alkoxides are based on the original molecule. (Ethanol=ethoxide, butanol=butoxide, etc.)
Alkoxides are good nucleophiles due to the negative charge on the oxygen atom.
48.3.1 Producing an alkoxide
R-OH -> H+ + R-O-

In this equation, R-O- is the alkoxide produced and is the conjugate base of R-OH
Alcohols can be converted into alkoxides by reaction with a strong base (must be stronger
than OH- ) or reaction with metallic sodium or potassium. Alkoxides themselves are basic.
The larger an alkoxide molecule is, the more basic it is.
186
49 Reactions
49.1 Conversion of alcohols to haloalkanes
Recall that haloalkanes can be converted to alcohols through nucleophilic substitution.
Conversion of a haloalkane to an alcoholR-X + OH- → R-OH + X-
This reaction proceeds because X (a halogen) is a good leaving group and OH- is a good
nucleophile. OH, however, is a poor leaving group. To make the reverse reaction proceed,
OH must become a good leaving group. This is done by protonating the OH, turning it
into H2 O+ , which is a good leaving group. H+ must be present to do this. Therefore,
the compounds that can react with alcohols to form haloalkanes are HBr, HCl, and HI.
Just like the reverse reaction, this process can occur through SN 2 (backside attack) or SN 1
(carbocation intermediate) mechanisms.
SN 2 conversion of an alcohol to a haloalkaneR-O-H + H+ + X- → R-O+ -H2 + X- →

R-X + H2 O
SN 1 conversion of an alcohol to a haloalkaneR-O-H + H+ + X- → R-O+ -H2 + X- → R+ + H2 O +

X- → R-X + H2 O
As stated in the haloalkane chapter, the two mechanisms look similar but the mechanism
affects the rate of reaction and the stereochemistry of the product.
49.2 Oxidation of alcohols
Oxidation in organic chemistry always involves either the addition of oxygen atoms (or
other highly electronegative elements like sulfur or nitrogen) or the removal of hydrogen
atoms. Whenever a molecule is oxidized, another molecule must be reduced. Therefore,
these reactions require a compound that can be reduced. These compounds are usually
inorganic. They are referred to as oxidizing reagents .
With regards to alcohol, oxidizing reagents can be strong or weak. Weak reagants are able to
oxidize a primary alcohol group into a aldehyde group and a secondary alcohol into a ketone.
Thus, the R-OH (alcohol) functional group becomes R=O (carbonyl) after a hydrogen atom
is removed. Strong reagents will further oxidize the aldehyde into a carboxylic acid (COOH).
Tertiary alcohols cannot be oxidized.
187
Reactions
An example of a strong oxidizing reagent is chromic acid (H2 CrO4 ). An example of a weak
oxidizing reagent is pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC) (C5 H6 NCrO3 Cl).
id:Kimia Organik/Alkohol1
----
1 https://id.wikibooks.org/wiki/Kimia%20Organik%2FAlkohol
188
50 Unit 6: Amine
1. REDIRECT Organic Chemistry/Amines1

----
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic%20Chemistry%2FAmines
189
51 Unit 7: Alkenes
<< Haloalkanes1 |Alkenes | Alkynes >>2

Alkenes are aliphatic3 hydrocarbons4 containing carbon-carbon double bonds and general
formula Cn H2n .

2 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic%20Chemistry%2FAlkynes
191
52 Naming Alkenes
Alkenes are named as if they were alkanes, but the ”-ane” suffix is changed to ”-ene”. If the
alkene contains only one double bond and that double bond is terminal (the double bond
is at one end of the molecule or another) then it is not necessary to place any number in
front of the name.
butane: C4 H10 (CH3 CH2 CH2 CH3 )
butene: C4 H8 (CH2 =CHCH2 CH3 )

If the double bond is not terminal (if it is on a carbon somewhere in the center of the
chain) then the carbons should be numbered in such a way as to give the first of the two
double-bonded carbons the lowest possible number, and that number should precede the
”ene” suffix with a dash, as shown below.
correct: pent-2-ene (CH3 CH=CHCH2 CH3 )
incorrect: pent-3-ene (CH3 CH2 CH=CHCH3 )
The second one is incorrect because flipping the formula horizontally results in a lower
number for the alkene.
If there is more than one double bond in an alkene, all of the bonds should be numbered
in the name of the molecule - even terminal double bonds. The numbers should go from
lowest to highest, and be separated from one another by a comma. The IUPAC numerical
prefixes are used to indicate the number of double bonds.
octa-2,4-diene: CH3 CH=CHCH=CHCH2 CH2 CH3
deca-1,5-diene: CH2 =CHCH2 CH2 CH=CHCH2 CH2 CH2 CH3

Note that the numbering of ”2-4” above yields a molecule with two double bonds separated
by just one single bond. Double bonds in such a condition are called ”conjugated”, and
they represent an enhanced stability of conformation, so they are energetically favored as
reactants in many situations and combinations.
52.1 EZ Notation
Earlier in stereochemistry, we discussed cis/trans notation where cis- means same side and
trans- means opposite side. Alkenes can present a unique problem, however in that the
193
Naming Alkenes
cis/trans notation sometimes breaks down. The first thing to keep in mind is that alkenes
are planar and there’s no rotation of the bonds, as we’ll discuss later. So when a substituent
is on one side of the double-bond, it stays on that side.
Figure 141 cis-but-2-ene and trans-but-2-ene
The above example is pretty straight-forward. On the left, we have two methyl groups on
the same side, so it’s cis-but-2-ene. And on the right, we have them on opposite sides, so we
have trans-but-2-ene. So in this situation, the cis/trans notation works and, in fact, these
are the correct names.
Figure 142 (E)-3-methylpent-2-ene and (Z)-3-methylpent-2-ene
From the example above, how would you use cis and trans? Which is the same side and
which is the opposite side? Whenever an alkene has 3 or 4 differing substituents, one must
use the what’s called the EZ nomenclature, coming from the German words, Entgegen
(opposite) and Zusammen (same).
E : Entgegen, opposite sides of double bond

Z : Zusammen, same sides (zame zides) of double bond
Let’s begin with (Z)-3-methylpent-2-ene. We begin by dividing our alkene into left and
right halves. On each side, we assign a substituent as being either a high priority or low
priority substituent. The priority is based on the atomic number of the substituents. So on
the left side, hydrogen is the lowest priority because its atomic number is 1 and carbon is
higher because its atomic number is 6.
On the right side, we have carbon substituents on both the top and bottom, so we go out
to the next bond. On to the top, there’s another carbon, but on the bottom, a hydrogen.
So the top gets high priority and the bottom gets low priority.
Because the high priorities from both sides are on the same side, they are Zusammen (as a
mnemonic, think ’Zame Zide’).
Now let’s look at (E)-3-methylpent-2-ene. On the left, we have the same substituents on
the same sides, so the priorities are the same as in the Zusammen version. However, the
substituents are reversed on the right side with the high priority substituent on the bottom
and the low priority substituent on the top. Because the High and Low priorities are
opposite on the left and right, these are Entgegen, or opposite.
The system takes a little getting used to and it’s usually easier to name an alkene than it
is to write one out given its name. But with a little practice, you’ll find that it’s quite easy.
52.1.1 Comparison of E-Z with cis-trans
(Z)-but-2-ene (E)-but-2-ene
cis-but-2-ene trans-but-2-ene
194
EZ Notation
To a certain extent, the Z configuration can be regarded as the cis- isomer and the E as the
trans- isomers. This correspondence is exact only if the two carbon atoms are identically
substituted.
In general, cis-trans should only be used if each double-bonded carbon atom has a hydrogen
atom (i.e. R-CH=CH-R’).
IUPAC Gold book on cis-trans notation.1
IUPAC Gold book on E-Z notation.2
1 http://goldbook.iupac.org/C01093.html
2 http://goldbook.iupac.org/E01882.html
195
53 Properties
Alkenes are molecules with carbons bonded to hydrogens which contain at least two sp2
hybridized carbon atoms. That is, to say, at least one carbon-to-carbon double bond, where
the carbon atoms, in addition to an electron pair shared in a sigma (σ) bond, share one
pair of electrons in a pi (π) bond between them.
The general formula for an aliphatic alkene is: Cn H2n -- e.g. C2 H4 or C3 H6
53.1 Diastereomerism
53.1.1 Restricted rotation
Because of the characteristics of pi-bonds, alkenes have very limited rotation around the
double bonds between two atoms. In order for the alkene structure to rotate the pi-bond
would first have to be broken - which would require about 60 or 70 kcal of energy. For
this reason alkenes have different chemical properties based on which side of the bond each
atom is located.
For example, but-2-ene exists as two diastereomers1 :
(Z)-but-2-ene (E)-But-2-ene
cis-but-2-ene trans-but-2-ene
197
54 Relative stability
Observing the reaction of the addition of hydrogen to 1-butene, (Z)-2-butene, and (E)-2-
butene, we can see that all of the products are butane. The difference between the reactions
is that each reaction has a different energy: -30.3 kcal/mol for 1-butene, -28.6 kcal/mol for
(Z)-2-butene and -27.6 kcal/mol for (E)-2-butene. This illustrates that there are differences
in the stabilities of the three species of butene isomers, due to the difference in how much
energy can be released by reducing them.
The relative stability of alkenes may be estimated based on the following concepts:
• An internal alkene (the double bond not on the terminal carbon) is more stable than a
terminal alkene (the double bond is on a terminal carbon).
Internal alkenes are more stable than terminal alkenes because they are connected to more
carbons on the chain. Since a terminal alkene is located at the end of the chain, the double
bond is only connected to one carbon, and is called primary (1°). Primary carbons are the
least stable. In the middle of a chain, a double bond could be connected to two carbons.
This is called secondary (2°). The most stable would be quaternary (4°).
• In general, the more and the bulkier the alkyl groups on a sp2 -hybridized carbon in the
alkene, the more stable that alkene is.
• A trans double bond is more stable than a cis double bond.
199
55 Reactions
55.1 Preparation
There are several methods for creating alkenes.1 Some of these methods, such as the Wittig
reaction, we’ll only describe briefly in this chapter and instead, cover them in more detail
later in the book. For now, it’s enough to know that they are ways of creating alkenes.
55.1.1 Dehydrohalogenation of Haloalkanes
Figure 147 Synthesis of alkene by dehydrohalogenation
Alkyl halides are converted into alkenes by dehydrohalogenation: elimination of the

elements of hydrogen halide. Dehydrohalogenation involves removal of the halogen atom
together with a hydrogen atom from a carbon adjacent to the one bearing the halogen. It
uses the E2 elimination mechanism that we’ll discuss in detail at the end of this chapter The
haloalkane must have a hydrogen and halide 180° from each other on neighboring carbons.
If there is no hydrogen 180° from the halogen on a neighboring carbon, the reaction will
not take place. It is not surprising that the reagent required for the elimination of what
amounts to a molecule of acid is a strong base for example: alcholic KOH.
In some cases this reaction yields a single alkene. and in other cases
yield a mixture. n-Butyl chloride, for example, can eliminate hydrogen only from
C-2 and hence yields only 1-butene. sec-Butyl chloride, on the other hand, can
eliminate hydrogen from either C-l or C-3 and hence yields both 1-butene and
2-butene. Where the two alkenes can be formed, 2-butene is the chief product.
55.1.2 Dehalogenation of Vicinal Dibromides
Figure 148 Synthesis of alkene via debromination of vicinal dihalides using Sodium
Iodide
Figure 149 Synthesis of alkene via debromination of vicinal dihalides using Zinc
1 IIT Chemistry by Dr.O.P.Agrawal and Avinash Agrawal
201
Reactions
The dehalogenation of vicinal dihalides (halides on two neighboring carbons, think ”vicin-
ity”) is another method for synthesizing alkenes. The reaction can take place using either
sodium iodide in a solution of acetone, or it can be performed using zinc dust in a solution
of either heated ethanol or acetic acid.
This reaction can also be performed with magnesium in ether, though the mechanism is
different as this actually produces, as an intermediate, a Grignard reagent that reacts with
itself and and causes an elimination, resulting in the alkene.
55.1.3 Dehydration of alcohols
Figure 150 Synthesis of alkene by dehydration of an alcohol
An alcohol is converted into an alkene by dehydration: elimination of a molecule of water.

Dehydration requires the presence of an acid and the application of heat. It is generally
carried out in either of two ways, heating the alcohol with sulfuric or phosphoric acid to
temperatures as high as 200, or passing the alcohol vapor over alumina, Al2 O3 , at 350-400,
alumina here serving as a Lewis acid. Ease of dehydration of alcohols : 3° > 2° > 1° Where
isomeric alkenes can be formed, we again find the tendency for one isomer to predominate.
Thus, sec-butyl alcohol, which might yield both 2-butene and 1-butene, actually yields
almost exclusively the 2-isomer The formation of 2-butene from n-butyl alcohol illustrates
a characteristic of dehydration that is not shared by dehydrohalogenalion: the double bond
can be formed at a position remote from the carbon originally holding the -OH group. This
characteristic is accounted for later. It is chiefly because of the greater certainty as to where
the double bond will appear that dehydrohalogeation is often preferred over dehydration as
a method of making alkenes.
55.1.4 Reduction of Alkenes
Reduction of an alkene to the double-bond stage can unless the triple bond is at the end of
a chain yield either a cis-alkene or a trans-alkene. Just which isomer predominates depends
upon the choice of reducing agent. Predominantly trans-alkene is obtained by reduction of
alkenes with sodium or lithium in liquid ammonia. Almost entirely cis-alkene (as high as
98%) is obtained by hydrogenation of alkenes with several different catalysts : a specially
prepared palladium called Lindlar’s catalyst; or a nickel boride called P-2 catalyst. Each of
these reactions is, then, highly stereoselective. The stereoselectivity in the cis-reduction of
alkynes is attributed, in a general way, to the attachment of two hydrogens to the same side
of an alkyne sitting on the catalyst surface; presumably this same stereochemistry holds for
the hydrogenation of terminal alkenes which cannot yield cis- and trans-alkenes.
55.1.5 Wittig Reaction
Figure 151 Synthesis of alkene via Wittig reaction
202
Markovnikov’s Rule
55.2 Markovnikov’s Rule
Before we continue discussing reactions, we need to take a detour and discuss a subject that’s
very important in Alkene reactions, ”Markovnikov’s Rule.” This is a simple rule stated by
the Russian Vladmir Markovnikov in 1869, as he was showing the orientation of addition
of HBr to alkenes.
His rule states:”When an unsymmetrical alkene reacts with a hydrogen halide to give an
alkyl halide, the hydrogen adds to the carbon of the alkene that has the greater number of
hydrogen substituents, and the halogen to the carbon of the alkene with the fewer number
of hydrogen substituents” (This rule is often compared to the phrase: ”The rich get richer
and the poor get poorer.” Aka, the Carbon with the most Hydrogens gets another Hydrogen
and the one with the least Hydrogens gets the halogen)
This means that the nucleophile of the electophile-nucleophile pair is bonded to the position
most stable for a carbocation, or partial positive charge in the case of a transition state.
55.2.1 Examples
CH2 = CH − CH3 + H − Br− > CH3 − CHBr − CH3 Here the Br attaches to the mid-
dle carbon over the terminal carbon, because of Markovnikov’s rule, and this is called a
Markovnikov product.
55.2.2 Markovnikov product
The product of a reaction that follows Markovnikov’s rule is called a Markovnikov product.
55.2.3 Markovnikov addition
Markovnikov addition is an addition reaction which follows Markovnikov’s rule, producing

a Markovnikov product.
55.2.4 Anti-Markovnikov addition
Certain reactions produce the opposite of the Markovnikov product, yielding what is called
anti-Markovnikov product. That is, hydrogen ends up on the more substituted carbon of
the double bond. The hydroboration/oxidation reaction that we’ll discuss shortly, is an
example of this, as are reactions that are conducted in peroxides.
A modernized version of Markovnikov’s rule often explains the ”anti-Markovnikov” behavior.
The original Markovnikov rule predicts that the hydrogen (an electrophile) being added
across a double bond will end up on the carbon with more hydrogens. Generalizing to
all electrophiles, it is really the electrophile which ends up on the carbon with the greatest
number of hydrogens. Usually hydrogen plays the role of the electrophile; however, hydrogen
can also act as an nucleophile in some reactions. The following expansion of Markovnikov’s
rule is more versitile:
203
Reactions
”When an alkene undergoes electrophilic addition, the electrophile adds to the carbon with
the greatest number of hydrogen substituents. The nucleophile adds to the more highly
substituated carbon.”
Or more simply:
”The species that adds first adds to the carbon with the greatest number of hydrogens.”
The fact that some reactions reliably produce anti-Markovnikov products is actually a pow-
erful tool in organic chemistry. For example, in the reactions we discuss below, we’ll show
two different ways of creating alcohols from alkenes: Oxymercuration-Reduction and Hy-
droboration/Oxidation. Oxymercuration produces a Markovnikov product while Hydrob-
oration produces an anti-Markovnikov product. This gives the organic chemist a choice
in products without having to be stuck with a single product that might not be the most
desired.
55.2.5 Why it works
Markovnikov’s rule works because of the stability of carbocation intermediates2 . Experi-

ments tend to reveal that carbocations are planar molecules, with a carbon that has three
substituents at 120° to each other and a vacant p orbital that is perpendicular to it in the
3rd plane. The p orbital extends above and below the trisubstituent plane.
This leads to a stabilizing effect called hyperconjugation. Hyperconjugation is what happens
when there is an unfilled (antibonding or vacant) C-C π orbital and a filled C-H σ bond
orbital next to each other. The result is that the filled C-H σ orbital interacts with the
unfilled C-C π orbital and stabilizes the molecule. The more highly substituted the molecule,
the more chances there are for hyperconjugation and thus the more stable the molecule is.
Another stabilizing effect is an inductive effect3 .
55.2.6 Exceptions to the Rule
There are a few exceptions to the Markovnikov rule, and these are of tremendous importance
to organic synthesis.
1. HBr in Hydrogen Peroxide: Due to formation of free radicals, and the mechanism
in which it reacts, the alkyl free radical forms at the middle atom, where it is most
stable, and a hydrogen attaches itself here. Note here hydrogen addition is the second
step, unlike in the above example.

https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic%20Chemistry%2FIntroduction%20to%20reactions%
3
2FInductive%20effect
204
Addition reactions
55.3 Addition reactions
55.3.1 Hydroboration
Hydroboration is a very useful reaction in Alkenes, not as an end product so much as an

intermediate product for further reactions. The primary one we’ll discuss below is the
Hydroboration/Oxidation reaction which is actually an a hydroboration reaction followed
by a completely separate oxidation reaction.
Figure 152 Hydroboration mechanism
The addition of BH3 is a concerted reaction in that several bonds are broken and formed
at the same time. Hydroboration happens in what’s called syn-addition4 because the boron
and one of its hydrogens attach to the same side of the alkene at the same time. As you
can see from the transition state in the center of the image, this produces a sort of box
between the two alkene carbons and the boron and its hydrogen. In the final step, the
boron, along with its other two hydrogens, remains attached to one carbon and the other
hydrogen attaches to the adjacent carbon.
This description is fairly adequate, however, the reaction actually continues to happen and
the -BH2 continue to react with other alkenes giving an R2 BH and then again, until you
end up with a complex of the boron atom attached to 3 alkyl groups, or R3 B.
This trialkyl-boron complex is then used in other reactions to produce various products.
Figure 153 B2 H6 complex Figure 154 BH3 -THF complex
Borane, in reality, is not stable as BH3 . Boron, in this configuration has only 6 electrons
and wants 8, so in its natural state it actually creates the B2 H6 complex shown on the left.
Furthermore, instead of using B2 H6 itself, BH3 is often used in a complex with tetrahy-
drofuran (THF) as shown in the image on the right.In either situation, the result of the
reactions are the same.
55.3.2 Hydroboration/Oxidation
5
Figure 155 Hydroboration/Oxidation reaction
With the reagent diborane, (BH3 )2 , alkenes undergo hydroboration to yield alkylboranes,
R3 B, which on oxidation give alcohols.The reaction procedure is simple and convenient,
the yields are exceedingly high, and the products are ones difficult to obtain from alkenes
in anyother way. Diborane is the dimer of the hypothetical BH3 (borane) and, in the

5 Organic Chemistry, John McMurry
205
Reactions
reactions that concern us, acts much as though it were BH3 . Indeed, in tetrahydrofuran,
one of the solvents used for hydroboration, the reagent exists as the monomer, in the form
of an acid-base complex with the solvent. Hydroboration involves addition to the double
bond of BH3 (or, in following stages, BH2 R and BHR2 ), with hydrogen becoming attached
to one doubly-bonded carbon, and boron to the other. The alkylborane can then undergo
oxidation, in which the boron is replaced by -OH. Thus, the two-stage reaction process of
hydroboration-oxidation permits, in effect, the addition to the carbon-carbon double bond
of the elements of H-OH. Reaction is carried out in an ether, commonly tetrahydrofuran
or ”diglyme” (diethylene glycol methyl ether, CH3 OCH2 CH2 OCH2 CH2 OCH3 ). Diborane is
commercially available in tetrahydrofuran solution. The alkylboranes are not isolated, but
are simply treated in situ with alkaline hydrogen peroxide.
Stereochemistry and Orientation

Hydroboration-oxidation, then, converts alkenes into alcohols. Addition is highly re-
giospecific; the preferred product here, however, is exactly opposite to the one formed by
oxymercuration-demercuration or by direct acid-catalyzed hydration. The hydroboration-
oxtdation process gives products corresponding to anti-Markovnikov addition of water
to the carbon-carbon double bond. The reaction of 3,3-dimethyl-l -butene illustrates a
particular advantage of the method. Rearrangement does not occur in hydroboration ev-
idently because carbonium ions are not intermediates and hence the method can be used
without the complications that often accompany other addition reactions. The reaction of
1,2-dimethylcyclopentene illustrates the stereochemistry of the synthesis: hydroboration-
oxidation involves overallsyn addition .
55.3.3 Oxymercuration/Reduction
6
Figure 156 Oxymercuration/Reduction of 1-propene
Alkenes react with mercuric acetate in the presence of water to give hydroxymercurial
compounds which on reduction yield alcohols. The first stage, oxymercuration, involves
addition to the carbon-carbon double bond of -OH and -HgOAc. Then, in reduction, the
-HgOAc is replaced by -H. The reaction sequence amounts to hydration of the alkene, but is
much more widely applicable than direct hydration. The two-stage process of oxymercura-
tion/reduction is fast and convenient, takes place under mild conditions, and gives excellent
yields often over 90%. The alkene is added at room temperature to an aqueous solution
of mercuric acetate diluted with the solvent tetrahydrofuran. Reaction is generally com-
plete within minutes. The organomercurial compound is not isolated but is simply reduced
in situ by sodium borohydride, NaBH4 . (The mercury is recovered as a ball of elemental
mercury.) Oxymercuration/reduction is highly regiospecific, and gives alcohols correspond-
ing to Markovnikov addition of water to the carbon-carbon doublen bond. Oxymercuration
involves electrophilic addition to the carbon-carbon double bond, with the mercuric ion act-
ing as electrophile. The absence of rearrangement and the high degree of stereospecificity
6 Organic Chemistry, John McMurry
206
Addition reactions
(typically anti) in the oxymercuration step argues against an open carbonium ion as inter-
mediate. Instead, it has been proposed, there is formed a cyclic mercurinium ion, analogous
to the bromonium and chloronium ions involved in the addition of halogens. In 1971, Olah
reported spectroscopic evidence for the preparation of stable solutions of such mercurinium
ions. The mercurinium ion is attacked by the nucleophilic solvent water, in the present case
to yield the addition product. This attack is back-side (unless prevented by some structural
feature) and the net result is anti addition, as in the addition of halogens. Attack is thus of
the SN 2 type; yet the orientation of addition shows that the nucleophile becomes attached
to the more highly substituted carbon as though there were a free carbonium ion interme-
diate. As we shall see, the transition state in reactions of such unstable threemembered
rings has much SN 1 character. Reduction is generally not stereospecific and can, in certain
special cases, be accompanied by rearrangement. Despite the stereospecificity of the first
stage, then, the overall process is not,in general, stereospecific. Rearrangements can occur,
but are not common. The reaction of 3,3-dimethyl-1-butene illustrates the absence of the
rearrangements that are typical of intermediate carbonium ions.
55.3.4 Diels-Alder Reaction
The Diels–Alder reaction is a reaction (specifically, a cycloaddition) between a conjugated

diene and a substituted alkene, commonly termed the dienophile, to form a substituted
cyclohexene system. The reaction can proceed even if some of the atoms in the newly formed
ring are not carbon. Some of the Diels–Alder reactions are reversible; the decomposition
reaction of the cyclic system is then called the retro-Diels–Alder.
Figure 157 Diels-alder for 1,3-butadiene-Ethylene
The Diels–Alder reaction is generally considered one of the more useful reactions in organic
chemistry since it requires very little energy to create a cyclohexene ring, which is useful
in many other organic reactions A concerted, single-step mechanism is almost certainly
involved; both new carbon-carbon bonds are partly formed in the same transition state,
although not necessarily to the same extent. The Diels-Alder reaction is the most important
example of cycloaddition. Since reaction involves a system of 4 π electrons (the diene) and
a system of 2 π it electrons (the dienophile), it is known as a [4 + 2] cycloaddition.
55.3.5 Catalytic addition of hydrogen
Catalytic hydrogenation of alkenes produce the corresponding alkanes. The reaction is car-
ried out under pressure in the presence of a metallic catalyst. Common industrial catalysts
are based on platinum, nickel or palladium, but for laboratory syntheses, Raney nickel7
(formed from an alloy of nickel and aluminium) is often employed.
The catalytic hydrogenation of ethylene to yield ethane proceeds thusly:
CH2 =CH2 + H2 + catalyst → CH3 -CH3
7 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Raney%20nickel
207
Reactions
55.3.6 Electrophilic addition
Most addition reactions to alkenes follow the mechanism of electrophilic addition. An

example is the Prins reaction8 , where the electrophile is a carbonyl group.
Halogenation
Addition of elementary bromine or chlorine to alkenes yield vicinal dibromo- and

dichloroalkanes, respectively.
The decoloration of a solution of bromine in water is an analytical test for the presence of
alkenes: CH2 =CH2 + Br2 → BrCH2 -CH2 Br
The reaction works because the high electron density at the double bond causes a temporary
shift of electrons in the Br-Br bond causing a temporary induced dipole. This makes the
Br closest to the double bond slightly positive and therefore an electrophile.
Hydrohalogenation
Addition of hydrohalic acids like HCl or HBr to alkenes yield the corresponding haloalkanes.
an example of this type of reaction: CH3 CH=CH2 + HBr → CH3 -CHBr-CH3
If the two carbon atoms at the double bond are linked to a different number of hydrogen
atoms, the halogen is found preferentially at the carbon with less hydrogen substituents
(Markovnikov’s rule).
Addition of a carbene or carbenoid yields the corresponding cyclopropane
55.3.7 Oxidation
Alkenes are oxidized with a large number of oxidizing agents. In the presence of oxygen,
alkenes burn with a bright flame to carbon dioxide and water. Catalytic oxidation with
oxygen or the reaction with percarboxylic acids yields epoxides.
Reaction with ozone in ozonolysis leads to the breaking of the double bond, yielding two
aldehydes or ketones: R1 -CH=CH-R2 + O3 → R1 -CHO + R2 -CHO + H2 O
This reaction can be used to determine the position of a double bond in an unknown alkene.
55.3.8 Polymerization
Polymerization of alkenes is an economically important reaction which yields polymers of

high industrial value, such as the plastics polyethylene and polypropylene. Polymerization
can either proceed via a free-radical or an ionic mechanism.
8 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Prins%20reaction
208
56 Substitution and Elimination
Reaction Mechanisms
56.1 Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions
Nucleophilic substitution reactions (SN 1 and SN 2 ) are very closely related to the E1 and E2
elimination reactions, discussed later in this section, and it is generally a good idea to learn
the reactions together, as there are parallels in reaction mechanism, preferred substrates,
and the reactions sometimes compete with each other.
It’s important to understand that substitution and elimination reactions are not associated
with a specific compound or mixture so much as they’re a representation of how certain
reactions take place. At times, combinations of these mechanisms may occur together in
the same reaction or may compete against each other, with influences such as solvent or
nucleophile choice being the determining factor as to which reaction will dominate.
NoteIn the notation SN 1 and SN 2,

S stands for substitution (something takes the place of something else)
N : stands for nucleophilic (a nucleophile displaces another nucleophile)
1 : stands for unimolecular (the concentration of only one kind of molecule determines the rate of
the reaction)
2 : stands for bimolecular (the concentration of two types of molecules determine the rate of the
reaction)
In nucleophilic substitution, a nucleophile attacks a molecule and takes the place of another
nucleophile, which then leaves. The nucleophile that leaves is called the leaving group .
Nucleophilic substitutions require
1. a nucleophile (such as a Lewis base)
2. an electrophile with a leaving group
A leaving group is a charged or neutral moiety (group) which breaks free.
56.1.1 SN 1 vs SN 2
One of the main differences between SN 1 and SN 2 is that the SN 1 reaction is a 2-step
reaction, initiated by disassociation of the leaving group. The SN 2 reaction, on the other
hand, is a 1-step reaction where the attacking nucleophile, because of its higher affinity for
and stronger bonding with the carbon, forces the leaving group to leave. These two things
happen in a single step.
209
Substitution and Elimination Reaction Mechanisms
These two different mechanisms explain the difference in reaction rates between SN 1 and
SN 2 reactions. SN 1 reactions are dependent on the leaving group disassociating itself from
the carbon. It is the rate-limiting step and thus, the reaction rate is a first-order reaction
whose rate depends solely on that step.
Rate = k[RX]
Alternatively, in SN 2 reactions, the single step of the nucleophile coming together with
the reactant from the opposite side of the leaving group, is the key to its rate. Because
of this, the rate is dependent on both the concentration of the nucleophile as well as the
concentration of the reactant. The higher these two concentrations, the more frequent the
collisions. Thus the reaction rate is a second-order reaction:
Rate = k[N u :][RX] (where Nu: is the attacking nucleophile)
56.1.2 SN 2 Reactions
There are primarily 3 things that affect whether an SN 2 reaction will take place or not.
The most important is structure. That is whether the alkyl halide is on a methyl, primary,
secondary, or tertiary carbon. The other two components that determine whether an SN 2
reaction will take place or not, are the nucleophilicity of the nucleophile and the solvent
used in the reaction.
Reactivity Due to Structure of SN 2CH3 X > RCH2 X > R2 CHX >> R3 CX
The structure of the alkyl halide has a great effect on mechanism. CH3 X & RCH2 X are the
preferred structures for SN 2 . R2 CHX can undergo the SN 2 under the proper conditions
(see below), and R3 CX rarely, if ever, is involved in SN 2 reactions.
Figure 158 SN 2 nucleophilic substitution of bromine with a generic nucleophile
The reaction takes place by the nucleophile attacking from the opposite side of the bromine
atom. Notice that the other 3 bonds are all pointed away from the bromine and towards
the attacking nucleophile. When these 3 bonds are hydrogen bonds, there’s very little
steric hinderance of the approaching nucleophile. However, as the number of R groups
increases, so does the steric hinderance, making it more difficult for the nucleophile to get
close enough to the α-carbon1 , to expel the bromine atom. In fact, tertiary carbons (R3 CX)
are so sterically hindered as to prevent the SN 2 mechanim from taking place at all.
In the case of this example, a secondary α-carbon, there is still a great deal of steric hin-
derance and and whether the SN 2 mechanism will happen will depend entirely on what the
nucleophile and solvent are. SN 2 reactions are preferred for methyl halides and primary
halides.
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/alpha%20carbon
210
Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions
Another important point to keep in mind, and this can be seen clearly in the example above,
during an SN 2 reaction, the molecule undergoes an inversion. The bonds attached to the
α-carbon are pushed away as the nucleophile approaches. During the transition state, these
bonds become planar with the carbon and, as the bromine leaves and the nucleophile bonds
to the α-carbon, the other bonds fold back away from the nucleophile. This is particularly
important in chiral2 or pro-chiral molecules, where an R configuration will be converted
into an S configuration and vice versa. As you’ll see below, this is in contrast to the results
of SN 1 reactions.
Examples:
OH- + CH3 —Cl → HO—CH3 + Cl-
OH- is the nucleophile, Cl is the electrophile, HOCH3 is the product, and Cl- is the leaving
group.
or,
Na+ I- + CH3 -Br → I-CH3 + Na+ Br-
The above reaction, taking place in acetone as the solvent, sodium and iodide disassociate
almost completely in the acetone, leaving the iodide ions free to attack the CH-Br molecules.
The negatively charged iodide ion, a nucleophile, attacks the methyl bromide molecule,
forcing off the negatively charged bromide ion and taking its place. The bromide ion is the
leaving group.
Nucleophilicity
Nucleophilicity is the rate at which a nucleophile displaces the leaving group in a reaction.
Generally, nucleophilicity is stronger, the larger, more polarizable, and/or the less stable
the nucleophile. No specific number or unit of measure is used. All other things being
equal, nucleophiles are generally compared to each other in terms of relative reactivity. For
example, a particular strong nucleophile might have a relative reactivity of 10,000 that of
a particular weak nucleophile. These relationships are generalities as things like solvent
and substrate can affect the relative rates, but they are generally good guidelines for which
species make the best nucleophiles.
All nucleophiles are Lewis bases3 . In SN 2 reactions, the preferred nucleophile is a strong
nucleophile that is a weak base. Examples of these are N3 - , RS- , I- , Br- , and CN- .
Alternatively, a strong nucleophile that’s also a strong base can also work. However, as
mentioned earlier in the text, sometimes reaction mechanisms compete and in the case of
a strong nucleophile that’s a strong base, the SN 2 mechanism will compete with the E2
mechanism. Examples of strong nucleophiles that are also strong bases, include RO- and
OH- .
List of descending nucleophilicitiesI- > Br- > Cl- >> F- > -SeH > -OH > H2 O

211
Leaving Group
Leaving group is the group on the substrate that leaves. In the case of an alkyl halide, this
is the halide ion that leaves the carbon atom when the nucleophile attacks. The tendency
of the nucleophile to leave is
Relative Reactivity of Leaving GroupsI- > Br- > Cl- >> F-
Fluoride ions are very poor leaving groups because they bond very strongly and are very
rarely used in alkyl halide substitution reactions. Reactivity of a leaving group is related
to its basicity with stronger bases being poorer leaving groups.
Solvent
The solvent can play an important role in SN 2 reactions, particularly in SN 2 involving

secondary alkyl halide substrates, where it can be the determining factor in mechanism.
Solvent can also have a great effect on reaction rate of SN 2 reactions.
The SN 2 mechanism is preferred when the solvent is an aprotic, polar4 solvent. That is, a
solvent that is polar, but without a polar hydrogen. Polar, protic solvents would include
water, alcohols, and generally, solvents with polar NH or OH bonds. Good aprotic, polar
solvents are HMPA5 , CH3 CN, DMSO6 , and DMF7 .
A polar solvent is preferred because it better allows the dissociation of the halide from the
alkyl group. A protic solvent with a polar hydrogen, however, forms a ’cage’ of hydrogen-
bonded solvent around the nucleophile, hindering its approach to the substrate.
Relative Reactivity of SolventsHMPA > CH3 CN > DMF > DMSO >> H2 O
56.1.3 SN 1 Reactions
The SN 1 mechanism is very different from the SN 2 mechanism. In some of its preferences,
its exactly the opposite and, in some cases, the results of the reaction can be significantly
different.
Like the SN 2 mechanism, structure plays an important role in the SN 1 mechanism. The
role of structure in the SN 1 mechanism, however, is quite different and because of this, the
reactivity of structures is more or less reversed.
Reactivity Due to Structure of SN 1CH3 X < RCH2 X << R2 CHX < R3 CX
5 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hexamethylphosphoramide
6 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimethyl%20sulfoxide
7 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimethylformamide
212
Nucleophilic Substitution Reactions
The SN 1 mechanism is preferred for tertiary alkyl halides and, depending on the solvent,
may be preferred in secondary alkyl halides. The SN 1 mechanism does not operate on
primary alkyl halides or methyl halides. To understand why this is so, let’s take a look at
how the SN 1 mechanism works.
Figure 159 SN 1 nucleophilic substitution of a generic halide with a water molecule to

produce an alcohol.
At the top of the diagram, the first step is the spontaneous dissociation of the halide from
the alkyl halide. Unlike the SN 2 mechanism, where the attacking nucleophile causes the
halide to leave, the SN 1 mechanism depends on the ability of the halide to leave on its
own. This requires certain conditions. In particular, the stability of the carbocation8 is
crucial to the ability of the halide to leave. Since we know tertiary carbocations are the
most stable, they are the best candidates for the SN 1 mechanism. And with appropriate
conditions, secondary carbocations will also operate by the SN 1 mechanism. Primary and
methyl carbocations however, are not stable enough to allow this mechanism to happen.
Once the halide has dissociated, the water acts as a nucleophile to bond to the carbocation.
In theSN 2 reactions, there is an inversion caused by the nucleophile attacking from the
opposite side while the halide is still bonded to the carbon. In the SN 1 mechanism, since
the halide has left, and the bonds off of the α-carbon have become planar, the water molecule
is free to attack from either side. This results in, primarily, a racemic9 mixture. In the final
step, one of the hydrogens of the bonded water molecule is attacked by another water
molecule, leaving an alcohol.
Note: Racemic mixtures imply entirely equal amounts of mixture, however this is rarely the
case in SN 1 . There is a slight tendency towards attack from the opposite side of the halide.
This is the result some steric hinderence from the leaving halide which is sometimes close
enough to the leaving side to block the nucleophile’s approach from that side.
Solvent
Like the SN 2 mechanism, the SN 1 is affected by solvent as well. As with structure, however,
the reasons differ. In the SN 1 mechanism, a polar, protic solvent is used. The polarity of
the solvent is associated with the dielectric constant of the solvent and solutions with high
dielectric constants are better able to support separated ions in solution. In SN 2 reactions,
we were concerned about polar hydrogen atoms ”caging” our nucleophile. This still happens
with a polar protic solvent in SN 1 reactions, so why don’t we worry about it? You have
to keep in mind the mechanism of the reaction. The first step, and more importantly,
the rate-limiting step, of the SN 1 reaction, is the ability to create a stable carbocation by
getting the halide anion to leave. With a polar protic solvent, just as with a polar aprotic
solvent,we’re creating a stable cation, however it’s the polar hydrogens that stabilize the
halide anion and make it better able to leave. Improving the rate-limiting step is always
the goal. The ”caging” of the nucleophile is unrelated to the rate-limiting step and even in

9 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Racemic
213
its ”caged” state, the second step, the attack of the nucleophile, is so much faster than the
first step, that the ”caging” can simply be ignored.
56.1.4 Summary
SN 1 , SN 2 , E1 , and E2 , are all reaction mechanisms, not reactions themselves. They are
mechanisms used by a number of different reactions. Usually in organic chemistry, the goal
is to synthesize a product. In cases where you have possibly competing mechanisms, and
this is particularly the case where an SN 1 and an E1 reaction are competing, the dominating
mechanism is going to decide what your product is, so knowing the mechanisms and which
conditions favor one over the other, will determine your product.
In other cases, knowing the mechanism allows you to set up an environment favorable to that
mechanism. This can mean the difference between having your product in a few minutes,
or sometime around the next ice age.
So when you’re designing a synthesis for a product, you need to consider, I want to get
product Y, so what are my options to get to Y? Once you know your options and you’ve
decided on a reaction, then you need to consider the mechanism of the reaction and ask
yourself, how do I create conditions that are going to make this happen correctly and happen
quickly?
56.2 Elimination Reactions
Nucleophilic substitution reactions and Elimination reactions share a lot of common char-
acteristics, on top of which, the E1 and SN 1 as well as E2 and SN 2 reactions can sometimes
compete and, since their products are different, it’s important to understand them both.
Without understanding both kinds of mechanisms, it would be difficult to get the product
you desire from a reaction.
In addition, the SN 1 and SN 2 reactions will be referenced quite a bit by way of comparison
and contrast, so it’s probably best to read that section first and then continue here.
Elimination reactions are the mechanisms for creating alkene products from haloalkane10
reactants. E1 and E2 elimination, unlike SN 1 and SN 2 substitution, mechanisms do not
occur with methyl halides because the reaction creates a double bond between two carbon
atoms and methylhalides have only one carbon.
NoteIn the notation E1 and E2 ,

E stands for elimination
1 : stands for unimolecular (the concentration of only one kind of molecule determines the rate of
the reaction)
2 : stands for bimolecular (the concentration of two types of molecules determine the rate of the
reaction)
214
Elimination Reactions
56.2.1 E1 vs E2
Reaction rates
E1 and E2 are two different pathways to creating alkenes from haloalkanes. As with SN 1
and SN 2 reactions, one of the key differences is in the reaction rate, as it provides great
insight into the mechanisms.
E1 reactions, like SN 1 reactions are 2-step reactions. Also like SN 1 reactions, the rate-
limiting step is the dissociation of the halide from its alkane, making it a first-order reaction,
depending on the concentration of the haloalkane, with a reaction rate of:
Rate = k[RX]
On the other hand, E2 reactions, like SN 2 reactions are 1-step reactions. And again, as
with SN 2 reactions, the rate limiting step is the ability of a nucleophile to attach to the
alkane and displace the halide. Thus it is a second-order reaction that depends on the
concentrations of both the nucleophile and haloalkane, with a reaction rate of:
Rate = k[N u :][RX] (where Nu: is the attacking nucleophile)
Zaitsev’s Rule
Zaitsev’s rule11 (sometimes spelled ”Saytzeff”) states that in an elimination reaction, when
multiple products are possible, the most stable alkene is the major product. That is to say,
the most highly substituted alkene (the alkene with the most non-hydrogen substituents) is
the major product.
Both E1 and E2 reactions produce a mixture of products, when possible, but generally
follow Zaitsev’s rule. We’ll see below why E1 reactions follow Zaitsev’s rule more reliably
and tend to produce a purer product.
Figure 160 Dehydrohalogenation reaction of (S)-2-bromo-3-methylbutane
The above image represents two possible pathways for the dehydrohalogenation of (S)-
2-bromo-3-methylbutane. The two potential products are 2-methylbut-2-ene and 3-
methylbut-1-ene. The images on the right are simplified drawings of the molecular product
shown in the images in the center.
As you can see on the left, the bromine is on the second carbon and in an E1 or E2 reaction,
the hydrogen could be removed from either the 1st or the 3rd carbon. Zaitsev’s rule says
that the hydrogen will be removed predominantly from the 3rd carbon. In reality, there will
be a mixture, but most of the product will be 2-methylbut-2-ene by the E1 mechanism. By
the E2 reaction, as we’ll see later, this might not necessarily be the case.
215
56.2.2 E2
Reactivity Due to Structure of E2RCH2 X > R2 CHX >> R3 CX
The E2 mechanism is concerted and higly stereospecific, because it can occur only when
the H and the leaving group X are in an anti-coplanar position. That is, in a Newman
projection, the H and X must be 180°, or in the anti-configuration. This behaviour stems
from the best overlap of the 2p orbitals of the adjacent carbons when the pi bond has to
be formed. If the H and the leaving group cannot be brought into this position due to the
structure of the molecule, the E2 mechanism will not take place.
Figure 161 Mechanism of E2 elimination. Note the anti-coplanarity of the

X-C-C-H atoms
Therefore, only molecules having accessible H-X anti-coplanar conformations can react via
this route. Furthermore, the E2 mechanism will operate contrary to Zaitsev’s rule if the
only anti-coplanar hydrogen from the leaving group results in the least stable alkene. A
good example of how this can happen is by looking at how cyclohexane and cyclohexene
derivatives might operate in E2 conditions.
Figure 162 E2 with preferential elimination
Let’s look at the example above. The reactant we’re using is 1-chloro-2-
isopropylcyclohexane. The drawing at the top left is one conformation and the drawing
below is after a ring flip. In the center are Newman projections of both conformations and
the drawings on the right, the products.
If we assume we’re treating the 1-chloro-2-isopropylcyclohexane with a strong base, for
example CH3 CH2 O- (ethanolate), the mechanism that dominates is E2 . There are 3
hydrogens off of the carbons adjacent to our chlorinated carbon. The red and the green
ones are two of them. The third would be hard to show but is attached to the same carbon
as the red hydrogen, angled a little down from the plane and towards the viewer. The red
hydrogen is the only hydrogen that’s 180° from the chlorine atom, so it’s the only one eligible
for the E2 mechanism. Because of this, the product is going to be only 3-isopropylcylcohex-
1-ene. Notice how this is contrary to Zaitsev’s rule which says the most substituted alkene
is preferred. By his rule, 1-isopropylcyclohexene should be our primary product, as that
would leave the most substituted alkene. However it simply can’t be produced because of
the steric hindrance.
The images below shows the molecule after a ring flip. In this conformation, no product is
possible. As you can see from the Newman projection, there are no hydrogens 180° from
the chlorine atom.
So it’s important, when considering the E2 mechanism, to understand the geometry of the
molecule. Sometimes the geometry can be used to your advantage to preferentially get a
single product. Other times it will prevent you from getting the product you want, and
you’ll need to consider a different mechanism to get your product.
216
Elimination Reactions
Note: Often the word periplanar is used instead of coplanar . Coplanar implies precisely
180 degree separation and ”peri-”, from Greek for ”near”, implies near 180 degrees. Peri-
planar may actually be more accurate. In the case of the 1-chloro-3-isopropylcyclohexane
example, because of molecular forces, the chlorine atom is actually slightly less than 180
degrees from both the hydrogen and the isopropyl group, so in this case, periplanar might
be a more correct term.
56.2.3 E1
Figure 163 E1 elimination of an alkyl halide by a base
The E1 mechanism begins with the dissociation of the leaving group from an alkyl, pro-
ducing a carbocation on the alkyl group and a leaving anion. This is the same way the
SN 1 reaction begins, so the same thing that helps initiate that step in SN 1 reactions, help
initiate the step in E1 reactions. More specifically, secondary and tertiary carbocations
are preferred because they’re more stable than primary carbocations. The choice of solvent
is the same as SN 1 as well; a polar protic solvent is preferred because the polar aspect
stabilizes the carbocation and the protic aspect stabilizes the anion.
What makes the difference between whether the reaction takes the SN 1 or E1 pathway then,
must depend on the second step; the action of the nucleophile. In SN 1 reactions, a strong
nucleophile that’s a weak base is preferred. The nucleophile will then attack and bond to the
carbocation. In E1 reactions, a strong nucleophile is still preferred. The difference is that a
strong nucleophile that’s also a strong base, causes the nucleophile to attack the hydrogen at
the β-carbon instead of the α-carbocation. The nucleophile/base then extracts the hydrogen
causing the bonding electrons to fall in and produce a pi bond with the carbocation.
Because the hydrogen and the leaving group are lost in two separate steps and the fact that
it has no requirements as to geometry, the E1 mechanism more reliably produces products
that follow Zaitsev’s rule.
217
57 References
---- << Haloalkanes1 |Alkenes | Alkynes >>2

----

219
58 Unit 8: Alkynes
221
59 The triple carbon-carbon bond
223
60 Alkyne properties
225
61 Naming alkynes
227
62 Cycloalkynes
229
63 Alkyne reactions
----
231
64 Unit 9: Dienes
In alkene1 chemistry, we demonstrated that allylic carbon could maintain a cation charge
because the double bond could de-localize to support the charge. What of having two double
bonds separated by a single bond? What of having a compound that alternates between
double bond and single bond? In addition to other concepts, this chapter will explore what
a having a conjugated2 system means in terms of stability and reaction.
Dienes are simply hydrocarbons which contain two double bonds. Dienes are intermediate
between alkene3 s and polyenes.
Dienes can divided into three classes:
• Unconjugated dienes have the double bonds separated by two or more single bonds. These
are also known as isolated dienes.
• Conjugated dienes have conjugated double bonds separated by one single bond
• Cumulated dienes (cumulenes4 ) have the double bonds sharing a common atom as in a
group of compounds called allenes .

4 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/cumulene
233
65 Kinds of dienes
Dienes have two or more carbon-carbon double bonds which may be either isolated (R’-
C=C-R-C=C-R’), cumulated (R-C=C=C-R), or conjugated (R-C=C-C=C-R). Each state
represents a different stability due to electron delocalization, and the conjugated form is
generally favored in organic molecules.
65.0.4 Isolated Dienes
Isolated dienes typically show no ”special” stability. Their two π-bonds interact independent
of one another and they compete as intermolecular reaction sites depending on steric, kinetic,
and thermodynamic factors. Often, these types of dienes can be treated merely as larger,
more complex alkenes, because the two bonds cannot be said to have ”communication”
(proximal electron delocalization due to location).
Isolated dienes are not considered to be especially useful in common synthesis reactions,
although intermediates may often take the form of an isolated diene.bb
65.0.5 Cumulated Dienes
Cumulated dienes are typically less stable than other alkenes. The main reason for the
instability is the fact that this sort of diene is a probable transition state for an alkyne’s
triple bond to move down the carbon chain towards the most stable position. As you may
recall, rotation does not occur around any π-bond, which means that cumulated double
bonds can lead to a less stable, higher energy compound being formed.
Typically, cumulated dienes are discussed only in advanced courses in organic chemistry,
and so they will not be discussed in detail here. Beginning organic chemistry students
should merely remember that cumulated dienes are 1) high energy and 2) most likely found
as transition states.
65.0.6 Conjugated Dienes
Conjugated dienes are dienes which have at least two double bonds separated by a single
carbon-carbon bond, and for this reason conjugated dienes are observed to have a special
stability due to the overlap of electron orbitals. The areas of concentration of negative charge
(electron density) overlap across the three bonds (two double bonds and one single bond)
forming what behaves essentially as a single, continuous π-bond across three carbon atoms.
This delocalization of electron density stabilizes the molecule, resulting in the arrangement
of lowest energy.
235
Kinds of dienes
Atoms other than carbon which are capable of multiple bonds may also participate in con-
jugation. The heteroatoms most often associated with conjugation in dienes and other
molecules are nitrogen and oxygen, but theoretically the majority of atoms in the Peri-
odic Table of Elements could participate in conjugation chemistry. Most often, in organic
molecules, heteroatoms participating in conjugation will be nitrogen atoms within a ring
structure or a double-bonded oxygen attached to form a ketone or aldehyde.
Conjugation of double bonds is the largest part of what makes aromaticity relevant in
organic chemistry, and conjugated double bonds have many other significant impacts on
other types of dienes as well.
236
66 Conjugation
66.0.7 Conjugation of Double Bonds
A diene is said to be conjugated when its double bonds are not directly next to each other,
but rather separated by a single bond in between them (CH2 =CH-CH=CH2 ).
Conjugated dienes are particularly stable due to the delocalization of the pi electrons
along sp2 hybridized orbitals, and they also tend to undergo reactions atypical of double
bond chemistry. For instance, chlorine can add to 1,3-butadiene (CH2 =CH-CH=CH2 ) to
yield a mixture of 3,4-dichloro-1-butene (ClCH2 -CHCl-CH=CH2 ) and 1,4-dichloro-2-butene
(ClCH2 -CH=CH-CH2 Cl). These are known as 1,2 addition and 1,4 addition, respectively.
1,2-addition is favored in mild reaction (irreversible) conditions (the kinetically preferred
product) and 1,4-addition is favored in harsher reaction (reversible) conditions (which re-
sults in the thermodynamically preferred product).
Another interesting conjugated diene reaction is the Diels-Alder reaction, in which a con-
jugated diene reacts with an alkene (called a ”dienophile” in this case) in order to yield a
cyclic product. In Diels-Alder type reactions, the substituent on the dienophile will go into
either an exo or endo position in the final product. (”Endo ” in this case meaning trans to
the substituents on the ends of the diene , and ”exo ” meaning the same thing, only cis .)
Figure 164
237
67 Diene properties and reactions
67.0.8 Common Reactions of Conjugated Dienes
Conjugated dienes have enhanced stability as compared to molecules without conjugated

double bonds due to resonance. In general, this makes them slightly less reactive than other
types of alkenes in general and dienes specifically. However, many reactions proceed through
high-energy cation or radical intermediates; in these cases the resonance stabilization of the
intermediate allyl species makes conjugated dienes more reactive than non-conjugated dienes
or simple alkenes.
67.1 Hydrobromination:
Adds a Bromine and a Hydrogen to a conjugated Diene.

Example :
Butadiene + HBr--> 3-bromobutene (Low Temperature) + 1-bromobut-2-ene (High
Temperature) + 1-bromobutene (Not Observed)
Thermodynamic and Kinetic Control of Reaction :
• At low temperature the reaction is under KINETIC CONTROL: the 3-bromobutene is
formed faster because it has a lower transition state free energy, as the intermediate cation
is more stable at the secondary carbon.
• At high temperature the reaction is under THERMODYNAMIC CONTROL: the 3-
bromobutene still forms more quickly, but the reaction has enough energy to reverse,
and the more stable product (1-bromobut-2-ene) is formed.
67.2 Diels-Alder Reaction
One of the most important of all diene reactions is the Diels-Alder Reaction, in which a
conjugated diene reacts with an dienophile to form a cyclohexene.
Requirements : The diene must be able to access the s-cis conformation for the reaction
to take place.
DIENEOPHILES - A species which likes to attack Dienes
- A Dienophile must contain a double or triple bond. Typically, an electron withdraw-
ing group is conjugated to the dienophile to make it electron-poor (nitriles, ketones, and
239
Diene properties and reactions
esters are common electron withdrawing groups). Because the reaction is highly stereospe-
cific, the configuration of the dieneophile will determine the relative stereochemistry of the
cyclohexene product.
The Diels-Alder reaction occurs most effectively with an electron-poor dieneophile and an
electron-rich diene (’normal demand’). ’Inverse demand’ Diels-Alder reactions can also be
carried out, in which the dienophile is electron-rich and the diene electron-poor.
----
240
68 Unit 10: Aromatics
After understanding the usefulness of unsaturated compound, or conjugated system, we

hope to explore the unique structure of aromatic1 compounds, including why benzene should
not be called 1,3,5-cyclohexatriene because it is more stable than a typical triene, and
seemingly unreactive. Called ”aromatic” initially because of its fragrance, aromaticity now
refers to the stability of compounds that are considered aromatic, not only benzene. Any
cyclic compound with 4n+2 pi electrons in the system is aromatic. The stability of aromatic
compounds arises because all bonding orbitals are filled and low in energy.
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic%20Chemistry%2FAromatics%20in%20history
241
69 History of Aromatics
Early in the 19th century, advances in equipment, technique and communications resulted
in chemists discovering and experimenting with novel chemical compounds. In the course
of their investigations they stumbled across a different kind of stable compound with the
molecular formula of C6 H6 . Unable to visualize what such a compound might look like, the
scientists invented all sorts of models for carbon-to-carbon bonding -- many of which were
not entirely stable -- in order to fit what they had observed to what they expected the C6 H6
compound to look like.
Benzene (which is the name that was given to the aromatic compound C6 H6 ) is probably
the most common and industrially important aromatic compound in wide use today. It
was discovered in 1825 by Michael Faraday, and its commercial production from coal tar
(and, later on, other natural sources) began in earnest about twenty-five years later. The
structure of benzene emerged during the 1860s, the result of contributions from several
chemists, most famously that of Kekulé1 .
Scientists of the time did not have the benefit of understanding that electrons are capable of
delocalization, so that all carbon atoms could share the same π-bond electron configuration
equally. Huckel2 was the first to apply the new theory of quantum mechanics to clearly
separating σ and π electrons. He went on to develop a theory of π electron bonding for
benzene, which was the first to explain the electronic origins of aromaticity.
1 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Kekul%C3%A9
2 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Erich_Huckel
243
70 Benzene Structure
Benzene is a hexagonal ring of six carbon atoms connected to each other through one p-
orbital per carbon. Its chemical formula is C6 H6 , and its structure is a hexagonal ring
of carbons sharing symmetrical bonds, with all six hydrogen atoms protruding outwards
from the carbon ring, but in the same plane as the ring. The p-orbital system contains 6
electrons, and one way to distribute the electrons yields the following structure:
However, another resonance form of benzene is possible, where the single bonds of the first
structure are replaced with double bonds, and the double bonds with single bonds. These
two resonance forms are co-dominant in benzene. (Other forms, such as a structure with a π
bond connecting opposite carbons, are possible but negligible.) Thus, each bond in benzene
has been experimentally shown to be of equal length and strength, and each is accounted
as approximately a ”1.5” bond instead of either a single or double bond alone.
Electron density is shared between carbons, in effect yielding neither a single nor a double
bond, but a sort of one-and-a-half bond between each of the six carbons. Benzene has a
density of negative charge both above and below the plane formed by the ring structure.
Although benzene is very stable and does not tend to react energetically with most sub-
stances, electrophilic compounds may be attracted to this localized electron density and
such substances may form a bond with the aromatic benzene ring.
An electron delocalisation ring can be used to show in a single picture both dominant
resonance forms of benzene:
70.1 Benzene Properties
Benzene is a colorless, flammable liquid with a sweet aroma and carcinogenic effects. The
aromatic properties of benzene make it far different from other alkenes in many ways.
70.1.1 Benzene Reactions
Main article: Aromatic reactions1

Unlike alkenes, aromatic compounds such as benzene undergo substitution reactions instead
of addition reactions. The most common reaction for benzene to undergo is electrophilic
245
Benzene Structure
aromatic substitution (EAS), although in a few special cases, substituted benzenes can
undergo nucleophilic aromatic substitution.
70.2 Benzene Health Effects
In the body, benzene is metabolized, and benzene exposure may have quite serious health
effects. Breathing in very high levels of benzene can result in death, while somewhat lower
(but still high) levels can cause drowsiness, dizziness, rapid heart rate, headaches, tremors,
confusion, and unconsciousness. Eating or drinking foods containing high levels of benzene
can cause vomiting, irritation of the stomach, dizziness, sleepiness, convulsions, rapid heart
rate, and even death.
The major effect of benzene from chronic (long-term) exposure is to the blood. Benzene
damages the bone marrow and can cause a decrease in red blood cells, leading to anemia. It
can also cause excessive bleeding and depress the immune system, increasing the chance of
infection. Some women who breathed high levels of benzene for many months had irregular
menstrual periods and a decrease in the size of their ovaries. It is not known whether benzene
exposure affects the developing fetus in pregnant women or fertility in men, however animal
studies have shown low birth weights, delayed bone formation, and bone marrow damage
when pregnant animals breathed benzene.
The US Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) also classifies benzene as a
human carcinogen. Long-term exposure to high levels of benzene in the air can cause
leukemia, a potentially fatal cancer of the blood-forming organs. In particular, Acute
Myeloid Leukemia (AML) may be caused by benzene.
246
71 Aromaticity
Aromaticity in organic chemistry does not refer to whether or not a molecule triggers
a sensory response from olfactory organs (whether it ”smells”), but rather refers to the
arrangement of electron bonds in a cyclic molecule. Many molecules that have a strong
odor (such as diatomic chlorine Cl2 ) are not aromatic in structure -- odor has little to
do with chemical aromaticity. It was the case, however, that many of the earliest-known
examples of aromatic compounds had distinctively pleasant smells. This property led to
the term ”aromatic” for this class of compounds, and hence the property of having enhanced
stability due to delocalized electrons came to be called ”aromaticity”.
71.1 Definition
Aromaticity is a chemical property in which a conjugated ring of unsaturated bonds, lone

pairs, or empty orbitals exhibit a stabilization stronger than would be expected by the
stabilization of conjugation alone. It can also be considered a manifestation of cyclic delo-
calization and of resonance.
This is usually considered to be because electrons are free to cycle around circular arrange-
ments of atoms, which are alternately single- and double-bonded to one another. These
bonds may be seen as a hybrid of a single bond and a double bond, each bond in the ring
identical to every other. This commonly-seen model of aromatic rings was developed by
Kekulé. The model for benzene consists of two resonance forms, which corresponds to the
double and single bonds’ switching positions. Benzene is a more stable molecule than would
be expected of cyclohexatriene, which is a theoretical molecule.
71.2 Theory
By convention, the double-headed arrow indicates that two structures are simply hypothet-
ical, since neither can be said to be an accurate representation of the actual compound. The
actual molecule is best represented by a hybrid (average) of most likely structures, called
resonance forms. A carbon-carbon double bond is shorter in length than a carbon-carbon
single bond, but aromatic compounds are perfectly geometrical (that is, not lop-sided) be-
cause all the carbon-carbon bonds have the same length. The actual distance between
atoms inside an aromatic molecule is intermediate between that of a single and that of a
double bond.
A better representation than Lewis drawings of double and single bonds is that of the circular
π bond (Armstrong’s inner cycle), in which the electron density is evenly distributed through
a π bond above and below the ring. This model more correctly represents the location
247
Aromaticity
of electron density within the aromatic molecule’s overall structure. The single bonds are
sigma (σ) bonds formed with electrons positioned ”in line” between the carbon atoms’ nuclei.
Double bonds consist of one ”in line” σ bond and another non-linearly arranged bond -- a π-
bond. The π-bonds are formed from the overlap of atomic p-orbitals simultaneously above
and below the plane of the ring formed by the ”in line” σ-bonds.
Since they are out of the plane of the atoms, π orbitals can interact with each other freely,
and thereby they become delocalized. This means that, instead of being tied to one partic-
ular atom of carbon, each electron can be shared by all the carbon atoms in an aromatic
ring. Thus, there are not enough electrons to form double bonds on all the carbon atoms,
but the ”extra” electrons strengthen all of the bonds of the ring equally.
71.3 Characteristics
An aromatic compound contains a set of covalently-bound atoms with specific characteris-

tics:
1. The molecule has to be cyclic
2. A delocalized conjugated pi system, most commonly an arrangement of alternating
single and double bonds (can sometimes include triple bonds if the geometry of the
molecule permits)
3. Coplanar structure, with all the contributing atoms in the same plane
4. A number of pi delocalized electrons that is even, but not a multiple of 4. (This is
known as Hückel’s (4n+2)Π rule, where,n= 0,1,2,3 and so on. Permissible numbers
of π electrons include 2, 6, 10, 14, and so on)
5. Special reactivity in organic reactions such as electrophilic aromatic substitution and
nucleophilic aromatic substitution
Whereas benzene is aromatic (6 electrons, from 3 double bonds), cyclobutadiene is not,
since the number of π delocalized electrons is 4, which is not satisfied by any n integer
value. The cyclobutadienide (2−) ion, however, is aromatic (6 electrons). An atom in an
aromatic system can have other electrons that are not part of the system, and are therefore
ignored for the 4n + 2 rule. In furan, the oxygen atom is sp2 hybridized. One lone pair is
in the π system and the other in the plane of the ring (analogous to C-H bond on the other
positions). There are 6 π electrons, so furan is aromatic.
Aromatic molecules typically display enhanced chemical stability, compared to similar
non-aromatic molecules. The circulating (that is, delocalized) π electrons in an aromatic
molecule generate significant local magnetic fields that can be detected by NMR techniques.
NMR experiments show that protons on the aromatic ring are shifted substantially further
down-field than those on aliphatic carbons. Planar monocyclic molecules containing 4n π
electrons are called anti-aromatic and are, in general, destabilized. Molecules that could
be anti-aromatic will tend to alter their electronic or conformational structure to avoid this
situation, thereby becoming merely non-aromatic.
Aromatic molecules are able to interact with each other in so-called π-π stacking: the π
systems form two parallel rings overlap in a ”face-to-face” orientation. Aromatic molecules
are also able to interact with each other in an ”edge-to-face” orientation: the slight positive
248
Characteristics
charge of the substituents on the ring atoms of one molecule are attracted to the slight
negative charge of the aromatic system on another molecule.
249
72 Monosubstituted Benzenes
Benzene is a very important basic structure which is useful for analysis and synthesis in
most aspects of organic chemistry. The benzene ring itself is not the most interesting or
useful feature of the molecule; which substitutents and where they are placed on the ring
can be considered the most critical aspect of benzene chemistry in general.
72.1 Effects of Different Substituents
Depending on the type of substituent, atoms or groups of atoms may serve to make the
benzene ring either more reactive or less reactive. If the atom or group makes the ring more
reactive, it is called activating , and if less, then it is called deactivating .
Generally, the terms activating and deactivating are in terms of the reactions that fall into
the category of Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution (EAS). These are the most common
forms of reactions with aromatic rings. Aromatic rings can undergo other types of reac-
tions, however, and in the case of Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution, the activating and
deactivating nature of substituents on the rings is reversed. In EAS, a hydroxyl groups is
strongly activating, but in Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution, a hydroxyl group is strongly
deactivating. But since EAS is the most common reaction with aromatic rings, when dis-
cussing activation and deactivation, it’s normally done in terms of the EAS.
In addition to activating or deactivating, all groups and/or substituent atoms on a benzene
ring are directing . An atom or group may encourage additional atoms or groups to add
or not to add to certain other carbons in relation to the carbon connected to the directing
group. This concept will be further discussed in the next chapter, but when memorizing
the groups below it is helpful to also memorize whether it is O (ortho), M (meta) or P
(para)-directing.
Another factor that heavily influences direction, however, is steric hindrance. If, for ex-
ample, you have a tert-butyl substituent on the ring, despite the fact that it is ortho/para
directing, the ortho positions will be largely blocked by the tert-butyl group and thus nearly
all the product would be para.
72.2 Activating Substituents
Activating substituents make benzene either slightly more reactive or very much more reac-
tive, depending on the group or atom in question. In general, if one of the major heteroatoms
(nitrogen or oxygen) is directly attached to the carbon ring then the result is probably acti-
vation. This is merely a rule of thumb, and many exceptions exist, so it is best to memorize
the groups listed below instead of counting on a quick and dirty rule of thumb.
251
Monosubstituted Benzenes
Group Strength Directing

-NH2 , -NHR, -NRR very strong ortho/para
-OH, -O- very strong ortho/para
-NHCOCH3 , -NHCOR strong ortho/para
-OCH3 , -OR strong ortho/para
-CH3 , -C2 H5 , -R weak ortho/para
-C6 H5 very weak ortho/para
72.3 Deactivating Substituents
A deactivating group is a functional group attached to a benzene molecule that removes

electron density from the benzene ring, making electrophilic aromatic substitution reac-
tions slower and more difficult than they would be on benzene alone. As discussed above
for activating groups, deactivating groups may also determine the positions (relative to
themselves) on the benzene ring where substitutions take place, so each deactivating group
is listed below along with its directing characteristic.
Group Strength Directing

-NR3 + very strong meta
-NO2 very strong meta
-CF3 , CCl3 very strong meta
-CN strong meta
-SO3 H strong meta
-CO2 H, -CO2 R strong meta
-COH, -COR strong meta
-F weak ortho/para
-Cl weak ortho/para
-Br weak ortho/para
72.4 Activation vs. Deactivation and ortho/para vs. meta

directing
So why are some substituents activating or deactivating? Why are some meta directing
and others ortho/para directing? From the above tables, it seems pretty clear there’s a
relationship.
There are primarily two effects that substituents impart on the ring that affect these fea-
tures:
1. Resonance effects
2. Inductive effects
252
Activation vs. Deactivation and ortho/para vs. meta directing
72.4.1 Resonance Effects
Let’s first look at resonance effects. Resonance effects are the ability or inability of a
substituent to provide electrons to the ring and enhance its resonance stability. To see
this, we must first get a basic understanding of the mechanism of Electrophilic Aromatic
Subsitution. We’ll discuss EAS in more detail in the next section, but some basics are called
for here.
Figure 167 Basic Mechanism of Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution
As you can see in the image above, the electrophile is attacked by pi electrons in the ring.
The same carbon is now bonded to both the hydrogen that was bonded to it and the
electrophile. This in turn creates a carbocation on the adjacent carbon, making the ring
non-aromatic. But aromatic rings like to remain aromatic. The nucleophile which was
previously bonded to the electrophile now attacks the hydrogen, abstracting it from the
ring and allowing the pi-bond to re-form and returning the ring to its aromatic nature.
As we’ve seen before in some other reactions, when a carbocation is created as an intermedi-
ate, stability of that carbocation is crucial to the reaction. This is the case in Electrophilic
Aromatic Subsitution as well.
So what is the effect of substituents on the ring?
Figure 168 Resonance Stability of ortho, para, and meta attacks.
Let’s look at the situation above. In this case we have Phenol, a benzene ring with an -OH
(hydroxyl) group attached. When we nitrate the ring with nitric acid in sulfuric acid (a
reaction we’ll discuss in the next section), a nitro group is attached to the benzene ring.
There are 3 possible places for the nitro group to attach: An ortho, meta, or para position.
To understand the stability of the carbocation, we need to look at the resonance structures
for a given attack and see what the results are.
The first resonance structure of the ortho attack results in a positive charge on the carbon
with the hydroxyl group. This happens to be the most stable of the 3 resonance structures
for an ortho attack because the two negative electron pairs in the oxygen act to stabilize
the positive charge on the carbon. The other two resonance forms leave a carbon with a
hydrogen attached, to hold the positive charge. Hydrogen can do nothing to stabilize the
charge and thus, these are less stable forms.
In the para attack situation, notice that the second resonance form also puts a positive
charge on the carbon with the hydroxyl group. This provides for stability just as it does in
the case of an ortho attack and thus, the middle resonance form is very stable.
Finally, in the meta attack situation, all of the resonance forms result in a positive charge
on a carbon with only a hydrogen attached. None of these is stable, and thus, meta attack
with a hydroxyl group attached, is a very small percentage of the product.
So the electron pairs in the oxygen act to stabilize the ortho and para attacks.
253
Monosubstituted Benzenes
72.4.2 Inductive Effects
Now let’s look at the inductive effects of deactivating substituents. Let’s imagine that,
instead of a hydroxyl group, we instead have a carbonyl group attached to the ring in
its place. When a carbonyl is attached, the ring is bonded to a carbon which in turn, is
double-bonded to an oxygen, the double-bonded oxygen is withdrawing electrons and this
inductive effect is felt on the ring, strongly deactivating its pi-bond nature and putting
a positive dipole on the carbon. Looking at the resonance structures, this carbon, which
already has some positive nature is now given the added resonance of a positive charge, in
the case of ortho and para attacks. Positive plus positive equals more positive and thus,
less stable. There’s no negative charge or negative electron pair to stabilize this positive
charge.
So in this case, not only is the entire ring less activated, but the ortho and para attacks
result in much more unstable carbocation resonance forms. Hence, meta is the preferred
position, but the overall reaction is less active than plain benzene.
72.4.3 Halides as the Exception
Notice that in the list of activating vs. deactivating substituents, the activating ones are
all ortho/para directing. In the deactivating substituents, all but the halides, are meta
directing. Why are halides an exception?
Because halides are more electronegative than carbon, they induce a positive dipole on
the attached carbon and a negative dipole on their own atom(inductive effect), and in
accordance to the previous logic of activating/deactivating substituents, deactivate the ring.
However, halides also possess lone pair electrons in their outer shell to share with the ring,
allowing the resonance structures with favored ortho/para attacks versus meta attacks due
to their poor resonance forms. In essence, although halides do deactivate the ring to some
extent, they provide major resonance contributors due to the availability of their lone pairs.
Resonance structures usually trump the inductive effect.
72.5 Detailed Effects of Substituents
We’ve discussed some generalities about the effects of substituents and even some specifics
about certain ones, but let’s look more closely at the substituents and try to understand
the details of what makes them activating vs. deactivating.
-NH2 , -NHR, and -NRR are all very strongly activating. Though nitrogen is more elec-
tronegative than carbon, its ability to share a pair of electrons greatly outweighs its electron
withdrawing effect.
-OH and -O- is similar in that it is even more electronegative than nitrogen, but it has two
pairs of electrons to share, which also greatly outweighs its electon withdrawing effect.
-NHCOCH3 and -NHCOR are also strongly activating, but the inductive effect of the double-
bonded oxygen acts to make the nitrogen more electron withdrawing, so they’re not quite
as activating as the other -N subsituents above.
254
Detailed Effects of Substituents
-OCH3 and -OR are also still strongly activating, but less so, because the electron density
is shared on both sides of the oxygen.
-CH3 and -R in general provide some electron density sharing, but not nearly as much as a
pair of electrons. Thus their effect is only weakly felt.
For deactivating groups we have:
-NO2 , or nitro and -NR3 + . The nitro group is very strongly deactivating because of its
resonance structure. The nitro group has two resonance forms: O=N+ -O- and O- -N+ =O.
Both of these forms leave a full positive charge on the nitrogen making it completely unable
to help stabilize the positive carbocation intermediate. The same applies to -NR3 + .
-CF3 and -CCl3 both have an inductive electronegative effect of 3 halides, but with no
electrons to share with the ring, leaving them also very strongly deactivating.
-CN has a triple bond between the carbon and nitrogen with a resonance form of a double
bond between the carbon and nitrogen and a positive charge on the carbon, meaning that
between the electronegativity of the nitrogen and positively charged carbon in the resonance
form, it destabilizes the carbocation and offer no electrons to the ring.
-SO3 , -COR, -CO2 R - all of these have electronegative oxygens giving the carbon a positive
partial charge and providing no electrons for stability on the ring.
-F, -Cl, -Br, all have a similar effect. They are electronegative and deactivate the ring,
but have electrons to share that, to some degree, makes up for it, allowing the ortho/para
direction. But to understand their effects better, you need to look at them in terms of
their placement on the periodic chart. Florine is the most electronegative element and it’s
very small and thus very close to the carbon it’s bonded to. This gives its electromagnetic
influence a stronger deactivating character. Chlorine is less electronegative, but it’s also
larger and thus further away from the carbon, making it harder for it to share its electrons.
And so on.
255
73 Polysubstituted Benzenes
Unsubstituted benzene is seldom encountered in nature or in the laboratory, and you will
find in your studies that most often benzene rings are found as parts of other, more com-
plicated molecules. In order for benzene to react in most situations, it gains or loses some
functionality dependent on which functional groups are attached. Although the simplest
case is to work with benzene that has only one functional group, it is also essential to un-
derstand the interactions and competitions between multiple functional groups attached to
the same benzene ring.
When there is more than one substituent present on a benzene ring the spatial relationship
betwen groups becomes important, which is why the arene substitution patterns ortho
, meta and para were devised. For example three isomers exist for the molecule cresol
because the methyl group and the hydroxyl group can be placed either next to each other
(ortho ), one position removed from each other (meta ) or two positions removed from each
other (para ). Where each group attaches is most often a function of which order they
were attached in, due to the activating/deactivating and directing activities of previously
attached groups.
Figure 169
73.1 Competition Between Functional Groups
When a ring has more than one functional group, the effects of the groups are combined and
their total effect must be taken into account. In general, effects are summed. For example,
toluene (methylbenzene) is weakly activated. But p-nitrotoluene has both a methyl group
and a nitro group. The methyl group is weakly activating and the nitro is pretty strongly
deactivating, so overall, the group is very deactivated. In terms of direction, however, both
substitutents agree on the direction. The methyl group is ortho/para directing. The nitro
group occupies the para position, so the methyl will now want just ortho direction. The
nitro group is meta directing. The positions meta to the nitro are also ortho to the methyl,
so this works out and further substituents will be almost entirely in the positions ortho to
the methyl group.
If two functional groups disagree on direction, the more activating group is the one that
controls direction. That is, if you had m-nitrotoluene, most of your product would tend to
be ortho/para to the toluene and not meta to the nitro, despite the nitro having a stronger
influence on overall activation.
257
Polysubstituted Benzenes
73.2 Naming Conventions
When a benzene ring has more than one substituent group attached, the location of all of
the groups not directly attached to carbon number one must be explicitly declared. This is
done by listing the number of the carbon atom where the group is attached, followed by a
hyphen and the group’s name. The carbon atoms of the benzene ring should be numbered
in order of previously established precedence, i.e., a bromine would take precedence over a
nitro group, which itself would take precedence over an alcohol or alkane group. The names
of the groups should be listed in alphabetical order, i.e. ”2-methyl-5-nitrobenzaldehyde.”
258
74 Aromatics in history
259
75 Benzene structure
261
76 Benzene properties
263
77 Overview of electrophilic aromatic
substitution reactions
265
78 Friedel-Crafts alkylation
267
79 Friedel-Crafts acylation
269
80 Aromatic reactions
<< Aromatics1 | Aromatic reactions | Ketones and aldehydes>>2

The lack of reactivity of arenes is notable when compared to the reactivities of typical
compounds containing multiple conjugated double bonds. For example, 1,3,5-hexatriene is
much more reactive than hexane, hexene, or any hexadiene. Benzene is much less reactive
than any of these. Any of the alkenes will be readily converted to alcohols in the presence
of a dilute aqueous solution of H2 SO4 , but benzene is inert. Similarly, alkenes react readily
with halogens and hydrogen halides by addition to give alkyl halides, whereas halogens
react with benzene by substitution and only in the presence of a catalyst. KMnO4 or
chromic acid solutions (typically CrO3 or K2 Cr2 O7 ) cleave the double bonds of alkenes,
giving ketones or carboxylic acids, but do not react at all with benzene. Because of the
stability of aromatic compounds, however, reactions involving these have extremely high
activation energies, for passage to the transition state necessarily requires disruption of the
aromatic system, resulting in a temporary loss of aromatic stabilization energy. Instead of
reacting by addition and elimination, as nonaromatic compounds often do, benzene and its
derivatives usually react by electrophilic aromatic substitution.

271
81 Redox
81.1 Birch reduction
The Birch reduction 1 is the reduction of aromatic compounds by sodium in liquid am-
monia. It is attributed to the chemist Arthur Birch2 . The reaction product is a 1,4-
cyclohexadiene. The metal can also be lithium or potassium and the hydrogen atoms are
supplied by an alcohol such as ethanol or tert-butanol.
Figure 170 Birch reduction of aromatic rings
The first step of a Birch reduction is a one-electron reduction of the aromatic ring to a
radical anion. Sodium is oxidized to the sodium ion Na+ . This intermediate is able to
dimerize to the dianion. In the presence of an alcohol the second intermediate is a free
radical which takes up another electron to form the carbanion. This carbanion abstracts a
proton from the alcohol to form the cyclohexadiene.
Figure 171 Birch reduction reaction mechanism
In the presence of an alkyl halide, the carbanion can also engage in nucleophilic substitu-
tion with carbon-carbon bond formation. In substituted aromatics an electron withdraw-
ing substituent such as a carboxylic acid stabilizes a carbanion and the least-substituted
alkene is generated. With an electron donating substituent, the opposite effect occurs. The
non-conjugated 1,4-addition product is preferred over the conjugated 1,3-diene which is ex-
plicable by the principle of least motion3 . Experimental alkali metal alternatives that are
safer to handle, such as the M-SG reducing agent4 , also exist.
81.2 Oxidation of Benzene in the Human Body
Because benzene is nonpolar, it cannot be passed in urine, and will remain in the body until
oxidized. Benzene itself is not dangerous to health, but in order to be passed, it is oxidized
by cytochrome P-450 in the liver. This produces benzene oxide, a highly teratogenic and
carcinogenic compound. Benzene has been replaced by toluene as an industrial solvent,
because toluene can be oxidized to benzoic acid, which is mostly harmless to health, and
1 * A. J. Birch, J. Chem. Soc. 1944 , 430.

2 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Arthur%20John%20Birch
3 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Principle%20of%20least%20motion
4 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/M-SG%20reducing%20agent
273
Redox
is quickly passed. The decomposition of benzoic acid into benzene and carbon dioxide in
soda pop has become an issue recently.
274
82 Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution
A nucleophilic substitution is a substitution reaction in organic chemistry in which the

nucleophile displaces a good leaving group, such as a halide on an aromatic ring. In order
to understand this type of reaction, it is important to recognize which chemical groups are
good leaving groups and which are not.
82.1 Leaving Groups
A leaving group can probably most simply be described as an atom or molecule that detaches
from an organic molecule. The ability for a functional group to leave is called lability .
Leaving groups affect the intrinsic reactivity of the molecule as a whole, but only until,
quite naturally, they actually leave.
The lower the pK a of the conjugate acid for a given leaving group, the better that leaving
group is at actually leaving. This is because such groups can easily stabilize any devel-
oping negative charge and without stabilization, a leaving group will actually become a
nucleophile causing the reaction to cycle pointlessly between attached and detached forms.
(This explains why a strong base is nearly always a poor leaving group.)
In room temperature water, the sequence of lability is:
• Less lability
• amine/amide (NH2 - )
• alkoxy/alkoxide (RO- )
• hydroxyl/hydroxide (HO- )
• carboxylate (RCOO- )
• fluoro/fluoride (F- )
• water (H2 O)
• chloro/chloride (Cl- )
• bromo/bromide (Br- )
• iodo/iodide (I- )
• azide (N3 - )
• thiocyanate (SCN- )
• nitro/nitrite (NO2 )
• cyano/cyanide (CN- )
• Greater Lability
275
Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution
82.2 Rate of Reaction
The better a leaving group, the faster a nucleophilic reaction will occur. This is demon-
strated by comparisons of the kinetics between halogenalkanes, where the bromides disso-
ciate more quickly than the chlorides, but the iodides dissociate more rapidly than either of
the other two. This is because the bond between the halogen and its nearest carbon must be
broken at some point for a nucleophilic substitution to take place. A bond between iodine
and carbon is far more polarizable than a bond between carbon and chlorine, for example,
due to iodine’s relatively large size and relatively large number of ionizable electrons. The
fact that water is a far better leaving group than hydroxide also has the important conse-
quence that the rate of a reaction in which hydroxide leaves is increased dramatically by the
presence of an acid, for hydroxide is then protonated to water, a much weaker nucleophile.
82.3 Types of Reactions
There are three nucleophilic substitution mechanisms commonly encountered with aromatic
systems, the SNAr (addition-elimination) mechanism, the benzyne mechanism and the free
radical SRN1 mechanism. The most important of these is the SNAr mechanism, where
electron withdrawing groups activate the ring towards nucleophilic attack, for example if
there are nitro functional groups positioned ortho or para to the halide leaving group. It is
not generally necessary to discuss these types in detail within the context of an introductory
organic chemistry course.
276
83 Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution
Electrophiles are particles with a deficiency of electrons. Therefore they are likely to react
with substances that have excess electrons. Aromatic compounds have increased electron
density in the form of delocalized π-orbitals.
83.1 Step 1: Formation of a π-complex
At first, the electrophile interacts with the delocalized orbitals of the aromatic ring and a
π-complex is formed.
Figure 172
No chemical bonds are formed at this stage. Evidence of the formation of a π-complex as
an intermediate state has been found for some reactions, but not for all, since the chemical
interaction in π-complexes is very weak.
83.2 Step 2: Formation of a σ-complex
After the π-complex is formed, in the presence of an electron acceptor another complex is
formed - the σ-complex. It is a cationic species, an intermediate that lacks aromatic prop-
erties, but its four π-electrons are delocalized across the ring, which stabilizes the cation
somewhat, sometimes allowing its isolation. An example would be the salt mesityl fluorob-
orate, which is stable at low temperatures, and is prepared by the reaction of mesitylene
(1,3,5-trimethylbenzene) with fluoroboric acid (BF3 /HF); the cation of this salt is proto-
nated mesitylene. σ-complexes are also known as Wheland intermediates .
83.3 Step 3: Formation of a Substituted product
At the next stage the σ-complex decomposes, freeing a hydrogen cation and forming the
product of substitution.
Figure 173
277
Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution
83.3.1 Electrophilic aromatic halogenation
Figure 174 Electrophilic aromatic substitution of benzene
Another important reaction of benzene is the electrophilic substitution of halides, a specific

type of electrophililc aromatic substitution. These reactions are very useful for adding sub-
stituents to an aromatic system. The rates of the reactions increase with the electrophilicity
of the halogen: hence, fluorination in this manner is too rapid and exothermic to be prac-
tical, whereas iodine requires the most vigorous conditions. Chlorination and bromination
are the most often practiced in the lab of the four possible halogenations. Halobenzenes
are used for pesticides, as well as the precursors to other products. Many COX-2 inhibitors
contain halobenzene subunits.
Some highly activated aromatic compounds, such as phenol and aniline, are reactive enough
to undergo halogenation without a catalyst, but for typical benzene derivatives (and benzene
itself), the reactions are extremely slow at room temperature in the absence of a catalyst.
Usually, Lewis acids are used as catalysts, which work by helping to polarize the halogen-
halogen bond, thus decreasing the electron density around one halogen atom, making it
more electrophilic. The most common catalysts used are either Fe or Al, or their respective
chlorides and bromides (+3 oxidation state). Iron(III) bromide and iron(III) chloride lose
their catalytic activity if they are hydrolyzed by any moisture present, including atmospheric
water vapor. Therefore, they are generated in situ by adding iron fillings to bromine
or chlorine. Iodination is carried out under different conditions: periodic acid is often
used as a catalyst. Under these conditions, the I+ ion is formed, which is sufficiently
electrophilic to attack the ring. Iodination can also be accomplished using a diazonium
reaction. Fluorination is most often done using this technique, as the use of fluorine gas is
inconvenient and often fragments organic compounds.
Halogenation of aromatic compounds differs from the additions to alkenes or the free-radical
halogenations of alkanes, which do not require Lewis acid catalysts. The formation of the
arenium ion results in the temporary loss of aromaticity, the overall result being that the
reaction’s activation energy is higher than those of halogenations of aliphatic compounds.
Halogenation of phenols is faster in polar solvents due to the dissociation of phenol, because
the phenoxide (-O- ) group is more strongly activating than hydroxyl itself.
83.3.2 Electrophilic aromatic sulfonation
Aromatic sulfonation is an organic reaction in which a hydrogen atom on an arene is replaced

by a sulfonic acid functional group in an electrophilic aromatic substitution.
The electrophile of such a reaction is sulfur trioxide (SO3 ), which can be released from
oleum (also known as fuming sulfuric acid), essentially sulfuric acid in which gaseous sulfur
trioxide has been dissolved.
In contrast to aromatic nitration and other electrophilic aromatic substitutions, aromatic
sulfonation is reversible. Sulfonation takes place in strongly acidic conditions, and desul-
fonation can occur on heating with a trace of acid. This also means that thermodynamic,
278
Step 3: Formation of a Substituted product
rather than kinetic, control can be achieved at high temperatures. Hence, directive effects
are not expected to play a key role in determining the proportions of isomeric products of
high-temperature sulfonation.
Aromatic sulfonic acids can be intermediates in the preparation of dyes and many phar-
maceuticals. Sulfonation of aniline produces p-aminobenzenesulfonic acid or sulfanilic acid,
which is a zwitterionic compound with an unusually high melting point. The amide of this
compound and related compounds form a large group of sulfa drugs (a type of antibiotic).
Overall reaction: ArH + SO3 → ArSO3 H
83.3.3 Electrophilic aromatic nitration
Nitration occurs with aromatic organic compounds via an electrophilic substitution mech-
anism involving the attack of the electron-rich benzene ring by the nitronium (nitryl) ion.
Benzene is commonly nitrated by refluxing with a mixture of concentrated sulfuric acid
and concentrated nitric acid at 50°C. The sulfuric acid is regenerated and hence acts as a
catalyst.
Selectivity is always a challenge in nitrations. Fluorenone nitration is selective and yields a
tri-nitro compound or tetra-nitro compound by tweaking reaction conditions just slightly.
Another example of trinitration can be found in the synthesis of phloroglucinol. Other
nitration reagents include nitronium tetrafluoroborate which is a true nitronium salt. This
compound can be prepared from hydrogen fluoride, nitric acid and boron trifluoride. Aro-
matic nitro compounds are important intermediates for anilines; the latter may be readily
prepared by action of a reducing agent.
Overall reaction: ArH + HNO3 → ArNO2 + H2 O
83.3.4 Friedel-Crafts alkylation
Figure 175 Friedel-Crafts alkylation of benzene with methyl chloride
The Friedel-Crafts reactions, discovered by French alkaloid chemist Charles Friedel and his
American partner, James Crafts, in 1877, is either the alkylation or acylation of aromatic
compounds catalyzed by a Lewis acid. They are very useful in the lab for formation of
carbon-carbon bonds between an aromatic nucleus and a side chain.
Source of electrophile
Friedel-Crafts alkylation is an example of electrophilic substitution in aromatic compounds.

The electrophile is formed in the reaction of an alkyl halide with a Lewis acid. The Lewis
acid polarizes the alkyl halide molecule, causing the hydrocarbon part of it to bear a positive
charge and thus become more electrophilic.
CH3 —Cl + AlCl3 → CH3 + + AlCl4 −
or
279
Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution
CH3 Cl + AlCl3 → CH3 δ+ Cl+ Al− Cl3

(The carbon atom has a slight excess of positive charge, as the electronegative chlorine atom
draws electron density towards itself. The chlorine atom has a positive charge, as it has
formed a sub-ordinate bond with the aluminium atom. In effect, the Cl atom has lost an
electron, while the Al atom has gained an electron. Therefore, the Al atom has a negative
charge.)
Mechanism of alkylation
The polarized, electrophilic molecule then seeks to saturate its electron deficiency and forms
a π-complex with the aromatic compound that is rich in π-electrons. Formation a π-complex
does not lead to loss of aromaticity. The aromaticity is lost however in the σ-complex that
is the next stage of reaction. The positive charge in the σ-complex is evenly distributed
across the benzene ring.
C6 H6 + CH3 + → C6 H6 + Br → C6 H5 Br + H+
The σ-complex C6 H6 + Br can be separated (it is stable at low temperatures), while the
π-complex can not.
Restrictions
• Deactivating functional groups, such as nitro (-NO2 ), usually prevent the reaction from
occurring at any appreciable rate, so it is possible to use solvents such as nitrobenzene
for Friedel-Crafts alkylation.
• Primary and secondary carbocations are much less stable than tertiary cations, so rear-
rangement typically occurs when one attempts to introduce primary and secondary alkyl
groups onto the ring. Hence, Friedel-Crafts alkylation using n-butyl chloride generates
the n-butylium cation, which rearranges to the t-butyl cation, which is far more sta-
ble, and the product is exclusively the t-butyl derivative. This may, in some cases, be
circumvented through use of a weaker Lewis acid.
• The Friedel-Crafts reaction can not be used to alkylate compounds which are sensitive
to acids, including many heterocycles.
• Another factor that restricts the use of Friedel-Crafts alkylation is polyalkylation. Since
alkyl groups have an activating influence, substituted aromatic compounds alkylate more
easily than the original compounds, so that the attempted methylation of benzene to give
toluene often gives significant amounts of xylene and mesitylene. The usual workaround
is to acylate first (see the following sections) and then reduce the carbonyl group to an
alkyl group.
83.3.5 Friedel-Crafts acylation
Figure 176 Friedel-Crafts acylation of benzene by acetyl chloride
280
Step 3: Formation of a Substituted product
Friedel-Crafts acylation, like Friedel-Crafts alkylation, is a classic example of electrophilic

substitution.
Source of electrophile
Reacting with Lewis acids, anhydrides and chloranhydrides of acids become strongly polar-
ized and often form acylium cations.
RCOCl + AlCl3 → RC+ O + AlCl4 -
Mechanism of acylation
The mechanism of acylation is very similar to that of alkylation.

C6 H6 + RC+ O → C6 H6 —CO—R + H+
The ketone that is formed then forms a complex with aluminum chloride, reducing its
catalytic activity.
C6 H6 —CO—R + AlCl3 → C6 H6 —C+ (R)—O—Al− Cl3
Therefore, a much greater amount of catalyst is required for acylation than for alkylation.
Restrictions
• Although no isomerisation of cations happens, due to the reasonance stabilization pro-

vided by the acylium ion, certain cations may lose CO and alkylation will occur instead
of acylation. For example, an attempt to add pivalyl (neopentanoyl) to an aromatic ring
will result in loss of CO from the cation, which then results in the t-butyl derivative being
formed.
• Acidophobic aromatic compounds, such as many heterocycles can’t exist in the presence
of both Lewis acids and anhydrides.
• Formyl chloride is unstable and cannot be used to introduce the formyl group onto a ring
through Friedel-Crafts acylation. Instead, the Gattermann-Koch reaction is often used.
Applications
Friedel-Crafts acylation is used, for example, in the synthesis of anthraquinone from benzene
and phtalic anhydride.
In laboratory synthesis Friedel-Crafts acylation is often used instead of alkylation in cases
where alkylation is difficult or impossible, such as synthesis of monosubstituted alkylben-
zenes.
281
84 External links
• reduction of o-anisic acid1 to 2-heptyl-2-hexenone in Organic Syntheses2 Article3

• reduction of naphthalene4 to 1,4,5,8-Tetrahydronaphthalene (isotetralin) in Organic Syn-
theses5 Article6 .
• reduction of o-xylene7 to 1,2-Dimethyl-1,4-cyclohexadiene in Organic Syntheses8 Article9
• reduction of benzoic acid10 to 2,5-Cyclohexadiene-1-carboxylic acid in Organic Synthe-
ses11 Article12
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/anisic%20acid
2 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic%20Syntheses
3 http://www.orgsyn.org/orgsyn/prep.asp?prep=cv7p0249
4 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/naphthalene
7 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/xylene
10 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/benzoic%20acid
283
85 References
<< Aromatics1 | Aromatic reactions | Ketones and aldehydes>>2

----

285
86 Unit 11: Ketones and aldehydes
Aldehydes ( ) and ketones ( ) are both carbonyl compounds. They are organic
compounds in which the carbonyl carbon is connected to C or H atoms on either side. An
aldehyde has one or both vacancies of the carbonyl carbon satisfied by a H atom, while a
ketone has both its vacancies satisfied by carbon.
86.1 Naming Aldehydes and Ketones
Ketones are named by replacing the-e in the alkane name with -one . The carbon
chain is numbered so that the ketone carbon, called the carbonyl group , gets the lowest
number. For example, would be named 2-butanone because the root structure is butane
and the ketone group is on the number two carbon.
Alternatively, functional class nomenclature of ketones is also recognized by IUPAC, which
is done by naming the substituents attached to the carbonyl group in alphabetical order,
ending with the word ketone. The above example of 2-butanone can also be named ethyl
methyl ketone using this method.
If two ketone groups are on the same structure, the ending -dione would be added to the
alkane name, such as heptane-2,5-dione.
Aldehydes replace the-e ending of an alkane with -al for an aldehyde. Since an aldehyde
is always at the carbon that is numbered one, a number designation is not needed. For
example, the aldehyde of pentane would simply be pentanal.
The -CH=O group of aldehydes is known as a formyl group. When a formyl group is
attached to a ring, the ring name is followed by the suffix ”carbaldehyde” . For example,
a hexane ring with a formyl group is named cyclohexanecarbaldehyde.
86.2 Boiling Points and Bond Angles
Aldehyde and ketone polarity is characterized by the high dipole moments of their
carbonyl group, which makes them rather polar molecules. They are more polar than alkenes
and ethers, though because they lack hydrogen, they cannot participate in hydrogen bonding
like alcohols, thus making their relative boiling points higher than alkenes and ethers, yet
lower than alcohols.
287
Unit 11: Ketones and aldehydes
Typical bond angles between the carbonyl group and its substituents show minor deviations
from the trigonal planar angles of 120 degrees, with a slightly higher bond angle between the
O=C-R bond than the R-C-R bond on the carbonyl carbon (with R being any substituent).
86.3 Preparing Aldehydes and Ketones
86.3.1 Preparing Aldehydes
Partial oxidation of primary alcohols to aldehydes
This reaction uses pyridinium chlorochromate (PCC) in the absence of water (if water is
present the alcohol will be oxidized further to a carboxylic acid).
Figure 180
From fatty acids
(HCOO)2Ca + HEAT ----> HCHO + CaCO3 (CH3COO)2Ca + HEAT ----> acetone +

CaCO3 (CH3COO)2Ca + (HCOO)2Ca ---->ethanaldehyde
Stephen reduction
RCN + SnCl2+ HCL ----> RCH=NH2 + Cl− ----> on hydrolysis gives RCHO
Here sulfur is used as a poisoner so that aldehyde formed doesn’t get oxidised to the car-
boxylic acid. See the Wikipedia article1 for more detail. mechanism b to do wikipedia kis
naam ka hai ye
Rosenmund reaction
RCOCl + Pd + BaSO4 + S ---->RCHO for solvent xylene is used
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Stephen%20aldehyde%20synthesis
288
Preparing Aldehydes and Ketones
86.3.2 Preparing Ketones
From Grignard reagents
RCOOR’ + R’MgX ---->RCOR + R’OH
R' R' OH
| | |
RC=O + R’-MgX ---->R-C-OMgX----->R-C-OH + Mg-X
| | |
O-R' OR' OR'
From nitriles
RCN + R’MgX ----> RCOR’(after hydrolysis) HCN does not react with RMgX as HCN
has acidic hydrogen which results in RH being formed.
From gem dihalides
RCCl2R + strong base ----> RCOR
Oppenaur oxidation
Reagent is Aluminium tert. butoxide solvent is acetone

ROH + ACETONE ----> Ketone + isopropyl alcohol this oxidation does not affect double
bonds in this oxidation ketone act as a oxidizing agent this is exact opposite to merrwine
pondroff reduction
Friedel-Crafts acylation of aromatic compounds
An aromatic ring reacts with a carboxylic acid chlorine (RCOCl) in the presence of AlCl3
to form an aryl ketone of the form ArCOR.
Oxidation of secondary alcohols to ketones
A secondary alcohol can be oxidised into a ketone using acidified potassium dichromate(VI)
and heating under reflux.
The orange dichromate(VI) ion, Cr2O72-, is reduced to the green Cr3+(aq) ion.
289
86.3.3 Ozonolysis of alkenes
It is a reaction in which the double bond is completely broken and the alkene molecule
converted into two smaller molecules.
Figure 181 A generalized scheme of ozonolysis
Ozonolysis (cleavage ”by ozone) is carried out in two stages: first, addition of ozone to
the double bond to form an ozonide ; and second, hydrolysis of the ozonide to yield the
cleavage products. Ozone gas is passed into a solution of the alkene in some inert solvent
like carbon tetrachloride; evaporation of the solvent leaves the ozonide as a viscous oil. This
unstable, explosive compound is not purified, but is treated directly with water, generally
in the presence of a reducing agent. If oxidsing reagent is used, aldehyde or ketone if
oxidisable can further oxidise into carboxylic acid which is not the case with reducing
agents In the cleavage products a doubly-bonded oxygen is found attached to each of the
originally doubly-bonded carbons. The function of the reducing agent, which is frequently
zinc dust, is to prevent formation of hydrogen peroxide, which would otherwise react with
the aldehydes and ketones. (Aldehydes, RCHO, are often converted into acids, RCOOH,
for ease of isolation.)
Mechanism
The alkene and ozone form an intermediate molozonide in a 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition.
Next, the molozonide reverts to its corresponding carbonyl oxide (also called the Criegee
intermediate or Criegee zwitterion) and aldehyde or ketone in a retro-1,3-dipolar cycloaddi-
tion. The oxide and aldehyde or ketone react again in a 1,3-dipolar cycloaddition or produce
a relatively stable ozonide intermediate (a trioxolane)
290
Keto-enol tautomerism
Figure 182 The reaction mechanism of ozonolysis.
86.3.4 Hydration of alkynes
Water is added to an alkyne in a strong acid. The strong acid used is sulfuric acid and
mercuric acid.
86.4 Keto-enol tautomerism
In the presence of an acid (H+) or a base (OH-), the aldehyde or ketone will form an
equilibrium with enols, in which the double bond of the carbonyl group migrates to form
double bond between the carbonyl and the alpha (α) carbon.
In the presence of an acid, protonation of the oxygen group will occur, and water will
abstract an alpha (α) hydrogen.
In the presence of a base, deprotonation of the alpha hydrogen will occur, and a hydrogen
from water will be abstracted by the carbonyl oxygen.
This is an important feature of ketone and aldehydes, and is known as the keto-enolic
tautomery or keto-enol tautomerism , i.e. the equilibrium of carbonyl compounds between
two forms.
291
It must be stressed that the keto and the enol forms are two distinct compounds ,
not isomers. They are known as tautomers of each other. The presence of α-hydrogen is
necessary for this equilibrium: those compounds not possessing it are called non-enolizable
ketones.
Figure 183 Mechanism of enol-keto tautomerism
86.5 Reactions of Aldehydes and Ketones
86.5.1 Reactions with the carbonyl carbon
Since aldehydes and ketones contain a polar carbonyl group, the partially positive carbon
atom can act as an electrophile. Strong and weak nucleophiles are able to attack this
carbonyl carbon, resulting in a net addition to the molecule.
Nucleophilic addition
With cyanide, nucleophilic addition occur to give a hydroxynitrile:

RR’C=O + CN- + H+ → RR’COHCN
e.g. propanone → 2-hydroxymethylpropanonitrile
86.5.2 Reactions with the carbonyl oxygen
The partially negative oxygen can act as a nucleophile, or be attacked by electrophiles.
86.5.3 Oxidation
Using a strong oxidizing agent such as the Tollens’ Reagent (Ag2 O in aqueous ammonia)
acidified dichromate, Benedict’s/Fehling’s reagent (essentially alkaline Cu+2 ); aldehydes
but not ketones may be oxidized into carboxylic acids. This is one way to test for the
292
Inductive Effect and Greek letter assignment
presence of an aldehyde in a sample compound: an aldehyde will become a carboxylic acid

when reacted with Tollens’ reagent, but a ketone will not react. when aldehydes react with
fehling solution a red precipitate is obtained (due to formation of Cu2 O) .
86.6 Inductive Effect and Greek letter assignment
The carbonyl group is very electron withdrawing, and adjacent carbons are effected by
induction. Using the carbonyl group as a reference, adjacent carbons are named using
Greek letters in order of closeness to the carbonyl group. Alpha (α) carbons are directly
attached to the carbonyl group, beta (β) carbons are connected to alpha carbons, gamma
(γ) to beta (β), and so on.
Due to the inductive effect of the partial positive charge on the carbonyl carbon of a keytone
or aldehyde, as well as the stabilizing resonance of the double bond between the hydroxyl
group and conjugated carbons to the carbonyl group, the alpha (α) hydrogens are especially
acidic, meaning they are especially prone to removal.
id:Kimia Organik/Keton dan aldehida2
----
2 https://id.wikibooks.org/wiki/Kimia%20Organik%2FKeton%20dan%20aldehida
293
87 Unit 12: Carboxylic acids
A carboxylic acid is characterized by the presence of the carboxyl group -COOH. The chemi-
cal reactivity of carboxylic acids is dominated by the very positive carbon, and the resonance
stabilization that is possible should the group lose a proton. These two factors contribute
both to acidity and to the group’s dominant chemical reaction: nucleophilic substitution.
295
88 Preparation
1) from alkenes
R-CH=CHR + KMnO4 + OH- + Heat----> 2RCOOH
2) from ROH
RCH2OH + OXIDIZING AGENT ----> RCOOH
Aliphatic carboxylic acids are formed from primary alcohols or aldehydes by reflux with
potassium dichromate (VI) acidified with sulphuric acid.
3) from toluene etc.
toluene + KMnO4 ----> benzoic acid
Alkyl benzenes (methyl benzene, ethyl benzene, etc) react with potassium manganate (VII)
to form benzoic acid. All alkyl benzenes give the same product, because all but one alkyl
carbon is lost.
No acidification is needed. The reaction is refluxed and generates KOH. The benzoic acid
is worked up by adding a proton source (such as HCl).
4) from methyl ketones
RCOCH3 + NaOH + I-I ----> RCOO- + CHI3
5) from Grignard reagents
RMgX + O=C=O ----> RCOOMgX

RCOOMgX + HOH ----> RCOOH + MgX(OH)
297
89 Properties
89.1 Nomenclature
The systematic IUPAC nomenclature for carboxylic acids requires the longest carbon chain
of the molecule to be identified and the -e of alkane name to be replaced with -oic acid.
The traditional names of many carboxylic acids are still in common use.
Nomenclature of carboxylic acids

formula IUPAC name traditional name
HCOOH methanoic acid formic acid
CH3 -COOH ethanoic acid acetic acid
CH3 CH2 -COOH propanoic acid propionic acid
CH2 =CH-COOH propenoic acid acrylic acid
CF3 -COOH trifluoroethanoic acid
The systematic approach for naming dicarboxylic acids (alkanes with carboxylic acids on
either end) is the same as for carboxylic acids, except that the suffix is -dioic acid. Common
name Nomenclature of dicarboxylic acids is aided by the acronym OMSGAP (Om’s Gap),
where each letter stands for the first letter of the first seven names for each dicarboxylic
acid, starting from the simplest.
Nomenclature of dicarboxylic acids

formula IUPAC name traditional name
HOOCCOOH Ethanedioic acid Oxalic acid
HOOCCH2 -COOH propanedioic acid Malonic acid
HOOCCH2 CH2 -COOH butanedioic acid Succinic acid
HOOCCH2 CH2 CH2 -COOH pentanedioic acid Glutaric acid
HOOCCH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 -COOH hexanedioic acid Adipic acid
HOOCCH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 CH2 -COOH heptanedioic acid Pimelic acid
89.2 Acidity
Most carboxylic acids are weak acids. To quantify the acidities we need to know the pKa
values: The pH above which the acids start showing mostly acidic behaviour: Ethanoic
acid: 4.8 Phenol: 10.0 Ethanol: 15.9 Water: 15.7
Acidity of carboxylic acids in water
acid formula pK a
methanoic acid H-COOH 3.75
299
Properties
Acidity of carboxylic acids in water

acid formula pK a
ethanoic acid CH3 -COOH 4.75
propanoic acid CH3 CH2 -COOH 4.87
propenoic acid 4.25
benzoic acid C6 H5 -COOH 4.19
trifluoroethanoic acid CF3 -COOH 0.3
phenol C6 H5 -OH 10.0
ethanol CH3 CH2 -OH 15.9
water H2 O 15.7
Data from CRC Handbook of Chemistry & Physics, 64th edition, 1984 D-167-8 Except
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Trifluoroacetic_acid
Clearly, the carboxylic acids are remarkably acidic for organic molecules. Somehow, the re-
lease of the H+ ion is favoured by the structure. Two arguments: The O-H bond is polarised
by the removal of electrons to the carbonyl oxygen. The ion is stabilised by resonance: the
carbonyl oxygen can accept the charge from the other oxygen. The acid strength of car-
boxylic acid are strongly modulated by the moiety attached to the carboxyl. Electron-donor
moiety decrease the acid strength, whereas strong electron-withdrawing groups increase it.
300
90 Reactions
90.1 Acid Chloride Formation
Carboxylic acids are converted to acid chlorides by a range of reagents: SOCl2 , PCl5 or
PCl3 are the usual reagents. Other products are HCl & SO2 , HCl & POCl3 and H3 PO3
respectively. The conditions must be dry, as water will hydrolyse the acid chloride in a
vigorous reaction. Hydrolysis forms the original carboxylic acid.
CH3 COOH + SOCl2 → CH3 COCl + HCl + SO2
C6 H5 COOH + PCl5 → C6 H5 COCl + HCl + POCl3
3 CH3 CH2 COOH + PCl3 → 3 CH3 CH2 COCl + H3 PO3
90.2 Esterification
Alcohols will react with acid chlorides or carboxylic acids to form esters. This reaction is
catalyzed by acidic or basic conditions. See alcohol notes.
C6 H5 COCl + CH3 CH2 OH → C6 H5 COOCH2 CH3 + HCl
With carboxylic acids, the condensation reaction is an unfavourable equilibrium, promoted
by using non-aqueous solvent (if any) and a dehydrating agent such as sulfuric acid (non-
nucleophilic), catalyzing the reaction).
CH3 COOH + CH3 CH2 CH2 OH = CH3 COOCH2 CH2 CH3 + H2 O
Figure 184 Ethanoic Acid reacts with Propanol to form Propyl Ethanoate
Reversing the reaction is simply a matter of refluxing the ester with plenty of aqueous acid.
This hydrolysis produces the carboxylic acid and the alcohol.
C6 H5 COOCH3 + H2O → C6 H5 COOH + CH3 OH
301
Reactions
Alternatively, the reflux is done with aqueous alkali. The salt of the carboxylic acid is
produced. This latter process is called ’saponification’ because when fats are hydrolysed in
this way, their salts are useful as soap.
90.3 Anhydrides
See acid anhydride1 .
90.4 Amides
Conceptually, an amide is formed by reacting an acid (an electrophile2 ) with an amine

compound (a nucleophile3 ), releasing water.
RCOOH + H2 NR’ → RCONHR’ + H2 O
However, the acid-base reaction is much faster, which yields the non-electrophilic carboxy-
late and the non-nucleophilic ammonium, and no further reaction takes place.
RCOOH + H2 NR’ → RCOO- + H3 NR’+
To get around this, a variety of coupling reagents have been developed that first react
with the acid or carboxylate to form an active acyl compound, which is basic enough to
deprotonate an ammonium and electrophilic enough to react with the free base of the amine.
A common coupling agent is dicyclohexylcarbodiimide4 , or DCC, which is very toxic.
90.5 Acid Decarboxylation
On heating with sodalime (NaOH/CaO solid mix) carboxylic acids lose their –COOH group
and produce a small alkane plus sodium carbonate:
CH3 CH2 COOH + 2 NaOH →CH3 CH3 + Na2 CO3 + H2 O
Note how a carbon is lost from the main chain. The product of the reaction may be easier
to identify than the original acid, helping us to find the structure.
90.6 Ethanoic anhydride
Industrially, ethanoic anhydride is used as a less costly and reactive alternative to ethanoyl
chloride. It forms esters and can be hydrolysed in very similar ways, but yields a second
ethanoic acid molecule, not HCl The structure is formed from two ethanoic acid molecules…
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acid%20anhydride
2 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Electrophile
3 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nucleophile
4 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dicyclohexylcarbodiimide
302
Polyester
90.7 Polyester
Polyester can be made by reacting a diol (ethane-1,2-diol) with a dicarboxylic acids

(benzene-1,4-dicarboxylic acid). n HO-CH2 CH2 -OH + n HOOC-C6 H4 -COOH → (-O-
CH2 CH2 -O-OC-C6 H4 -CO-)n + n H2 O Polyester makes reasonable fibres, it is quite inflexible
so it does not crease easily; but for clothing it is usually combined with cotton for comfort.
The plastic is not light-sensitive, so it is often used for net curtains. Film, bottles and other
moulded products are made from polyester.
90.8 Distinguishing carboxylic acids from phenols
Although carboxylic acids are acidic, they can be distinguished from phenol because: Only
carboxylic acids will react with carbonates and hydrogencarbonates to form CO2
2 CH3 COOH + Na2 CO3 → 2 CH3 COONa + H2 O + CO2
C6 H5 COOH + NaHCO3 → C6 H5 COONa + H2 O + CO2
Some phenols react with FeCl3 solution, giving a characteristic purple colour.
Note : Click on the following icon to go back to the contents page.
303
Reactions
Figure 185
----
304
91 Unit 13: Carboxylic acid derivatives
The carboxyl group (abbreviated -CO2 H or -COOH) is one of the most widely occurring
functional groups in chemistry as well as biochemistry. The carboxyl group of a large family
of related compounds called Acyl compounds or Carboxylic Acid Derivatives .
All the reactions and compounds covered in this section will yield Carboxylic Acids on
hydrolysis, and thus are known as Carboxylic Acid Derivatives. Hydrolysis is one example
of Nucleophilic Acyl Substitution , which is a very important two step mechanism that is
common in all reactions that will be covered here.
91.1 Structure
This group of compounds also contains a carbonyl group, but now there is an electronegative
atom (oxygen, nitrogen, or a halogen) attached to the carbonyl carbon. This difference in
structure leads to a major change in reactivity.
91.2 Nomenclature
The systematic IUPAC nomenclature for carboxylic acid derivatives is different for the
various compounds which are in this vast category, but each is based upon the name of the
carboxylic acid closest to the derivative in structure. Each type is discussed individually
below.
91.2.1 Acyl Groups
Acyl groups are named by stripping the -ic acid of the corresponding carboxylic acid and
replacing it with -yl .
EXAMPLE:
CH3 COOH = acetic acid
CH3 COO-R = acetyl-R
91.2.2 Acyl Halides
Simply add the name of the attached halide to the end of the acyl group.
305
Unit 13: Carboxylic acid derivatives
EXAMPLE:
CH3 COBr = acetyl bromide
91.2.3 Carboxylic Acid Anhydrides
A carboxylic acid anhydride ([RC=O]O[O=CR]) is a carboxylic acid (COOH) that has an

acyl group (RC=O) attached to its oxygen instead of a hydrogen. If both acyl groups are
the same, then it is simply the name of the carboxylic acid with the word acid replaced
with anhydride . If the acyl groups are different, then they are named in alphabetical order
in the same way, with anhydride replacing acid .
EXAMPLE:
CH3 CO-O-OCCH3 = Ethanoic Anhydride
91.2.4 Esters
Esters are created when the hydrogen on a carboxylic acid is replaced by an alkyl group.
Esters are known for their pleseant, fruity smell and taste, and they are often found in both
natural and artificial flavors. Esters (RCOOR1 ) are named as alkyl alkanoates . The alkyl
group directly attached to the oxygen is named first, followed by the acyl group, with -ate
replacing -yl of the acyl group.
EXAMPLE:
CH3 COOCH2 CH2 CH2 CH3 = acetyl butanoate

cooh 1 cooh 1 2-ethan oic acid <\blochquote>
91.2.5 Amides
Amides which have an amino group (-NH2 ) attached to a carbonyl group (RC=O) are named
by replacing the -oic acid or -ic acid of the corresponding carboxylic acid with -amide .
EXAMPLE:
CH3 CONH2 = acetamide
306
Structure and Reactivity
91.2.6 Nitriles
Nitriles (RCN) can be viewed a nitrogen analogue of a carbonyl and are known for their
strong electron withdrawing nature and toxicity. Nitriles are named by adding the suffix
-nitrile to the longest hydrocarbon chain (including the carbon of the cyano group). It can
also be named by replacing the -ic acid or -oic acid of their corresponding carboxylic acids
with -onitrile . Functional class IUPAC nomenclature may also be used in the form of alkyl
cyanides .
EXAMPLE:
CH3 CH2 CH2 CH2 CN = butonitrile or butyl cyanide
91.3 Structure and Reactivity
Stability and reactivity have an inverse relationship, which means that the more stable a
compound, generally the less reactive - and vice versa. Since acyl halides are the least stable
group listed above, it makes sense that they can be chemically changed to the other types.
Since the amides are the most stable type listed above, it should logically follow that they
cannot be easily changed into the other molecule types, and this is indeed the case.
The stability of any type of carboxylic acid derivative is generally determined by the ability
of its functional group to donate electrons to the rest of the molecule. In essence, the more
electronegative the atom or group attached to carbonyl group, the less stable the molecule.
This readily explains the fact that the acyl halides are the most reactive, because halides
are generally quite electronegative. It also explains why acid anhydrides are unstable; with
two carbonyl groups so close together the oxygen in between them cannot stabilize both by
resonance - it can’t loan electrons to both carbonyls.
The following derivative types are ordered in decreasing reactivity (the first is the most
reactive):
Acyl Halides (CO-X) > Acyl Anhydrides (-CO-O-OCR) > Acyl Thioester (-CO-SR)
> Acyl Esters (-CO-OR) > Acyl Amides (-CO-NR2 )
As mentioned before, any substance in the preceding list can be readily transformed into
a substance to its right; that is, the more reactive derivative types (acyl halides) can be
directly transformed into less reactive derivative types (esters and amides). Every type can
be made directly from carboxylic acid (hence the name of this subsection) but carboxylic
acid can also be made from any of these types.
307
91.4 Reactions of Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives
91.4.1 Carboxylic Acids
1) As acids:
RCO2 H + NaOH ----> RCO2 - Na+ + H2 O

RCO2 H + NaHCO3 ----> RCO2 - Na+ + H2 O + CO2
2) Reduction:
RCO2 H + LiAlH4 --- (1) Et2 O -- (2) H2 O ----> RCH2 OH
2a) Fukyama reduction: Pd and Et3SiH COOH->CHO

3) Conversion to acyl chlorides:
RCO2 H -----SOCl2 or PCl5 ----> RCOCl
4) Conversion to esters (Fischer esterfication):
RCOOH + R'-OH <--- HA ---> RCOOR' + H2 O
5) Conversion to amides:
RCO2 H -----SOCl2 or PCl5 ----> RCOCl + NH3 <------> RCOO- NH4 + ---
heat ---> R-CONH2 + H2 O
6) Decarboxylation: (Note: you need a doubly-bonded oxygen (carbonyl) two carbons

away for this reaction to work)
RCOCH2 COOH --- heat ---> R-COCH3 + CO2

HOCOCH2 COOH --- heat ---> CH3 COOH + CO2
91.4.2 Acyl Chlorides
1) Conversion to acids:
R-COCl + H2 O ----> R-COOH + HCl
2) Conversion to anhydrides:
308
Reactions of Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives
R-COCl + R'COO- ----> R-CO-O-COR’ + Cl-
3) Conversion to esters:
R-COCl + R'-OH --- pyridine ---> R-COOR' + Cl- + pyr-H+
R-COCl + R'NHR" (excess) ---> R-CONR'R" + R'NH2 R”Cl
R’ and/or R” may be H
5) Conversion to ketones:
Friedel-Crafts acylation
R-COCl + C6 H6 --- AlCl3 ---> C6 H5 -COR
Reaction of Dialkylcuprates (also known as a Gilman reagent)
R-COCl + R'2 CuLi ----> R-CO-R’
6) Conversion to aldehydes:
R-COCl + LiAlH[OC(CH3 )3 ]3 --- (1) Et2 O (2) H2 O ---> R-CHO
91.4.3 Acid Anhydrides
1) Conversion to acids:
(R-CO)2 -O + H2 O ----> 2 R-COOH
2) Conversion to esters:
(R-CO)2 -O + R’OH ----> R-COOR’ + R-COOH
(R-CO)2 -O + H-N-(R’R”) ----> R-CON-(R’R”) + R-COOH
R’ and/or R” may be H.
309
4) Conversion to aryl ketones (Friedel-Crafts acylation):
(R-CO)2 -O + C6 H6 --- AlCl3 C6 H5 -COR + R-COOH
91.4.4 Esters
1) Hydrolysis:
R-COOR' + H2 O <--- HA ---> R-COOH + R’-OH

R-COOR’ + OH- ----> RCOO- + R’-OH
2) Transesterification (conversion to other esters):
R-COOR' + R"-OH <--- HA ---> R-COO-R" + R'-OH
R-COOR' + HN-(R"R"') ----> R-CON-(R"R"') + R'-OH
R” and/or R” ’ may be H
4) Reaction with Grignard reagents:
R-COOR' + 2 R"MgX --- Et2 O ---> R-C-R”2 OMgX + R’OMgX ---> H3 O+

R-C-R”2 OH
The intermediate and final product is a tetrahedral carbon with two R” attached directly
to the carbon along with R and OH/OMgX
X = halogen.
5) Reduction:
R-COOR' + LiAlH4 --- (1) Et2 O (2) H2 O ---> R-CH2 OH + R’-OH
91.4.5 Amides
1) Hydrolysis:
R-CON(R'R") + H3 O+ --- H2 O ---> R-COOH + R’-N+ H2 R”

R-CON(R’R”) + OH- --- H2 O ---> R-COO- + R’-NHR”
R,R’ and/or R” may be H.
310
Reactions of Carboxylic Acids and Their Derivatives
2) Dehydration (conversion to nitriles):
R-CONH2 --- P4 O10 , heat, (-H2 O) ---> R-CN
91.4.6 Nitriles
1) Hydrolysis:
R-CN --- H3 O+ ,heat ---> RCOOH

R-CN --- OH- ,H2 O,heat ---> RCOO-
2) Reduction to aldehyde:
R-CN --- (1) (i -Bu)2 AlH (2) H2 O ---> R-COH
(i -Bu)2 AlH = DIBAL-H

3) Conversion to ketone (by Grignard or organolithium reagents):
R-CN + R"-M --- (1) Et2 O (2) H3 O+ ---> R-COR”
M = MgBr (Grignard reagent) or Li (organolithium reagent)
91.4.7 Mechanisms
A common motif in reactions dealing with carboxylic acid derivatives is the tetrahedral
intermediate. The carbonyl group is highly polar, with the carbon having a low electron
density, and the oxygen having a high electron density. With an acid catalyst, a H+ is
added to the oxygen of the carbonyl group, increasing the positive charge at the carbon
atom. A nucleophile can then attack the carbonyl, creating a tetrahedral intermediate.
For example, in Fischer esterification, the mechanism can be outlined thus: 1) H+ is added
to carbonyl oxygen 2) Oxygen atom of the alcohol adds to the carbonyl carbon 3) Proton
transfer from alcohol oxygen to carboxyl oxygen 4) Water molecule ejected from tetrahedral
intermediate, double bond forms, recreating the carbonyl 5) H+ is removed from carbonyl
oxygen
----
311
92 Unit 14: Analytical techniques
313
93 Elemental analysis
Elemental analysis is the process for determining the partial or complete chemical formula
for a substance. Most commonly, it involves the complete combustion in air or oxygen of
the substance and then quantifying the amount of elemental oxides produced. In the case of
organic compounds, the carbon is converted to carbon dioxide and the hydrogen to water.
From these, the percent carbon and percent hydrogen in the substance can be found and
compared with a proposed chemical formula for the substance at hand.
Element test: Put a small amount of the solid into a small piece of Na metal then roll it
around the solid, followed by introduction into a fusion tube. The tube is heated with a
gentle flame at a slow rate (in order not to evaporate N2 present in solid) then strong heating
till the bottom of the tube become red hot. The tube is then put in a beaker containing
a minimal amount of water then heated, cooled, filtered and the filtrate divided into three
parts.
1. Test for nitrogen: The filtrate and ferrous sulphate are boiled and cooled and dilute
sulphuric acid is added. If green or blue color occurs the solid contain nitrogen.
The chemistry behind what happened :
Na+C+N --> NaCN
FeSO4 +NaCN gives Fe[CN]2
Fe[CN]2 +4NaCN give the complex Na4 [Fe(CN)6 ]
ferrous oxidizes to ferric by the acid so 3Na4 [Fe(CN)6 ]+4Fe3+ --> Fe4 [Fe(CN)6 ]3
2. Test for sulphur: The filtrate is exposed to dilute acetic acid and lead acetate, yielding
a brown or black precipitate.
The chemistry behind what happened :
Na+S --> Na2 S
Na2 S +Pb(CH3 CO2 H)2 yields lead sulphide, a black precipitate.

or: The filtrate and sodium nitro prusside yield a violet color
Na2 S+Na2 [Fe(CN)5 NO] --> Na4 [Fe(CN)5 NOS] = violet color
3. Test for chlorine:
315
Elemental analysis
a) In the absence of N or S: The filtrate is exposed to dilute nitric acid and silver nitrate.
Formation of a white precipitate suggests the presence of chlorine.
b) In the presence of N and/or S :
The filtrate is exposed to dilute sulphoric acid then boiled to 1/3 initial volume and cooled.
Formation of a white precipitate after the addition of dilute nitric acid and silver nitrate
suggests the presence of chlorine.
Equations :
NaCN+AgNO3 --> AgCN white ppt
Na2 S+AgNO3 gives Ag2 S black ppt
In the presence of N or S these two precipitates may interfere with the white
colour of the result of the chlorine test. Therefore dilute sulphoric acid is added
because in the presence of N or S : Na2 S+ dilute H2 SO4 gives H2 S gas NaCN+ dilulte
H2 SO4 gives HCN gas
There is no interference with the white colour expected from the chlorine test in solid.
316
94 Chromatography
Chromatography involves the physical separation of a mixture of compounds. Chro-

matography can be used as a purification method but also sees wide use for the identification
of compounds based on their chromatographic behavior.
317
95 Theory
There are many variations of chromatography, but all involve the dissolution of an analyte
into a fluid known as the mobile phase and the passage of this fluid solution across a
stationary phase , often a solid or liquid-coated solid.
As the mobile phase comes into contact with the stationary phase, some of the analyte
molecules dissolve or adsorb onto the mobile phase. The more the molecules of that sub-
stance are retained, the slower their progress through the chromatographic apparatus. Dif-
ferent substances will then move through at different rates, ideally resulting in distinctly
identifiable retention times for each substance.
Commonly used chromatographic techniques are identified through the nature of the sta-
tionary and mobile phases used, the method for passing the mobile phase through the
apparatus, and how separated components are identified.
319
96 Paper chromatography
In paper chromatography the stationary phase is a specialized paper made to absorb

water to a high level. The mobile phase is usually water or a concentrated salt solution.
Paper chromatography has many uses in forensic chemistry due to it’s simplicity and avail-
ability. However, paper chromatography is limited by the characteristics that only water
soluble components can be separated and inaccuracy in RF values. This makes paper chro-
matography mostly useful to distinguish the differences between two residues rather than
their similarities.
321
Paper chromatography
Figure 186 Paper chromatography separation in the visible spectrum.
322
97 Thin layer chromatography
In thin layer chromatography (TLC) a plastic or glass plate is coated with the stationary
phase, often alumina, silica, or alkylated silica. The analyte is dissolved in a quick-drying
solvent and spotted near the bottom of the plate. The edge of the plate beneath the spot or
spots is then dipped and left in a solution of the mobile phase, either an organic solvent or
aqueous solution (depending on the nature of the analyte and stationary phase). Capillary
action is then allowed to draw the solvent front through the spotted analyte, carrying
with it and in the process separating out the analyte’s components.
323
98 Gas chromatography
In gas chromatography (GC) the analyte and mobile phase must both be gases or be
readily introduced into the gas phase by heating. The mobile phase gas must be inert
and not reacting with the sample to be analysed. Examples of inert gases are helium and
nitrogen gas.
The gases are passed through a long, narrow (and most often, coiled) tube either packed
with a porous stationary phase or whose inner walls are coated with a stationary phase,
and the analyte components are detected as they emerge from the far end of the tube. The
tube is commonly known as GC column.
Often a time-varying temperature gradient, from lower temperature to higher temperature,
is applied to the tube. This first allows the analyte components to partition into the
stationary phase and then, as the temperature rises, to differentially force them back into
the mobile phase.
Common detectors for gas chromatography are flame ionization detector (FID), electron
capture detector (ECD) and mass spectrometry (MS). Different types of sample analysis
would require the use of a different type of detectors.
325
99 Column chromatography
Column chromatography , like gas chromatography, uses a tube packed with a stationary
phase, but the mobile phase is a liquid instead of a gas (It is sometimes known as liquid
chromatography or LC). Instead of temperature gradients, a gradient in the composition
of the liquid phase can be used to separate components.
Column chromatography can be performed on larger molecules which may not be readily
introduced into the gas phase. On the other hand, because of the increased viscosity of liq-
uids compared with gases, liquid chromatography can be a more ponderous process. HPLC
(variously high-pressure liquid chromatography or high-performance liquid chromatography
) speeds the process and improves its selectivity and sensitivity to a significant degree by
forcing the mobile phase through the chromatographic column with high-pressure pumps.
327
100 Detection methods
The root of the word chromatography , chroma (Greek khrōma, color ) and grafein is
”to write”, indicates that the separated components in some forms of the technique can
be identified by their color alone. But chromatography has now long been performed on
colorless compounds that can be identified in other ways.
Analyte components on thin-layer chromatography plates are often identified under ul-
traviolet light, or by chemical staining in, for example, an iodine chamber or potassium
permanganate. Gas chromatographic analytes are detected by changes in the ionization
levels of a flame at the output end of the column or by changes in the electrical conduc-
tivity of the gas mixture at the end of the column. Liquid chromatography fractions are
often analyzed through spectrophotometric techniques, notably UV-visible spectroscopy.
When separation with GC or LC is performed in tandem with mass spectrometry (the
”hyphenated” techniques of GC-MS and LC-MS), masses of individual fractions are rapidly
determined. These methods are frequently employed in analytical and forensic science.
329
101 Spectroscopy
There are several spectroscopic techniques which can be used to identify organic molecules:
infrared (IR), mass spectroscopy (MS) UV/visible spectroscopy (UV/Vis) and nuclear mag-
netic resonance (NMR).
IR, NMR and UV/vis spectroscopy are based on observing the frequencies of electromagnetic
radiation absorbed and emitted by molecules. MS is based on measuring the mass of the
molecule and any fragments of the molecule which may be produced in the MS instrument.
101.1 UV/Visible Spectroscopy
UV/Vis Spectroscopy uses ultraviolet and/or visible light to examine the electronic prop-
erties of molecules. Irradiating a molecule with UV or Visible light of a specific wavelength
can cause the electrons in a molecule to transition to an excited state. This technique is
most useful for analyzing molecules with conjugated systems or carbonyl bonds.
101.2 NMR Spectroscopy
Nuclear Magnetic Resonance (NMR) Spectroscopy is one of the most useful analytical
techniques for determining the structure of an organic compound. There are two main
types of NMR, 1 H-NMR (Proton NMR) and 13 C-NMR (Carbon NMR). NMR is based on
the fact that the nuclei of atoms have a quantized property called spin. When a magnetic
field is applied to a 1 H or 13 C nucleus, the nucleus can align either with (spin +1/2) or
against (spin -1/2) the applied magnetic field.
These two states have different potential energies and the energy difference depends on the
strength of the magnetic field. The strength of the magnetic field about a nucleus, however,
depends on the chemical environment around the nucleus. For example, the negatively
charged electrons around and near the nucleus can shield the nucleus from the magnetic
field, lowering the strength of the effective magnetic field felt by the nucleus. This, in turn,
will lower the energy needed to transition between the +1/2 and -1/2 states. Therefore,
the transition energy will be lower for nuclei attached to electron donating groups (such
as alkyl groups) and higher for nuclei attached to electron withdrawing groups (such as a
hydroxyl group).
In an NMR machine, the compound being analyzed is placed in a strong magnetic field
and irradiated with radio waves to cause all the 1 H and 13 C nuclei to occupy the higher
energy -1/2 state. As the nuclei relax back to the +1/2 state, they release radio waves
corresponding to the energy of the difference between the two spin states. The radio waves
331
Spectroscopy
are recorded and analyzed by computer to give an intensity versus frequency plot of the
sample. This information can then be used to determine the structure of the compound.
Aromatics in H-NMR Electron Donating Groups vs. Electron Withdrawing
Groups
On monosubstituted rings, electron donating groups resonate at high chemical shifts. Elec-
tron donating groups increase the electron density by releasing electrons into a reaction
center, thus stabilizing the carbocation. An example of an electron donating group is
methyl (-CH3).
Accordingly, electron withdrawing groups are represented at low chemical shifts. Electron
withdrawing groups pull electrons away from a reacting center. This can stabilize an electron
rich carbanion. Some examples of electron withdrawing groups are halogens (-Cl, -F) and
carboxylic acid (-COOH).
Looking at the H NMR spectrum of ethyl benzene, we see that the methyl group is the
most electron withdrawing, so it appears at the lowest chemical shift. The aromatic phenyl
group is the most electron donating, so it has the highest chemical shift.
Figure 187
332
NMR Spectroscopy
Figure 188
Disubstituted Rings
The sum of integrated intensity values for the entire aromatic region shows how many
substituents are attached to the ring, so a total value of 4 indicates that the ring has 2
substituents. When a benzene ring has two substituent groups, each exerts an influence
on following substitution reactions. The site at which a new substituent is introduced
depends on the orientation of the existing groups and their individual directing effects. For
a disubstituted benzene ring, there are three possible NMR patterns.
333
Spectroscopy
Figure 189
Note that para-substituted rings usually show two symmetric sets of peaks that look like
doublets.
The order of these peaks is dependent on the nature of the two substituents. For example,
the three NMR spectra of chloronitrobenzene isomers are below:
Figure 190
334
NMR Spectroscopy
Figure 191
Figure 192
335
102 Mass Spectroscopy
A mass spectroscope measures the exact mass of ions, relative to the charge. Many times,
some form of seperation is done beforehand, enabling a spectrum to be collected on a
relatively pure sample. An organic sample can be introduced into a mass spectroscope and
ionised. This also breaks some molecules into smaller fragments.
The resulting mass spectrum shows:
1) The heaviest ion is simply the ionised molecule itself. We can simply record its mass.
2) Other ions are fragments of the molecule and give information about its structure. Com-
mon fragments are:
species formula mass

methyl CH3 + 15
ethyl C2 H5 + 29
phenyl C6 H5 + 77
337
103 Infrared spectroscopy.
Absorbing infrared radiation makes covalent bonds vibrate. Different types of bond absorb
different wavelengths of infrared:
Instead of wavelength, infrared spectroscopists record the wavenumber; the number of waves
that fit into 1 cm. (This is easily converted to the energy of the wave.)
For some reason the spectra are recorded backwards (from 4000 to 500 cm-1 is typical),
often with a different scale below 1000 cm-1 (to see the fingerprint region more clearly) and
upside-down (% radiation transmitted is recorded instead of the absorbance of radiation).
The wavenumbers of the absorbed IR radiation are characteristic of many bonds, so IR spec-
troscopy can determine which functional groups are contained in the sample. For example,
the carbonyl (C=O) bond will absorb at 1650-1760cm-1 .
103.1 Summary of absorptions of bonds in organic

molecules
w:Infrared Spectroscopy Correlation Table1
Bond Minimum wavenum- Maximum Functional group

ber (cm-1 ) wavenumber (cm-1 ) (and other notes)
C-O 1000 1300 Alcohols and esters
N-H 1580 1650 Amine or amide
1610 1680 Alkenes
1650 1760 Aldehydes, ketones,
acids, esters, amides
O-H 2500 3300 Carboxylic acids (very
broad band)
C-H 2850 3000 Alkane
C-H 3050 3150 Alkene (Compare in-
tensity to alkane for
rough idea of relative
number of H atoms in-
volved.)
O-H 3230 3550 H-bonded in alcohols
N-H 3300 3500 Amine or amide
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Infrared%20Spectroscopy%20Correlation%20Table
339
Infrared spectroscopy.
O-H 3580 3670 Free –OH in alcohols

(only in samples di-
luted with non-polar
solvent)
Absorptions listed in cm-1 .
Figure 193 frame
103.2 Typical method

2
Figure 194 Typical apparatus
A beam of infra-red light is produced and split into two separate beams. One is passed
through the sample, the other passed through a reference which is often the substance the
sample is dissolved in. The beams are both reflected back towards a detector, however first
they pass through a splitter which quickly alternates which of the two beams enters the
detector. The two signals are then compared and a printout is obtained.
2 Wikipedia article. ˆ{https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Infrared_spectroscopy}
340
Typical method
A reference is used for two reasons:

• This prevents fluctuations in the output of the source affecting the data
• This allows the effects of the solvent to be cancelled out (the reference is usually a pure
form of the solvent the sample is in).
341
104 References & notes
<References/>
SDBS1 is a free online database of Spectral analysis including many IR, NMR and MS
graphs.
----
1 http://www.aist.go.jp/RIODB/SDBS/cgi-bin/cre_index.cgi
343
105 Unit 15: Organometallics
Organometallics is the branch of chemical science studying the chemistry of molecules that
have direct carbon-metal bonds.
UNKNOWN TEMPLATE stage
25%Dec 30, 2005
Figure 195 s ,d, p blocks
105.1 Main group organometallic chemistry
105.1.1 Alkali and akaline earths organometallic
• Li, Na, K organyls

• Be organyls
• Mg organyls
105.1.2 Aluminium group
105.1.3 Silicon group
• Si organyls
• Ga organyls
345
Unit 15: Organometallics
105.1.4 Pb, Sb, Sn, Hg
105.2 Transition-metal organometallic chemistry
The organometallic chemistry of the transition elements is quite different from the main-
group ones due to the availability for bonding of the n d orbitals with consequent ability
for the central atom to change geometry and expand the octet.
Crystal field theory1
105.2.1 Single σ-bonding
1. M-alkyl
β-elimination
105.2.2 π-acceptor bonding
alkene complexes
Figure 196
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Crystal%20field%20theory
346
Transition-metal organometallic chemistry
Figure 197
CO complexes
1. σ *→dσ
2. dπ →π *
These interactions are synergicin increading the M-CO bond strength. In fact, the second
interaction, as known as pi backbonding increases the available electron density on the CO.
The partial filling of the π* orbital leads to a weakened C-O triple bond, as showed from
the stretching frequencies (in cm-1 ) of CO free and in M/CO complexes.
free CO 2143
V(CO)6 1976
Ni(CO)4 2057
Cr(CO)6 2000
Arene complexes
Carbenes and carbynes compounds
Fischer carbenes
By treatment of a CO complex with a strong nucleophile
Figure 198
347
Schrock carbenes
Figure 199
105.3 Catalysis by organometallic compounds
105.3.1 Metathesis
Richard Schrock2 (MIT, USA) and Robert Grubbs3 (CalTech, USA) received 2005 Nobel
prize for their work on the subject. Metathesis is the exchange of the termination between
two alkenes [Grubbs05]
Figure 200
It occurs via the carbene species nowaday known as Schrock’s carbenes
Figure 201
1. [Grubbs05] Grubbs, Olefin metathesis, Tetrahedron
2 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Richard_Schrock
3 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Robert_H._Grubbs
348
Catalysis by organometallic compounds
105.3.2 Ziegler-Natta polymerisation
Ziegler-Natta catalyst4 Ziegler in the 40’s worked on the oligomerisation of ethylene by

aluminium alkyls via the reaction HAl-R + CH2 =CH2 -> HAl-CH2 CH2 -R
Figure 202
105.3.3 Enantioselective hydrogenation
Wilkinson’s
Figure 203
105.3.4 Hydroformylation
Hydroformylation5 Hydroformylation is the process that transforms an alkene into an alde-

hyde by reaction with CO.
The catalyst is a hydridocarbonyl complex, HCO(CO)5
Figure 204
105.3.5 Fischer-Tropsch synthesis
Fischer-Tropsch synthesis is the heterogeneously-catalysed formation of hydrocarbons (alka-

nes and alkenes) from CO and hydrogen (synthesis gas). It can be seen as the inverse of
synthesis gas6 preparation (although this is usually from methane and lighter hydrocarbons).
It is the heart of the gas-to-liquids processes developed commercially by big petrochemical
firms in the 90’s.
4 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Zieglar-Natta_catalyst
5 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hydroformylation
6 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Synthesis%20gas
349
105.4 Organometallics in living systems
The only example of a biological molecule containing direct carbon-metal bonds is cobalamin
, as known as vitamin B12
Figure 205 Vitamin B12
----
350
106 Appendix A: Introduction to
reactions
351
107 How to write organic reactions
107.0.1 Writing General Chemistry Reactions
In organic chemistry, a reaction may be written precisely as it is for general chemistry if

only a basic amount of information is needed. For example, when a haloalkane is turned
into an alkene, the reaction may be written:
CH3 CH2 CH2 Br + H2 SO4 + H2 O --> CH3 CHCH2 + HBr + H2 SO4 + H2 O
Unfortunately, this method of notation does not tell anyone very much about the reaction,
and it takes expertise to know exactly what is going on. A new student to organic chemistry
probably would not notice that the product molecule contains one site of unsaturation due
to a double bond between carbon atoms number one and number two. Because it is so
general, this notation is good for general chemistry, but organic chemistry requires more
precision.
For most students, common practices in writing organic reactions will be different than used
in general chemistry.
107.0.2 Differences in Organic Chemistry Notation
Organic chemistry reactions are often not written as balanced equations. This is because
many organic chemists - who are just as lazy as anyone else - tend to be more interested
in the organic product of a reaction than in anything else going on in the reaction. Side
products are often ignored, and just as often catalysts and solution notation may be highly
abbreviated or left out altogether. As you gain familiarity with organic chemistry you will
come to understand just what may be abbreviated or left out, but in the beginning this can
be a source of frustration.
Another difference is that modified Lewis drawings of molecules are often used instead of
molecular formulas. This makes sense due to the fact that organic molecules are often rather
large in size and complicated in structure, so that they can be more easily understood in the
form of a drawing as opposed to a word-formula. A two-dimensional drawing reveals some
of the three-dimensional shape of the molecule, but when necessary even three-dimensional
drawings are used to depict reactants and products.
353
How to write organic reactions
Figure 206 This image depicts the complicated interconnectivity and structure of an
imaginary organic molecule
Working with the above drawing of a molecule may be difficult, but it is still far easier than
using its name, or attempting to guess at the structure and functionality of a molecule using
just its chemical formula of C29 H31 COOH .
107.0.3 Examples of Organic Chemistry Notation
Typically organic chemistry molecules are drawn as modified Lewis structures. If you re-
member, a Lewis structure uses lines to connect chemical symbols together, illustrating a
covalent bond, and also uses dots to represent non-bond electrons. This is shown in the
diagram below of carbon dioxide. The drawing illustrates the four electrons of carbon par-
ticipating in two double bonds with two oxygen atoms, and also the non-bonding electron
pairs for each atom of oxygen.
354
Organometallics in living systems
Figure 207 Lewis Diagram of Carbon Dioxide, Illustrating Double Bonds and Free
Electrons
In organic chemistry, there are a lot of carbons in every molecule, generally, so organic
chemists by convention do not draw every single carbon in every molecule. The same is true
of hydrogens attached to the carbons; it is twice the annoyance to draw thirty hydrogens in
a fatty acid than it is to draw the fifteen carbons. Therefore, in organic chemistry, carbon
atoms are assumed to be wherever a line or line segment begins or ends. Furthermore,
enough hydrogen atoms are assumed to be attached to any carbon not marked with a + or
- sign (indicating an ionic charge) to bring that carbon’s total number of bonds to four. At
first this notation may be confusing, but the shorthand method rapidly proves its worth.
Figure 208 Some common organic chemistry compounds and reagents, and their
drawings
355
108 Overview of addition, elimination,
substitution and rearrangement
reactions
The real heart of organic chemistry is the reactions. Everything that you study is geared
to prepare you for organic syntheses and other chemical transformations performed in the
lab. This chapter gives you the basic tools to begin looking at these reactions.
108.1 Some basic reaction types
One way to organize organic reactions places them into a few basic categories:
• addition reactions
• elimination reactions
• substitution reactions
• rearrangement reactions
Other categories include:
• Oxidations
• Reductions
• Alkylations
Sometimes one reaction can fall into more than one category. These classifications are just
a tool and are not rigid.
108.2 Addition reaction
Something is added to something else to produce a third thing.

A+B→C
Note: the letters A, B and C here represent any atomic, ionic or molecular species which
can undergo this type of reaction.
108.3 Elimination reaction
Something comes off of a molecule, resulting in two products.

A→B+C
357
Overview of addition, elimination, substitution and rearrangement reactions
108.4 Substitution reactions
This involves the exchange of one group for another.

AB + CD → AC + BD
Common reaction types include
• radical reactions and
• nucleophilic substitutions
• SN 1, Unimolecular nucleophilic substitution
• SN 2, Bimolecular nucleophilic substitution
108.5 Rearrangement reactions
A molecule shifts or otherwise rearranges to form a different molecule.

A→B
This typically happens when one molecule changes into an isomer of itself.
358
109 Polar and radical reactions
109.0.1 Homolytic vs heterolytic cleavage
Two bonded atoms can come apart from each other in one of two ways. Either
1. each atom gets away with half of the shared electrons, or
2. one of the atoms leaves with more of the shared electrons than the other.
In homolytic cleavage , each atom leaves with one-half of the shared electrons (one
electron for a single bond, or two for double bonds).
A—B --> A* + B*
A* and B* represent uncharged radicals. The ”*” represents an unbonded, unpaired valence electron.
In heterolytic cleavage , one atom leaves with all of the previously shared electrons and
the other atom gets none of them.
A—B --> A- + B+
same indicates that each atom leaves with the same number of electrons from the bond.
different , refers to the fact that the atoms each end up with a different number of electrons.
109.1 Polar reactions
Polar reactions occur when two bonded atoms come apart, one taking more of the shared
electrons than the other. They involve heterolytic cleavage . The result is two charged
species—one cation and one anion.
109.2 Radical reactions
Radical reactions don’t deal with charged particles but with radicals. Radicals are
uncharged atoms or molecules with an incomplete octet of valence electrons.
When a molecule comes apart by homolytic cleavage the result is two radicals. Although
uncharged, radicals are usually very reactive because the unfilled octet is unstable and the
radical can lower its energy by forming a bond in a way that allows it to fill its valence shell
while avoiding any electrostatic charge..
359
110 Redox reactions
110.0.1 Oxidation and reduction
Two important types of reactions in organic chemistry are oxidation and reduction .
In oxidation reactions, the oxidized species loses electron density.
In reduction reactions, the reduced species gains electron density.
Of course, these two actions happen in unison as one species is reduced and the other is
oxidized. The term redox was coined from the fragments red (reduction) and ox (oxidation).
110.0.2 Oxidation
Oxidation was first observed when oxygen drew electrons off of metals, which were then
referred to as ”oxidized”. (Oxygen is more elecronegative than most other elements.) The
term was then applied later to the part of any reaction where electrons are drawn off.
Other elements that commonly oxidize in organic reactions include halogens like chlorine
and bromine.
110.0.3 Reduction
Reduction of a chemical species results in the gain of electrons for that species. This
does not necessarily include any change in charge; any time an atom increases its electron
density even a little bit it is said to be reduced. For example, if an oxygen is removed from
a carbon and replaced by a hydrogen (assume the oxygen is also bonded to another atom),
the formal charge of the carbon does not change. However, the carbon ”sees” a greater share
of the electrons from the single bond to hydrogen than it did for the single bond to oxygen.
That is because hydrogen is less electronegative than oxygen and gives up its electrons a
bit more easily than oxygen does. So a carbon bonded to hydrogen can take up more of its
electron density than the same carbon bonded to oxygen.
361
111 Functional groups in reactions
Functional groups 1 in reactions make your life easier as an organic chemist because they
draw your attention right to where the action is. Any time a reaction is going to occur, you
can be almost certain that it is going to take place at a functional group.
There are many functional groups of interest to organic chemists. Here are a few:
1. Halides
These groups are all made up of a single atom in Group 17 of the Periodic Table, which
is known as the halogen group, bonded to a carbon atom. They include fluorine, chlorine,
bromine, and iodine. Astatine is also a halogen, but it is rarely discussed because it is
not readily found in nature and is radioactive. Their electronegativities vary from fluorine
with 4.0 to iodine with 2.5, which is approximately the same value that carbon has. Each
of these atoms are able to form a single bond with a carbon atom, replacing hydrogen in
alkanes and adding across multiple bonds in alkenes and alkyne. Of the four, fluorine is the
most reactive and iodine is the least. Because of their intermediate reactivity, chlorine and
bromine are often more useful in many reactions.
2. Carbonyl
This group consists of an oxygen atom doubly bonded to a carbon atom. Carbonyl groups
are important because the oxygen atom, with an electronegativity of 3.5, shifts electron
density away from the rest of the molecule and towards itself. Carbonyls are a key ingredient
in aldehydes, ketones, carboxylic acids, esters, and amides.
3. Hydroxyl
This group consists of a hydrogen atom singly bonded to an oxygen atom. The electroneg-
ativity difference between hydrogen, which has an electronegatity of 2.1, and oxygen, 3.5,
pulls electrons away from the hydrogen and makes it somewhat acidic. This acidic character
varies depending on the composition of the rest of the molecule. Hydroxyl groups are found
in alcohols, phenols, enols, and carboxylic acids.
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic_Chemistry%2FIntroduction_to_functional_groups
363
112 Drawing reactions
112.1 Drawing reactions
There are various techniques you will run across for notation of organic reactions.
112.2 Arrows
Curved arrows are used to show movement of electrons . They are not used to show
where atoms, ions, or molecules move, just electrons. A curved arrow with two ”hooks”
on the end indicated movement of a pair of electrons. A curved arrow with one ”hook”
indicated movement of one electron.
365
Drawing reactions
Figure 209 Two ”hooks” represents movement of two electrons.
Figure 210 One ”hook” represents movement of one electron.
Double-headed arrows are used to represent equivalence between resonance structures.
Figure 211
Two-way double half arrows are represent a reaction that can go forward or reverse. If
one of the half arrows is longer than the other it means that the reaction pathway favors
that direction with the longer arrow.
366
Arrows
Figure 212
367
113 Rates and equilibria
Chemical equilibria are ratios relating the forward and backward direction of a reaction
to each other. This ratio is represented by the letter K in the following equation:
K = products / reactants
113.1 Rate of reaction
113.1.1 Definitions
Rate of reaction is the speed at which a chemical reaction takes place, expressed as moles
per unit time and unit volume. The rate r of a general reaction aA+bB +...− > pP +qQ+...
is defined by:
r = − a1 dC
dt = − b dt = ... =
A 1 dCB 1 dCP
p dt = ....
from the expression above, it is clear that the usual convention is that reaction rate is taken
as products formation rate.
Rate is a function of the concentration of reactants and products, temperature, pressure
and presence of a catalyst.
113.1.2 Rate expression
A common expression for reaction rate is the power law :

α C β ....
r = kCA B
k is called the kinetic constant , and α , β , etc. are called the reaction order with respect
to the reactant A, B (or the partial order of A, B etc.), respectively. The sum of all the
orders is the global order of the rate expression. Therefore the rate expression r = kCA CB
is a second-order and first-order in A and B.
The reaction orders are the same as the stoichiometric coefficient in the case of an elementary
reaction only ; in most cases they must be determined experimentally and are valid in the
window of experimental conditions.
Elementary data on reaction orders can be obtained by changing the concentration C of one
of the reactant, say A, and measuring the initial rate r. Plotting a rate vs concentration
log-log graph, one obtains a straight line whose slope is the partial order in—say—A by
α = log k + α log C
virtue of the relation log r = log kCA A
369
Rates and equilibria
Figure 213
Influence of temperature and pressure
k = k0 exp (−∆ G∗ /RT )

as known as the Arrhenius1 equation
113.1.3 Rate equations and reaction mechanisms
The most important research application of kinetic investigations is the determination of

reaction mechanisms. In fact, the rate expression is function of it.
From a postulated reaction mechanism (the model ), a rate equation can be derived and
used to analyse the experimental data. If the obtained fit is not statistically significant,
the scheme is rejected. In complex systems, several schemes can produce compatible rate
expressions and the problem of model discrimination is of primary importance.
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Svante_Arrhenius
370
Equilibrium
Limiting step
Often a reaction has two or more steps. One of the steps, usually the last one, is the slowest
step, and is said to be rate-limiting .
Steady state approximation
Sometimes it is useful, when calculating the reaction rate, to assume that no particular step
is rate-limiting. Instead, the reaction intermediate can either proceed to the product or
return to the original reactant with an equal rate for either possibility. This is called the
steady-state approximation .
113.1.4 Example
A classical example is the hydrolysis of haloalkanes:

R-X + H2 O → ROH + HX
This reaction can occur by two mechanisms: the SN 1 and SN . The former is a unimolecular
substitution: its rate is determined only by the concentration of R-X, without regard to
the concentration of the new substituent. The latter is bimolecular: its rate is first-order in
both R-X and new substituent, for a combined rate order of 2.
113.2 Equilibrium
Chemical equilibrium is the state when a net reaction is neither going forward nor
backward. It is a dynamic equilibrium. The rate of the forward reaction equals the rate of
the reverse reaction, so the two cancel each other out, and the net rate of change is zero.
The chemical equilibrium is dictated by the equilibrium constant (often written Keq ),
expressed by the mass-action law :
∏
C
Keq = ∏ i∈products C
i
j∈reactants j
The concentration C can be expressed in any scale, e.g. molar franction, molarity, partial
pressure.
If the temperature and pressure are kept constant, no matter what are the initial concentra-
tions, the system will evolve until the mass-action product is equal to the Keq . In general,
systems with Keq ≪ 1 are highly displaced to the reactant sides (almost no conversion at
equilibrium), whereas when Keq ≫ 1 the reaction goes to completion.
From classical thermodynamics it can be showed that the following relation holds:
Keq = exp (−∆ GR /RT )
where ∆ GR is the total change in Gibbs free energy with reaction (product minus reactants).
371
Rates and equilibria
113.2.1 Influence of temperature
The influence of temperature can be obtained by differentiation of the equation above to

lead:
−lnKeq = ∆ HR
RT − ∆ RSR
as known as the van’t Hoff2 equation . Therefore, for exothermic reaction (∆ Hr < 0) an
increase in temperature will decrease the ∆ HR /RT quantity, leading to a lower Keq ,
conversely for an endothermic reaction.
2 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Jacobus_van%27t_Hoff
372
114 Gibbs free energy
Gibbs free energy is represented by the following equation:

∆G = ∆H -T∆S
∆G is the change in Gibbs free energy.
∆H is the change in potential energy, sometimes known as the enthalpy of a system.
T is the temperature in Kelvin.
∆S is a statistical correlation, known as the entropy of a system.
The basic principle is that total entropy increases. This increase can be because of an
increase in the entropy of the chemicals, ∆S , or because the reaction has produced heat,
increasing the entropy of the environment.
The Gibbs free energy lets us calculate the total increase in entropy, including the effects
on the environment, without needing to know anything about the environment.
At low temperatures, ∆G is approximately ∆H , and nature favours the reaction with lowest
energy products, which release the most heat. This may reduce the entropy of the system ,
but the increase in the entropy of the environment more than compensates.
At high temperatures, ∆G is approximately -T∆S , and nature favours the reaction with
high energy products, which may actually absorb heat. This may reduce the entropy of the
environment , but the increase in the entropy of the system more than compensates.
Either way, the Gibbs free energy always decreases.
373
115 Bond dissociation energy
Bond dissociation energyis the energy needed to break a chemical bond. Also known as
the Bond Enthalpy.
The bond dissociation energy, or bond enthalpy, for a diatomic molecule X-Y is defined as
the energy required to break one mole of X-Y bonds, as illustrated in the following process...
X-Y(g) → X(g) + Y(g)
Bond enthalpies always refer to breaking bonds under gaseous conditions.
The mean molar bond enthalpy is an average value that is quoted for a bond that can occur
in different molecular environments. An example is methane, CH4
CH4 (g) → C(g) + 4H(g)
Bond enthalpy values are used in Hess’s Law Calculations.
The standard enthalpy of a reaction can be found by considering the bond enthalpies of the
products and reactants of the reaction -
Standard Enthalpy = Σ Enthalpy of formation of the products - Σ Enthalpy of formation
of reactants
For stronger bonds, bond dissociation energy is higher as more energy is needed to break
the bond.
A carbon-carbon double bond is stronger than a single bond and requires more energy to
be broken. However, a carbon-carbon double bond is not twice as strong as a single one, it
is only 1.5 times stronger.
All chemical bonds need an input of energy to be broken, as bonds allow a lower energy
state for the component atoms. If a bond did not offer a lower energy state for the atoms
that form it, a bond would not form.
375
116 Energy diagrams
Energy diagrams are used to show the favorability of a reaction. They show how energy
gained or lost in the different stages of a reaction and show which stages are the slow and
fast steps (slow steps have high potential energy). We can also compare the energies of one
reaction to another in order to see which reaction will be favored.
Figure 214
Transition states1 are high peaks in an energy diagram.

If the end of the diagram is lower than the beginning, the product of the reaction is more
stable and/or lower in energy than the starting materials, and the overall reaction is ener-
getically favorable. If the tail end of the energy diagram is higher than the front, then the
product is less stable or energetically favorable than the starting materials, and the overall
reaction is energetically unfavorable. Any high peaks in the diagram indicate difficult points
to pass and will slow down the reaction.
377
117 Transition states
117.1 Transition State
Many reactions occur in a single step when two reactant molecules collide with sufficient
energy in the proper spatial orientation to create a product. Many other reactions, however,
do not occur in a single step, and such reactions are said to have transition states. Multistep
reactions have products that result from a series or chain of reactions, and these reactions
are the kind that actually do pass through a transition state.
117.2 Intermediate Molecules
Multi-step reactions have an intermediate molecule that forms as a sort-of halfway point
between the reactant and the product. This intermediate molecule cannot be isolated in
solution, because it is typically of much higher energy than either the reactants or the
products.
At a basic level of organic chemistry the intermediate molecule is often merely predicted
or assumed, but many are also known to exist due to experimental observations in the
laboratory. Inversions and other changes in molecular configuration without another, more
plausible explanation are one type of proof that certain reactions pass through a transition
state.
EXAMPLE : As an example of a molecular inversion, in a 1st order nucleophilic substi-
tution (SN 1 reaction) the chirality of a carbon can be ”flipped” from S to R configuration
(or vice versa) 50% of the time. This is due to the chiral carbon having only sp3 hy-
bridization of its electrons in the intermediate state, which creates a carbon center that
is flat and thus subject to nucleophilic attack from either the top or the bottom. If
inversion occurs then it is considered to be proof that the reaction indeed is SN 1 and
therefore has an intermediate molecule in its transition state.
NOTE: THIS PARAGRAPH CONTAINS SEVERAL ERRORS AND NEEDS TO BE
CORRECTED.
117.3 Energy Diagrams and Transition States
Observing energy diagrams of reactions, you may notice that instead of a single peak en-
ergy, the energy peaks, drops a little, peaks once again and then returns to a lower energy
state than the original molecule. The ”saddle” between the two peaks represents an inter-
mediate - a place where the reaction temporarily ”rests” between energy peaks. The energy
379
Transition states
peaks are defined as ’transition states’ with no finite existence. Reaction intermediates
will often have a finite existence. NOTE: THE DIAGRAM INCORRECTLY IDENTIFIES
AN INTERMEDIATE AS A TRANSITION STATE. IN FACT, THE ENERGY PEAKS
ARE TRANSITION STATES BETWEEN THE INTERMEDIATE AND EITHER THE
STARTING MATERIAL OR THE PRODUCT.
Figure 215 Energy diagram for the transition state of a reaction
380
118 Carbocations
Carbocations are carbon atoms in an organic molecule bearing a positive formal charge.
Therefore they are carbo n cations . Carbocations have only six electrons in their valence
shell making them electron deficient. Thus, they are unstable electrophiles and will react
very quickly with nucleophiles to form new bonds. Because of their reactivity with het-
eroatoms, carbocations are very useful intermediates in many common organic reactions.
118.1 Carbocation Structure
The orbitals of carbocations are generally sp2 hybridized so that the three full orbitals are
arranged in a trigonal planar geometry about the carbon nucleus. The remaining p orbital
is empty and will readily accept a pair of electrons from another atom. Because of the
symmetry of this geometric arrangement, nucleophilic attack is equally favorable above or
below the plane formed by the full orbitals.
118.2 Carbocation Stability
Carbocations are generally unstable and fairly hard to form. They usually cannot be isolated
from a reaction as they will react immediately to fill their empty p orbital. Because they
are electron deficient, attaching electron donating groups (such as alkyl groups) to the
carbocation will help stabilize the carbocation. In general:
Stability of Alkyl CarbocationsCH3 + < RCH2 + < R2 CH+ < R3 C+
Clearly, the tertiary carbocation is the most stable, as it is surrounded by three other
carbon atoms that share the burden of its positive charge. Primary and especially methyl
carbocations are rarely seen in organic reactions except under special circumstances like in
the case of benzylic or allylic cations.
Carbocations can also be stabilized through resonance by neighboring lone pairs or pi-
electrons. In general, this stabilization is greater than one degree of substitution, so a
secondary carbocation stabilized by resonance will be more stable than a tertiary carboca-
tion with no resonance stabilization, and a primary carbocation stabilized by resonance will
be more stable than a secondary carbocation with no resonance stabilization.
381
Carbocations
118.3 Formation of Carbocations
Carbocation intermediates are formed in three main types of reactions: additions to pi

bonds, unimolecular eliminations, and unimolecular nucleophilic substitution. On a bridge
head a positive carbon is rare. The 3-cyclopropyl carbocation is the most stable carbocation.
118.4 Reactions of Carbocations
In general, carbocations will undergo three basic types of reactions:
118.4.1 1. Nucleophile Capture
Carbocations will react with even mild nucleophiles (such as water) to form a new bond.and
formation of carbon free radical
118.4.2 2. Elimination to form a pi bond
Carbons alpha to the carbocation will often lose a proton to form a double (or, in some
cases) triple bond from the carbocation. Such a reaction requires only a mild base (e.g.
chloride) to remove the proton.
118.4.3 3. Rearrangement
A secondary carbocation may rearrange to form a tertiary carbocation before the ion is
stabilized using one of the above-mentioned reactions. Since a cation constitutes a deficiency
of electrons, the empty orbitals do not move; rather, a hydrogen atom bonded to a nearby
carbon is moved to stabilize the secondary carbocation, of the hydrogen atom creates a
new tertiary carbocation, which is more stable and will be substituted to lead to the final
product. See w:carbocation rearrangement1 .
1 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/carbocation%20rearrangement
382
119 Electrophilic additions
Electrophilic additions are also referred to as addition reactions .
An additionCH2 =CH2 + HX → CH3 -CH2 X
Its reverse, an eliminationCH3 -CH2 X + base, ∆ → CH2 =CH2
Electrophilic additions are essentially the reverse of an E1 elimination reaction1 , sometimes

exactly the microscopic reverse .
Microscopic reverseThis means that the mechanism of the reaction follows each and every step of
the related reaction in reverse order, without deviation.Sometimes, a reaction can be reversed but
using a different series of tiny steps. When that happens, it is NOT called a microscopic reverse.
Addition reactions involve carbocations2 . This intermediate carbocation can rearrange.

Addition reactions follow Markovnikov’s rule3 . (The higher priority substituent adds to the
more highly substituted carbon of the carbon-carbon double bond).
(Series of sample reactions here)

383
120 Zaitsev’s rule
Zaitsev’s (sometimes spelled ”Saytzeff”) rule: In elimination reactions1 , the major reaction
product is the most substituted alkene. The most substituted alkene is also the most stable.
385
121 Oxidation
Hydroboration/oxidation is a two-step reaction that converts alkenes into alcohols with

anti-Markovnikov regiochemistry.
First, borane, BH3 is allowed to react with the alkene. The boron atom will generally react
with the less substituted carbon, and it will also donate a proton to the other carbon across
the double bond. If there is an excess of the alkene, a trialkylborane will be formed. That
is, one molecule of borane can react with up to three molecules of the alkane if necessary.
Tetrahydrofuran, a cyclic ether, is usually used as a solvent for this first step in the reaction
because it can form a complex with the borane that gives the boron atom a complete
octet (boron only has 6 valence electrons when it is in pure borane, which makes it highly
unstable.)
Now, we have a trialkylborane, which may be fine if that is what one is trying to synthesize,
but most chemists are more interested in converting this borane intermediate into 3 alcohol
molecules. The way this is done is to react the trialkylborane with hydrogen peroxide in
a basic, aqueous solution. This causes the borane intermediate to be converted into three
molecules of an alcohol. B(OH)3 is also produced, but is probably ignored by most chemists.
387
122 Radicals
122.1 Radical stability
Radicals listed from less to more stableF◦ < Cl◦ < Br◦ < I◦ F◦ is totally unstable while
I◦ is generally unreactive.
Alkyl groups vary in stability. CH3 ◦ is quite reactive as it violates the octet rule. However,
CH3 + is also a charged moiety and is therefore even less stable and harder to form.
Alkyl groups listed from less to more stableCH3 ◦ < 1◦ < 2◦ < 3◦ Clearly, the tertiary carbocation is
the most stable, as it is surrounded by three other carbon atoms that share the burden of its posi-
tive charge.
(Multiple images follow)
389
123 Rearrangement reactions
123.1 Sigmatropic arrangements
123.1.1 Diallylic rearrangement
This rearrangement is typical of diallylic systems
391
124 Pericyclic reactions
Pericyclic reactions are one of the three major classes of organic reactions, along with
polar/ionic reactions and radical reactions. Pericyclic reactions have been understood only
relatively recently compared to the other classes.
In a polar/ionic reaction, one reactant (the nucleophile) donates two electrons to another
(the electrophile) to form a bond. In a radical reaction, each reactant donates one electron.
In a pericyclic reaction, only the π bond electrons are involved, and all bonds are changed
in a single cyclic step without any intermediates being formed.
Figure 216
Using the Diels-Alder reaction1 as an example, pushing arrows are used to show electron
flow, but they are drawn in a circle, and the direction of the arrows can arbitrarily be shown
as clockwise or anticlockwise. All the bonds are made and broken in a single step. This is
called a concerted reaction.
The types of pericyclic reactions are:
• Cycloadditions (including the Diels-Alder reaction)
• Electrocyclic reactions
• Sigmatropic rearrangements
393
125 Diels-Alder reaction
The Diels-Alder reaction, named after the German chemists who developed it, is a method
for producing simple ring compounds.
Figure 217 A diene adds to a dienophile in a simple Diels-Alder Reaction
Mechanism of a reaction between a diene and a dienophile

In the Diels-Alder reaction, a conjugated diene reacts with a dienophile. The dienophile is
named for its affinity to react with the diene.
Because dienes and dienophiles are often gases, this reaction usually takes place in a sealed
container at elevated pressure and temperature. The temperature required by this reaction
can be reduced by the presence of electron-witdrawing groups attached to the dienophile.
In some cases, such as furan and maleic anhydride, or cyclopentadiene and acrolein, the
reaction will take place at room temperature in an ethoxyethane solution.
The reaction shown above is highly unlikely due to the lack of substituents on the diene and
dienophile. The dienophile will usually have a carbonyl, nitro, or other electron-withdrawing
group attached. Any substituents attached to the diene or dienophile will end up in the
final product.
Figure 218 A substituated dienophile reacts to form a product with the same
substituents.
395
Diels-Alder reaction
Notice that the product retains the same basic cyclohexene structure. The substituents
simply extend from the ring.
Alkynes can also react as dienophiles.
Diels-Alder reactions can sometimes reverse themselves through Retro-Diels-Alder reactions.
For example, dicyclopentadiene can be cracked to form 1,3-cyclopentadiene by thermal
dissociation. Retro reactions occur under situations where the fragments are stable by
themselves.
396
126 Epoxide
While adding oxygen in soy bean oil to make epoxy plasticiser, oxirane content does not
increase more than 6.5. How we can produce more oxirane content product?
----
397
127 Appendix B: Index of reactions
Alkanes1
Combustion2
Free-radical halogenation3
Alkenes4
Hydrogenation5 adds H2
Hydrolysis6 adds H2 O
Oxymercuration/demercuration7
THF8
Halogenation9 adds halogen
Hydrohalogenation10 adds H and a halogen
Hydroboration11
Halohydrins12
Oxidation reactions13
2
2FCombustion
3
2FFree-radical%20halogenation
4
2FAlkenes
5
2FHydrogenation
6
2FHydrolysis
7
2FOxymercuration%2Fdemercuration
8
2FTHF
9
2FHalogenation
10
2FHydrohalogenation
11
2FHydroboration
12
2FHalohydrins
13
2FOxidation%20reactions
399
Appendix B: Index of reactions
Allylic bromination14
Diels-Alder reaction15
Alkynes16
Hydrogenation17 adds H
Hydration18 adds OH
Halogenation19 adds a halogen
Hydrohalogenation20 adds H and a halogen
Ozonolysis21
Alkylation22
Alcohols23 and haloalkanes24
Carbocation rearrangements25
Conjugated (1,3-) dienes26
Direct (1,2-) and conjugate (1,4-) addition27
Kinetic and thermodynamic control28
Aromatic compounds29
Hydrogenation30
14
2FAllylic%20bromination
17
2FAlkyne%20hydrogenation
18
2FAlkyne%20hydration
19
2FHalogenation
20
2FAlkyne%20hydrohalogenation
21
2FOzonolysis
22
2FAlkylation
25
2FCarbocation%20rearrangements
26
2FConjugated%20%281%2C3-%29%20dienes
27
2FDirect%20%281%2C2-%29%20and%20conjugate%20%281%2C4-%29%20addition
28
2FKinetic%20and%20thermodynamic%20control
30
2FHydrogenation
400
Sigmatropic arrangements
Benzylic bromination31
Benzylic oxydation32
Vinylic benzenes33
Added links
1. Review of nucleophilic substitution34 SN1, SN2
2. Radicals35
3. Electrophilic additions36
4. Reactions with organometallic reagents37
----
31
2FBenzylic%20bromination
32
2FBenzylic%20oxydation
33
2FVinylic%20benzenes
34
2FReview%20of%20nucleophilic%20substitution
37
2FReactions%20with%20organometallic%20reagents
401
128 Appendix C: Introduction to
functional groups
403
129 Overview of Functional Groups
129.1 Introduction
The number of known organic compounds is quite large. In fact, there are many times more
organic compounds known than all the other (inorganic) compounds discovered so far, about
7 million organic compounds in total. Fortunately, organic chemicals consist of a relatively
few similar parts, combined in different ways, that allow us to predict how a compound we
have never seen before may react, by comparing how other molecules containing the same
types of parts are known to react.
These parts of organic molecules are called functional groups . The identification of
functional groups and the ability to predict reactivity based on functional group properties
is one of the cornerstones of organic chemistry.
Functional groups are specific atoms, ions, or groups of atoms having consistent
properties. A functional group makes up part of a larger molecule.
For example, -OH , the hydroxyl group that characterizes alcohols, is an oxygen with a
hydrogen attached. It could be found on any number of different molecules.
Just as elements have distinctive properties, functional groups have characteristic
chemistries . An -OH group on one molecule will tend to react similarly, although perhaps
not identically, to an -OH on another molecule.
Organic reactions usually take place at the functional group , so learning about the
reactivities of functional groups will prepare you to understand many other things about
organic chemistry.
129.2 Memorizing Functional Groups
Don’t assume that you can simply skim over the functional groups and move on. As you
proceed through the text, the writing will be in terms of functional groups. It will be
assumed that the student is familiar with most of the ones in the tables below. It’s simply
impossible to discuss chemistry without knowing the ”lingo”. It’s like trying to learn French
without first learning the meaning of some of the words.
One of the easiest ways to learn functional groups is by making flash cards. Get a pack of
index cards and write the name of the functional group on one side, and draw its chemical
representation on the other.
For now, a list of the most important ones you should know is provided here. Your initial
set of cards should include, at the very least: Alkene, Alkyne, Alkyl halide (or Haloalkane),
405
Overview of Functional Groups
Alcohol, Aldehyde, Ketone, Carboxylic Acid, Acyl Chloride (or Acid Chloride), Ester, Ether,
Amine, Sulfide, and Thiol. After you’ve learned all these, add a couple more cards and learn
those. Then add a few more and learn those. Every functional group below is eventually
discussed at one point or another in the book. But the above list will give you what you
need to continue on.
And don’t just look at the cards. Say and write the names and draw the structures. To
test yourself, try going through your cards and looking at the names and then drawing
their structure on a sheet of paper. Then try going through and looking at the structures
and naming them. Writing is a good technique to help you memorize, because it is more
active than simply reading. Once you have the minimal list above memorized backwards
and forwards, you’re ready to move on. But don’t stop learning the groups. If you choose
to move on without learning the ”lingo”, then you’re not going to understand the language
of the chapters to come. Again, using the French analogy, it’s like trying to ignore learning
the vocabulary and then picking up a novel in French and expecting to be able to read it.
129.2.1 Functional groups containing ...
In organic chemistry1 functional groups are submolecular structural motifs, characterized

by specific elemental composition and connectivity, that confer reactivity upon the molecule
that contains them.
Common functional groups include:
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/organic%20chemistry
406
Chemical class Group Formula Graphical Prefix Suffix Example
Formula
2
Acyl halide Haloformyl RCOX haloformyl- -oyl halide
Acetyl chloride3
(Ethanoyl chloride)
Alcohol4 Hydroxyl5 OH hydroxy- -ol
Methanol6
7 8
Aldehyde Aldehyde RCHO oxo- -al
Acetaldehyde9
(Ethanal)
Alkane10 Alkyl11 RHn alkyl- -ane
Methane12
Alkene13 Alkenyl14 R2 C=CR2 alkenyl- -ene
Ethylene15
(Ethene)
Alkyne16 Alkynyl17 RC≡CR’ alkynyl- -yne
Acetylene18
(Ethyne)
Amide19 Carboxamide20 RCONR2 carboxamido- -amide
Acetamide21
(Ethanamide)

3 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acetyl%20chloride
5 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Hydroxyl
6 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methanol
9 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acetaldehyde
11 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Alkyl
12 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methane
15 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethylene
18 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acetylene
20 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Carboxamide
407
Memorizing Functional Groups
21 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acetamide
408
Formula
Primary amine23 RNH2 amino- -amine

Methylamine24
Amine22 s
(Methanamine)
Secondary amine25 R2 NH amino- -amine
Dimethylamine26
Tertiary amine27 R3 N amino- -amine
Trimethylamine28
4° ammonium ion29 R4 N+ ammonio- -ammonium
Choline30
Azo compound31 Azo RN2 R’ azo- -diazene
(Diimide)32 Methyl orange33
Toluene derivative34 Benzyl35 RCH2 C6 H5 benzyl- 1-(substituent )toluene
RBn Benzyl bromide36

(1-Bromotoluene)
Carbonate37 Carbonate ester38 ROCOOR alkyl carbonate

24 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methylamine
26 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimethylamine
28 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Trimethylamine
29 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Quaternary%20ammonium%20cation
30 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Choline
32 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Azo%20compound
33 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methyl%20orange
36 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Benzyl%20bromide
38 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Carbonate%20ester
Formula
39 40 −
Carboxylate Carboxylate RCOO carboxy- -oate
Sodium acetate41
(Sodium ethanoate)
Carboxylic acid42 Carboxyl43 RCOOH carboxy- -oic acid

Acetic acid44
(Ethanoic acid)
Cyanate46 ROCN cyanato- alkyl cyanate
Cyanate45 s
Thiocyanate47 RSCN thiocyanato- alkyl thiocyanate
Ether48 Ether49 ROR’ alkoxy- alkyl alkyl ether

Diethyl ether50
(Ethoxyethane)

40 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Carboxylate
41 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sodium%20acetate
43 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Carboxyl
44 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Acetic%20acid
46 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Cyanate
49 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Ether
409
50 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Diethyl%20ether
410
Formula
Ester51 Ester52 RCOOR’ -oate

Ethyl butyrate53
(Ethyl butanoate)
Haloalkane54 Halo55 RX halo- alkyl halide

Chloroethane56
(Ethyl chloride)
Hydroperoxide (see organic Hydroperoxy58 ROOH hydroperoxy- alkyl hydroperoxide

peroxide57 ) Methyl ethyl ketone
peroxide59
Primary ketimine RC(=NH)R’ imino- -imine
Imine60
Secondary ketimine RC(=NR)R’ imino- -imine

52 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Ester
53 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethyl%20butyrate
55 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Halogen
56 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Chloroethane
58 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic%20peroxide
59 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methyl%20ethyl%20ketone%20peroxide
Formula
Primary aldimine RC(=NH)H imino- -imine

Secondary aldimine RC(=NR’)H imino- -imine
61
Isocyanide Isocyanide62 RNC isocyano- alkyl isocyanide
Isocyanate64 RNCO isocyanato- alkyl isocyanate

Isocyanate63 s
Isothiocyanate65 RNCS isothiocyanato- alkyl isothiocyanate

Allyl isothiocyanate66
Ketone67 Ketone68 RCOR’ keto-, oxo- -one

Methyl ethyl ketone69
(Butanone)

62 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Isocyanide
64 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Isocyanate
66 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Allyl%20isothiocyanate
68 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Ketone
411
69 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methyl%20ethyl%20ketone
412
Formula
Nitrile70 Nitrile71 RCN cyano- alkanenitrile

alkyl cyanide Benzonitrile72
(Phenyl cyanide)
Nitro compound73 Nitro74 RNO2 nitro-

Nitromethane75
Nitroso compound76 Nitroso77 RNO nitroso-

Nitrosobenzene78

71 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Nitrile
72 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Benzonitrile
74 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Nitro%20functional%20group
75 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nitromethane
77 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Nitroso
78 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nitrosobenzene
Formula
Peroxide79 Peroxy80 ROOR peroxy- alkyl peroxide

Di-tert-butyl peroxide81
Benzene derivative82 Phenyl83 RC6 H5 phenyl- -benzene

Cumene84
(2-phenylpropane)
Phosphine85 Phosphino R3 P phosphino- -phosphane

Methylpropylphosphane
Phosphodiester86 Phosphate87 HOPO(OR)2 phosphoric acid di(substituent ) hydrogenphos- DNA88
di(substituent ) ester phate

80 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Organic%20peroxide
81 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Di-tert-butyl%20peroxide
83 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Phenyl
84 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Cumene
87 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Phosphate
413
88 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/DNA
414
Formula
Phosphonic acid89 Phosphono RP(=O)(OH)2 phosphono- substituent phosphonic acid

Benzylphosphonic acid
Phosphate90 Phosphate ROP(=O)(OH)2 phospho-

Glyceraldehyde 3-
phosphate91
Pyridine derivative92 Pyridyl93 RC5 H4 N 4-pyridyl -pyridine

(pyridin-4-yl) Nicotine94
3-pyridyl
(pyridin-3-yl)
2-pyridyl
(pyridin-2-yl)
Sulfide95 RSR’ di(substituent ) sulfide

Dimethyl sulfide96

91 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Glyceraldehyde%203-phosphate
93 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Pyridine
94 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Nicotine
96 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimethyl%20sulfide
Formula
Sulfone97 Sulfonyl98 RSO2 R’ sulfonyl- di(substituent ) sulfone

Dimethyl sulfone
(Methylsulfonylmethane99 )
Sulfonic acid100 Sulfo RSO3 H sulfo- substituent sulfonic acid

Benzenesulfonic acid
Sulfoxide101 Sulfinyl102 RSOR’ sulfinyl- di(substituent ) sulfoxide
Diphenyl sulfoxide
Thiol103 Sulfhydryl104 RSH mercapto-, sulfanyl- -thiol

Ethanethiol105
(Ethyl mercaptan)

98 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Sulfone
99 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Methylsulfonylmethane
102 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Sulfoxide
104 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/Thiol
415
105 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ethanethiol
Note: The table above is adapted from the Functional Groups table on Wikipedia.106
Combining the names of functional groups with the names of the parent alkanes107 generates
a powerful systematic nomenclature108 for naming organic compounds109 .
The non-hydrogen atoms of functional groups are always associated with each by covalent
bond110 s, as well as with the rest of the molecule. When the group of atoms is associated
with the rest of the molecule primarily by ionic forces, the group is referred to more properly
as a polyatomic ion111 or complex ion112 . And all of these are called radical113 s, by a meaning
of the term radical that predates the free radical114 .
The first carbon after the carbon that attaches to the functional group is called the alpha
carbon115 .
129.3 Mnemonics for Functional Groups
These are possible mnemonics for the common functional groups.

Vowels : Remember the vowels ”A”, ”E”, and ”Y” for Alkane, Alkene, and Alkyne. Alkanes
have only single covalent bonds. Alkenes have at least one double bond. Alkynes have at
least one triple bond. The letters ”I”, ”O”, and ”U” are not used. Furthermore, ”O” and ”U”
would result in awkward pronunciations.
Alcohol : Look for the ”C-O-H” in ”Alcohol.”
Ether : Ethers were anesthetics used in the 1800s. Dr. Kellogg also lived at the same time.
Corn Flakes are made by Kellogg’s. A rooster or cock (C-O-C) is the cornflake mascot.
Amine : Remember the ”N” stands for nitrogen.
Aldehyde : This sounds like ”Adelaide,” the Australian city. Australia is at the end of the
Asian islands, and aldehydes are at the end of the hydrocarbon chain. The ”Y” indicates a
C=O double bond.
Ketone : Imagine the diagonal strokes of ”K” forming the C=O double bond.
106 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Functional_groups
107 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Alkanes
108 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/systematic%20name
109 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/organic%20compound
110 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/covalent%20bond
111 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/polyatomic%20ion
112 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/complex%20ion
113 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/radical
114 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/free%20radical
115 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/alpha%20carbon
416
Mnemonics for Functional Groups
Figure 301
Carboxylic Acid : ”Box” stands for boxed wine or C-O-H, alcohol. The ”Y” indicates a
C=O double bond.
Ester : This sounds like ”Estelle” George Costanza’s mother in the TV show Seinfeld.
George’s nickname was Koko or Coco. So think of O=C-O-C.
Amide : Amine with a ”D”. D for double.
----
417
130 Other appendices
419
131 Glossary
Figure 302
> Glossary ----
131.1 A
• Acetal - A molecule with two single bonded oxygens attached to the same carbon atom.
421
Glossary
• Acetyl - A functional group with chemical formula -COCH3.

• Achiral - A group containing atleast two identical substituents.
• Acid anhydride - Hydrocarbon containing two carbonyl groups.Acyl group attached with
carboxylate group.eg- RCOOCOR’
• Acid halide - Acyl group with any halogen attached with carbon of carbonyl group.eg.-
RCO-X(X=F,Cl,Br,I).
• Acidity constant Ka -
• Activating group - Any group which activate any molecule by increasing positive or
negative charge on carbon atom.Mainly towards neucleophilic or electrophilic substitution
reactions.
• Activation energy - The energy required to reactants to cross energy barrier to undergo
any chemical change.denoted by Ea .
• Acyl group - A group having alkyl or aryl group with a carbonyl group RCO-
• Adam’s catalyst - A catalyst for hydrogenation and hydrogenolysis in organic synthesis.
Also known as platinum dioxide
• Addition reaction1 - A reaction where a product is created from the coming together of
2 reactants.
• Alcohol - A saturated hydrocarbon chain with an -OH functional group.
• Aldehyde - A hydrocarbon containing atleast one carbonyl gp having one hydrogen at-
tached to it.(>C=O)
• Aldol reaction - When two similar aldehydes are reacted with each other,a product having
both aldehyde(>C=O) and alcohol() group is formed.This reaction is called aldol reaction.
• Aliphatic - A non-cyclic, non-aromatic, hydrocarbon chain (e.g. alkanes, alkenes, and
alkynes)
• Alkane - A hydrocarbon with all the carbon-carbon bonds are single bonds.
• Alkene - A hydrocarbon with at least one carbon-carbon bond is a double-bond.
• Alkoxide ion - The conjugate base of an alcohol without the terminal H atom. For any
alcohol R-OH, the corresponding alkoxide form is R-O- .
• Alkyl - A hydrocarbon having formula Cn H2n+1
• Alkylation - Addition of alkyl group in a compound.
• Alkyne - An unsaturated hydrocarbon containog triple bond.and having general formula
Cn H2n-2
• Allyl - An alkene hydrocarbon group with the formula H2C=CH-CH2-
• α Position - Carbon attached to a functional group is called α-carbon and the position is
known as α position.
422
B
• α-carbon - Carbon attached to a functional group is called α-carbon

• Amide - A hydrocarbon containing amnine group attached to acyl group. eg.- RCONH2
• Amine - A simple hydrocarbon containing atleast one -NH2 group.
• Amino Acid - A fundamental unit of polypeptides or proteins.having general formula-
COOHRCHNH2 .eg.- glysine,alanine etc.
• Anti conformation -
• Anti periplaner -
• Anti stereochemistry -
• Anti bonding molecular orbital - Molecular orbitals having higher energy than bonding
molecular orbitals after combination of atomic orbitals.denoted by an astric over Sigma
or pi notations.
• Arene - Another name for an aromatic hydrocarbon.
• Aromacity - A chemical property in which a conjugated ring of unsaturated bonds, lone
pairs, or empty orbitals exhibit a stabilization stronger than would be expected by the
stabilization of conjugation alone.
• Atomic mass - Total no of nucleon i.e. no. of proton and no. of neutrons.It is denoted
by A.
• Atomic number - Total no. of protons is called atomic no.
• Axial bond - The bond parellel or anti parellel to axial coordinate passing center of
gravity.
• Azide synthesis - Dutt-Wormall reaction in which a diazonium salt reacts with a sul-
fonamide first to a diazoaminosulfinate and then on hydrolysis the azide and a sulfinic
acid.
• Azo compound - A compound containing -N=N group.
131.2 B
• Benzoyl Group - The acyl of benzoic acid, with structure C6H5CO-

• Benzyl Group - The radical or ion formed from the removal of one of the methyl hydrogens
of toluene (methylbenzene).
• Benzylic -
• β position -
• β-carbon -
• Bicylcoalkane - A compound containing two cyclic rings.
• Bimolecular reaction - A second order reaction where the concentration of two compounds
determine the reaction rate.
423
Glossary
• Boat cyclohexane - A less-stable conformation of cyclohexane that somewhat resembles

a boat.
• Bond - The attractive forces that create a link between atoms. Bonds may be covalent
or ionic.
• Bond angle - The angle formed between three atoms across at least two bonds.
• Bond length - The average distance between the centers of two atoms bonded together
in any given molecule.
• Bond strength - The degree to which each atom linked to a central atom contributes to
the valency of this central atom.
• Bonding molecular orbital -
• Bromonium ion -
• Brønsted-Lowry Acid2 -
• Brønsted-Lowry Base3 -
131.3 C
• Cahn-Ingold-Prelog priorities - A rule for assigning priorities to substituents off of carbon

in a double-bond or in a chiral center.
• Carbocation -
• Carbonyl group - A functional group composed of a carbon atom double-bonded to an
oxygen atom: C=O.
• Carboxylation - A chemical reaction in which a carboxylic acid group is introduced in a
substrate.
• Carboxylic acid - An organic acid characterized by the presence of a carboxyl group.
• Chain reaction - A sequence of reactions where a reactive product or by-product causes
additional reactions to take place.
• Chair cyclohexane -
• Chiral - A term chiral used to describe an object that is non-superposable on its mirror
image
• Chiral center - A carbon atom bonded to four different groups
• Chromatography - The process of separating compounds such as a dye into its constituents
• Cis-trans isomers -
• Claisen condensation reaction -

424
D
• Claisen rearrangement reaction -

• Concerted -
• Configuration - the permanent geometry of a molecule that results from the spatial ar-
rangement of its bonds.
• Conformation -
• Conformer -
• Conjugate acid -
• Conjugate base -
• Conjugation - A system of atoms covalently bonded with alternating single and multiple
(e.g. double) bonds (e.g., C=C-C=C-C).
• Covalent bond - A form of chemical bonding that is characterized by the sharing of pairs
of electrons between atoms.
• Cracking - The process whereby complex organic molecules such as heavy hydrocarbons
are broken down into simpler molecules (e.g. light hydrocarbons) by the breaking of
carbon-carbon bonds.
• Cycloaddition reaction -
• Cycloalkane - An alkane that has one or more rings of carbon atoms in the chemical
structure of its molecule.
131.4 D
• Debye -
• Decarboxylation -
• Delocalization - The ability of electrons to spread out among pi bonds to provide stabi-
lization to electronically unstable areas of a molecule.
• Dextrorotatory -
• Diastereomers - Two or more isomers of a molecule which are not enantiomers of one
another.
• 1,3 Diaxial interaction - The steric intereaction between two methyl or larger groups
attached at the 1 and 3 cis positions of cyclohexanes. The cyclohexane is in a higher
energy state in the ring flip conformation that results in both 1 and 3 positions being
axial due to steric strain between the 2 groups. This strain does not exist when hydrogens
are bonded at these positions.
• Diels-Alder reaction -
• Dienophile -
• Dipolar -
425
Glossary
• Dipole moment -
• Disulfide -
• Downfield - A term used to describe the left direction on NMR charts. A peak to the left
of another peak is described as being downfield from the peak.
131.5 E
• E geometry -
• E1 reaction -
• E2 reaction -
• Eclipsed conformation -
• Eclipsing strain -
• Electron - An elementary subatomic particle that carries a negative electrical charge and
occupies an electron shell outside the atomic nucleus.
• Electron configuration - The arrangement of electrons in an atom or molecule
• Electron-dot structure -
• Electron shell - The orbit followed by electrons around an atomic nucleus. The atom has
a number of shells and they are normally labelled K, L, M, N, O, P, and Q.
• Electronegativity - The ability of an atom to attract electrons towards itself in a covalent
bond.
• Electrophile - Literally, electron lover. A positively or neutrally charged reagent that
forms bonds by accepting electrons from a nucleophile. Elecrophiles are Lewis Acids.
• Electrophilic addition reaction -
• Electrophilic aromatic substitution -
• Elimination reaction4 - A reaction where atoms and/or functional groups are removed
from a reactant.
• Endergonic - In an endergonic process, work is done on the system, and ∆G0 > 0, so
the process is nonspontaneous. An exergonic process is the opposite: ∆G0 < 0, so the
process is spontaneous.
• Endothermic - An endothermic reaction is a chemical reaction that absorbs heat, and is
the opposite of an exothermic reaction.
• Enol - An alkene with a hydroxyl group affixed to one of the carbon atoms composing
the double bond.
• Enolate ion -
426
F
• Entgegen - German word meaning ”opposite”. Represented by E in the E/Z naming

system of alkenes.
• Enthalpy -
• Entropy -
• Equatorial bond -
• Ester - An inorganic or organic acid in which at least one -OH (hydroxyl) group is replaced
by an -O-alkyl (alkoxy) group.
• Ether - An organic compound which contains an ether group — an oxygen atom connected
to two (substituted) alkyl or aryl groups — of general formula R–O–R’.
• Exergonic -
• Exothermic - An exothermic reaction is a chemical reaction that releases heat, and is the
opposite of an endothermic reaction.
131.6 F
• Fingerprint region -
• First order reaction - A reaction whose rate is determined by the concentration of only
one of its reactants leading to a reaction rate equation of Rate = k[X]
• Fischer projection -
• Formal Charge -
• Friedel-Crafts reaction -
• Functional group - This is a specific group of atoms within a molecule that is responsible
for the characteristic chemical reactions of that molecule. The same functional group will
undergo the same or similar chemical reaction(s) regardless of the size of the molecule it
is a part of.
131.7 G
• Geminal -
• Gibbs free energy -
• Gilman reagent -
• Glycol - A chemical compound containing two hydroxyl groups (-OH groups). Also known
as a Diol.
• Glycolysis - The metabolic pathway that converts glucose, C6 H12 O6 , into pyruvate,
C3 H5 O3 . This process usually occurs outside the mitochondria of a cell to help produce
energy.
427
Glossary
• Grignard reagent -
• Ground state - In electrons, the state where they have the least energy. Electrons that
gain energy get ”excited” and leave the ground state, now able to do more work. Moving
electrons out of their ground state is a key part of photosynthesis, where plants create
sugar from the sun, carbon dioxide, and water.
131.8 H
• Halohydrin formation -
• Hammond postulate -
• Hemiacetal -
• Hemiaminal -
• Heterocycle - A cyclic molecule with more than 2 types of atoms as part of the ring. (e.g.
Furan, a 5-membered ring with four carbons and one oxygen, or a Pyran, a 6-membered
ring with five carbons and one oxygen)
• HOMO - Acronym for Highest Occupied Molecular Orbital.
• Homolytic cleavage - Where bond breaks leaving each atom with one of the bonding
electrons, producing two radicals.
• Hybrid orbital -
• Hydration - A chemical reaction in which a hydroxyl group (OH-) and a hydrogen cation
(an acidic proton) are added to the two carbon atoms bonded together in the carbon-
carbon double bond which makes up an alkene functional group.
• Hybride shift -
• Hydroboration - A reaction adding BH3 or B2 H6 or an alkylborane to an alkene to pro-
duce intermediate products consisting of 3 alkyl groups attached to a boron atom. This
molecule is then used in other reactions, for example, to create an alcohol by reacting it
with H2 O2 in a basic solution.
• Hydrocarbon - A molecule consisting of hydrogens and carbons.
• Hydrogen bond -
• Hydrogenation - Addition of a hydrogen atoms to an alkene or alkane to produce a
saturated product.
• Hydrophilic - literally, ”water loving”. In chemistry, these are molecules that are soluble
in water.
• Hydrophobic - literally, ”water fearing”. In chemistry, molecules that aren’t soluble in
water.
• Hydroxylation - A chemical process that introduces one or more hydroxyl groups (-OH)
into a compound (or radical) thereby oxidizing it.
428
I
• Hyperconjugation -
131.9 I
• Imide -
• Imine -
• Infrared spectroscopy -
• Intermediate -
• Isomer - Compounds with the same molecular formula but different structural formulae.
There are two main forms of isomerism: structural isomerism and stereoisomerism.
• Isotope - The different types of atoms of the same chemical element, each having a
different atomic mass (mass number). Isotopes of an element have nuclei with the same
number of protons (the same atomic number) but different numbers of neutrons.
• IUPAC - Acronym for International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry.
• IUPAC Nomenclature - The international standard set of rules for naming molecules.
131.10 K
• Kekulé structure -
• Keto-enol tautomerism -
• Ketone - The functional group characterized by a carbonyl group (O=C) linked to two
other carbon atoms, or a chemical compound that contains a carbonyl group
131.11 L
• Leaving group -
• Levorotatory -
• Lewis acid - A reagent that accepts a pair of electrons form a covalent bond. (see also
Lewis Acids and Bases5 )
• Lewis base - A reagent that forms covalent bonds by donating a pair of electrons. (see
also Lewis Acids and Bases6 )
• Lewis structure -
• Lindlar catalyst -

429
Glossary
• Line-bond structure -
• Lone pair electrons -
• LUMO - Acronym for Lowest Unoccupied Molecular Orbital
131.12 M
• Markovnikov’s rule7 - States that ”when an unsymmetrical alkene reacts with a hydrogen
halide to give an alkyl halide, the hydrogen adds to the carbon of the alkene that has the
greater number of hydrogen substituents, and the halogen to the carbon of the alkene
with the fewer number of hydrogen substituents.”
• Mass number - The total number of protons and neutrons (together known as nucleons)
in an atomic nucleus
• Mass spectrometry -
• Mechanism -
• Meso compound -
• Meta -
• Methylene group -
• Molality - A measure of the concentration of a solute in a solvent given by moles of solute
per kg of solvent.
• Molarity - A measure of the concentration, given by moles of solute per liter of solution
(solute and solvent mixed).
• Mole - A measure of a substance that is approximately Avogadro’s Number (6.022×1023 )
of molecules of the substance. More simply, calculate the molecule’s atomic mass and
that many grams of the substance is a mole.
• Molecule -
• Monomer - A small molecule that may become chemically bonded to other monomers to
form a polymer.
131.13 N
• Nitrile - Any organic compound which has a -C≡N functional group.

• NMR - See Nuclear magnetic resonance.
• Non-bonding electrons -
• Normality -
430
O
• Nuclear magnetic resonance -

• Nucleophile - Literally, nucleus lover. A negatively or neutrally charged reagent that
forms a bond with an electrophile by dontating both bonding electrons. Nucleophiles are
Lewis Bases.
• Nucleophilic addition reaction -
• Nucleophilic aromatic substitution reaction -
• Nucleophilic substitution reaction8 - A reaction in which a halide is removed from a
molecule and replaced with a nucleophile.
• Nucleophilicity -
131.14 O
• Optical isomer -
• Optical activity -
• Orbital -
• Ortho -
• Oxidation -
• Oxime -
• Oxymercuration reduction reaction -
131.15 P
• Para -
• Pauli exclusion principle -
• Pericyclic reaction -
• Periplanar -
• Peroxide -
• Peroxyacid -
• Phenol - A toxic, colourless crystalline solid with the chemical formula C6 H5 OH and
whose structure is that of a hydroxyl group (-OH) bonded to a phenyl ring. It is also
known as carbolic acid,
• Phenyl - A functional group with the formula -C6 H5
• Pi bond -
431
Glossary
• Polar aprotic solvent -

• Polar covalent bond -
• Polar protic solvent -
• Polar reaction -
• Polarity -
• Polarizability -
• Polymer - A large molecule (macromolecule) composed of repeating structural units
(monomers) typically connected by covalent chemical bonds.
• Primary -
• Prochiral -
• Prochirality center -
• Protic solvent -
131.16 Q
131.17 R
• R group -
• R,S convention -
• Racemic mixture -
• Radical -
• Radical reaction -
• Rate constant -
• Rate equation -
• Rate-limiting step -
• re face -
• Reducation -
• Regiochemistry -
• Regioselectivity -
• Resonance form -
• Resonance hybrid -
• Ring-flip -
432
S
131.18 S
• Saponification - The hydrolysis of an ester under basic conditions to form an alcohol and
the salt of a carboxylic acid.
• Saturated - A situation in which a compound has no double or triple bonds. Saturated
can refer to the maximum amount of a solute being dissolved in a solution. Whether the
context is chemical bonding or solutions will determine which meaning is appropriate.
• Saytzeff’s Rule - See Zaitsev’s rule9
• Second order reaction - A reaction whose rate is dependent on the concentration of two
reactants, leading to a reaction rate of Rate = k[X][Y ]
• Secondary -
• si face -
• Side chain -
• Sigma bond -
• Simmons-Smith reaction -
• SN 1 reaction -
• SN 2 reaction -
• Solvation -
• Solvent -
• sp orbital -
• sp2 orbital -
• sp3 orbital -
• Spin-spin splitting -
• Staggered conformation -
• Stereochemistry -
• Stereoisomer -
• Steric hinderance -
• Steric strain -
• Substitution reaction - Reactions where one functional groups is replaced with another
functional group.
• Symmetry plane -
• Syn addition -
• Syn periplanar -
433
Glossary
131.19 T
• Tautomers -
• Tertiary -
• Thioester -
• Thiol - A compound that contains the functional group composed of a sulfur atom and a
hydrogen atom (-SH).
• Thiolate ion -
• Torisional strain -
• Tosylate -
• Transition state -
• Twist-boat conformation -
131.20 U
• Ultraviolet spectroscopy -
• Unsaturated - A situation in which a compound contains double or triple bonds.
• Upfield - A term used to describe the right direction on NMR charts. A peak to the right
of another peak is described as being upfield from the peak.
131.21 V
• Valence bond theory -

• Valence electrons -
• Valence shell -
• Van der Waals forces -
• Vicinal -
• Vinyl - An organic compound that contains a vinyl group (also called ethenyl),
−CH=CH2.
• Vinylic -
434
W, X, Y, Z
131.22 W, X, Y, Z
• Zaitsev’s rule10 - In elimination reactions11 , the major reaction product is the alkene with
the more highly substituted double bond. This most-substituted alkene is also the most
stable.
• Zussamen - German word meaning ”together”. Represented by Z in the E/Z naming
system of alkenes. Simple mnemonic, Z=Zame Zide (Same Side).

435
132 Short periodic table
437
1 2
438
H He
3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Li Be B C N O F Ne
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Na Mg Al Si P S Cl Ar
35
Short periodic table
Br
W, X, Y, Z
---- Some of the good news about organic chemistry is that it focuses on a subset of the
periodic table, so there are fewer elements to worry about. These are the main elements
with which we must concern ourselves, although occasionally a few others will be used in
reactions.
439
133 External links
441
134 Resources
• The IUPAC Gold Book of definitions.1

• UNKNOWN TEMPLATE DMOZ
Science/Chemistry/OrganicOrganic Chemistry
1 http://goldbook.iupac.org/index.html
443
135 Other online textbooks
• MIT OpenCourseWare Organic Chemistry I1 (unfortunately, much of the information is

in PDF documents instead of HTML).
• Combinatorial Chemistry2 basic introduction to the field of combinatorial chemistry
• MIT OpenCourseWare Organic Chemistry II3 (same PDF dilemma as above).
• Virtual Text4 a real nice one by William Reusch of Michigan State University5 .
• Crystal Clear Chemistry6 A good resource for studying and obtaining answers to concep-
tual questions that aren’t answered elsewhere.
• Chemhelper.com7 by student Arthur Winter of Frostburg State University8 .
• LearnChem.net9 Helpful chemistry tutorials
• Online version of a leading text10 Site extrapolating on parts of Francis Carey’s leading
textbook.
• General chemistry reference11 at VisionLearning.com12 funded by National Science Foun-
dation13
• Lab and other techniques compository14
• Organic Chemistry Portal15
• Organic chemistry resources worldwide16
• A full length, peer-reviewed, and free organic chemistry textbook.17 Can be downloaded
in PDF format.
• Khan Academy18 Colorful, clear and engaging Organic Chemistry video playlist.
• Organic Chemistry Practice Problems19 A collection of organic chemistry practice prob-
lems with detailed video solutions.
http://ocw.mit.edu/OcwWeb/Chemistry/5-12Organic-Chemistry-ISpring2003/CourseHome/
1
index.htm
2 http://www.combichemistry.com
http://ocw.mit.edu/OcwWeb/Chemistry/5-13Organic-Chemistry-IISpring2003/CourseHome/
3
index.htm
4 http://www.cem.msu.edu/~reusch/VirtualText/intro1.htm
5 http://www.msu.edu
6 http://www.crystalclearchemistry.com/
7 http://www.chemhelper.com/
8 http://www.frostburg.edu/
9 http://www.learnchem.net/
10 http://www.chem.ucalgary.ca/courses/351/Carey/Carey.html
11 http://www.visionlearning.com/library/cat_view.php?cid=1&l=
12 http://www.visionlearning.com/
13 http://www.nsf.gov
14 http://www.psigate.ac.uk/newsite/whatsnew.html
15 http://www.organic-chemistry.org/
16 http://www.organicworldwide.net/
17 http://www.ochem4free.com/
http://www.khanacademy.org/video/representing-structures-of-organic-molecules?
18
playlist=Organic%20Chemistry/
19 http://studystove.com/organic-chemistry-practice-problems
445
Other online textbooks
• Google search results20

ar:‫الكيمياءالعضوية‬/‫قائمةالمراجع‬21
http://www.google.com/search?hl=en&lr=&ie=UTF-8&oe=UTF-8&q=%22open+content%22+
20
%22organic+chemistry%22+textbook
https://ar.wikibooks.org/wiki/%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%83%D9%8A%D9%85%D9%8A%D8%A7%D8%A1%20%D8%
21 A7%D9%84%D8%B9%D8%B6%D9%88%D9%8A%D8%A9%2F%D9%82%D8%A7%D8%A6%D9%85%D8%A9%20%D8%A7%D9%
84%D9%85%D8%B1%D8%A7%D8%AC%D8%B9
446
136 Contributors
Edits User
1 78.261
1 A087774602
1 Abdulhussain2713
1 Actualist4
6 Addihockey10 (automated)5
61 Adrignola6
1 Albert einstein7
3 Alberttam8
19 Alsocal9
4 AmenRa˜enwikibooks10
8 Andreas Ipp11
1 Atcovi12
1 Atrytone13
3 Avijay8614
3 Az156815
5 BRUTE16
45 Bbi529117
3 Bluewirecut18
1 Bombyx˜enwikibooks19
1 Boud20
1 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:78.26
2 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:A08777460&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Abdulhussain271&action=edit&
3
redlink=1
4 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Actualist&action=edit&redlink=1
5 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Addihockey10_(automated)
6 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Adrignola
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Albert_einstein&action=edit&
7
redlink=1
8 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Alberttam&action=edit&redlink=1
9 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Alsocal
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:AmenRa~enwikibooks&action=edit&
10
redlink=1
11 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Andreas_Ipp
12 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Atcovi
13 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Atrytone
14 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Avijay86&action=edit&redlink=1
15 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Az1568
16 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:BRUTE
17 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Bbi5291&action=edit&redlink=1
18 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Bluewirecut&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Bombyx~enwikibooks&action=edit&
19
redlink=1
20 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Boud
447
Contributors
1 Branko˜enwikibooks21
1 Bushchemist22
9 Buxtor23
2 Carandol24
1 Carhas0˜enwikibooks25
2 Cbasankar26
24 Cburnett27
4 Cfromber28
1 Cfthb29
1 Chengamanad˜enwikibooks30
2 Chuyelchulo31
8 CommonsDelinker32
1 Cool.dude.sagnik33
1 Couchmonkee34
1 DMacks35
1 Danh36
1 DavidCary37
2 Dbroadwell˜enwikibooks38
1 Debacle48139
4 DenLianda˜enwikibooks40
4 Derbeth41
2 Dirk Hünniger42
22 Dposte4643
2 Duplode44
21 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Branko~enwikibooks
22 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Bushchemist&action=edit&redlink=1
23 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Buxtor&action=edit&redlink=1
24 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Carandol
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Carhas0~enwikibooks&action=edit&
25
redlink=1
26 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Cbasankar&action=edit&redlink=1
27 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Cburnett
28 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Cfromber&action=edit&redlink=1
29 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Cfthb&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Chengamanad~enwikibooks&action=
30
edit&redlink=1
31 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Chuyelchulo
32 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:CommonsDelinker
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Cool.dude.sagnik&action=edit&
33
redlink=1
34 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Couchmonkee&action=edit&redlink=1
35 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:DMacks
36 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Danh&action=edit&redlink=1
37 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:DavidCary
38 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Dbroadwell~enwikibooks
39 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Debacle481&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:DenLianda~enwikibooks&action=edit&
40
redlink=1
41 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Derbeth
42 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Dirk_H%25C3%25BCnniger
43 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Dposte46&action=edit&redlink=1
44 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Duplode
448
W, X, Y, Z
2 Edgar18145
11 Ekozin46
3 Elyswim˜enwikibooks47
1 Ephi7948
2 Etothex49
2 Everlong50
191 Ewen51
2 Exabyte˜enwikibooks52
75 Fabiuccio˜enwikibooks53
1 Fermun˜enwikibooks54
1 Ferranti˜enwikibooks55
3 Fishpi56
1 Furbo57
3 Gadfium58
2 Geocachernemesis59
1 Ghiles˜enwikibooks60
98 Ghostal61
2 Glaisher62
8 Glich63
4 Gohliangsong64
1 Gokul madhavan˜enwikibooks65
1 Goodysingh66
17 Guanabot˜enwikibooks67
1 GvR68
45 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Edgar181
46 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Ekozin&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Elyswim~enwikibooks&action=edit&
47
redlink=1
48 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Ephi79&action=edit&redlink=1
49 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Etothex
50 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Everlong
51 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Ewen
52 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Exabyte~enwikibooks
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Fabiuccio~enwikibooks&action=edit&
53
redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Fermun~enwikibooks&action=edit&
54
redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Ferranti~enwikibooks&action=edit&
55
redlink=1
56 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Fishpi&action=edit&redlink=1
57 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Furbo&action=edit&redlink=1
58 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Gadfium
59 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Geocachernemesis
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Ghiles~enwikibooks&action=edit&
60
redlink=1
61 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Ghostal
62 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Glaisher
63 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Glich
64 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Gohliangsong&action=edit&redlink=1
65 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Gokul_madhavan~enwikibooks
66 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Goodysingh&action=edit&redlink=1
67 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Guanabot~enwikibooks
68 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:GvR&action=edit&redlink=1
449
Contributors
2 H Padleckas69
25 Hagindaz70
8 HelmutLeitner71
2 Herbythyme72
1 Hon20045573
5 Hypergeek1474
2 Hyper˜enwikibooks75
21 Igoroisha76
1 Infocom˜enwikibooks77
1 IngerAlHaosului78
1 Italienmoose79
81 JSJohnson80
1 Jakec81
2 Jarombouts˜enwikibooks82
1 Jclee83
1 Jeph paul84
333 Jguk85
1 Jimac86
1 John H, Morgan˜enwikibooks87
21 Jomegat88
2 Jstewart˜enwikibooks89
5 JustinJohnson90
475 Karl Wick91
2 Karthik˜enwikibooks92
69 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:H_Padleckas
70 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Hagindaz
71 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:HelmutLeitner&action=edit&redlink=1
72 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Herbythyme
73 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Hon200455&action=edit&redlink=1
74 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Hypergeek14&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Hyper~enwikibooks&action=edit&
75
redlink=1
76 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Igoroisha&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Infocom~enwikibooks&action=edit&
77
redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:IngerAlHaosului&action=edit&
78
redlink=1
79 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Italienmoose
80 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:JSJohnson
81 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Jakec
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Jarombouts~enwikibooks&action=edit&
82
redlink=1
83 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Jclee&action=edit&redlink=1
84 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Jeph_paul
85 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Jguk
86 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Jimac&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:John_H,_Morgan~enwikibooks&action=
87
edit&redlink=1
88 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Jomegat
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Jstewart~enwikibooks&action=edit&
89
redlink=1
90 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:JustinJohnson&action=edit&redlink=1
91 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Karl_Wick
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Karthik~enwikibooks&action=edit&
92
redlink=1
450
W, X, Y, Z
1 Kellen93
2 Kenmason94
3 Kernigh95
3 Kerowyn96
5 Ketruong97
1 Kiranbettadapur98
3 Koavf99
1 Kopiersperre100
10 Krischik101
2 Kschneyer˜enwikibooks102
2 Lefty˜enwikibooks103
2 Leyo104
5 Lineweaver105
1 LlamaAl106
3 Luca1500˜enwikibooks107
8 Luxdormiens108
1 Mark Lewis Epstein109
3 Mattb112885110
1 McZusatz111
3 Mike Kascel112
2 Mike.lifeguard113
1 Mikemoral114
1 Mirrorblade115
2 Mjbmrbot116
93 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Kellen
94 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Kenmason&action=edit&redlink=1
95 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Kernigh
96 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Kerowyn
97 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Ketruong&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Kiranbettadapur&action=edit&
98
redlink=1
99 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Koavf
100 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Kopiersperre
101 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Krischik
102 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Kschneyer~enwikibooks
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Lefty~enwikibooks&action=edit&
103
redlink=1
104 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Leyo
105 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Lineweaver
106 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:LlamaAl
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Luca1500~enwikibooks&action=edit&
107
redlink=1
108 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Luxdormiens&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Mark_Lewis_Epstein&action=edit&
109
redlink=1
110 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Mattb112885
111 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:McZusatz
112 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Mike_Kascel&action=edit&redlink=1
113 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Mike.lifeguard
114 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Mikemoral
115 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Mirrorblade&action=edit&redlink=1
116 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Mjbmrbot
451
Contributors
1 Mkn117
10 Moadeeb˜enwikibooks118
2 Mortense119
2 Natch˜enwikibooks120
1 Natuur12121
1 Naveenkumar122
4 Nikhilk370123
1 Nirmos124
4 Oasisbob˜enwikibooks125
7 Oldthrasbarg126
3 Panic2k4127
1 Patrick128
164 Pdavis68129
1 Philmccrevace130
2 Pingveno131
1 Porkchopmcmoose˜enwikibooks132
1 Quadalpha133
26 QuiteUnusual134
1 RMFan1135
1 Rachelt˜enwikibooks136
1 Ram-Man137
3 Rayleung2709˜enwikibooks138
6 RaymondSutanto139
1 Rckauffman140
117 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Mkn
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Moadeeb~enwikibooks&action=edit&
118
redlink=1
119 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Mortense
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Natch~enwikibooks&action=edit&
120
redlink=1
121 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Natuur12
122 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Naveenkumar&action=edit&redlink=1
123 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Nikhilk370&action=edit&redlink=1
124 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Nirmos
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Oasisbob~enwikibooks&action=edit&
125
redlink=1
126 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Oldthrasbarg&action=edit&redlink=1
127 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Panic2k4
128 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Patrick
129 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Pdavis68
130 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Philmccrevace&action=edit&redlink=1
131 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Pingveno
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Porkchopmcmoose~enwikibooks&action=
132
edit&redlink=1
133 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Quadalpha&action=edit&redlink=1
134 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:QuiteUnusual
135 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:RMFan1&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Rachelt~enwikibooks&action=edit&
136
redlink=1
137 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Ram-Man
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Rayleung2709~enwikibooks&action=
138
edit&redlink=1
139 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:RaymondSutanto
140 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Rckauffman&action=edit&redlink=1
452
W, X, Y, Z
19 Recent Runes141
1 Reece142
4 Rgarland143
1 Rishava0144
1 Ritwick.sunblade145
76 Robert Horning146
2 Roland1952147
6 Rzepa148
2 Sah002149
2 Sairvine150
16 Sarthaku151
1 Savh152
134 Shalom Yechiel153
6 Shashankmehra154
1 Shehbaz155
3 Somdev007˜enwikibooks156
1 Spammy157
1 Spangineer158
1 Spoon!159
1 Stepa160
1 Subwindow161
1 Suruena162
2 Swift163
3 Syum90164
1 Szsullivan165
141 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Recent_Runes
142 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Reece
143 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Rgarland&action=edit&redlink=1
144 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Rishava0&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Ritwick.sunblade&action=edit&
145
redlink=1
146 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Robert_Horning
147 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Roland1952
148 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Rzepa
149 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Sah002&action=edit&redlink=1
150 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Sairvine&action=edit&redlink=1
151 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Sarthaku
152 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Savh
153 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Shalom_Yechiel
154 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Shashankmehra&action=edit&redlink=1
155 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Shehbaz&action=edit&redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Somdev007~enwikibooks&action=edit&
156
redlink=1
157 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Spammy
158 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Spangineer
159 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Spoon!&action=edit&redlink=1
160 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Stepa
161 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Subwindow&action=edit&redlink=1
162 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Suruena
163 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Swift
164 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Syum90
165 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Szsullivan&action=edit&redlink=1
453
Contributors
1 T4bits˜enwikibooks166
1 Tacs167
4 Tannersf168
2 Taxman169
2 The Doc170
8 Theresa knott171
3 Tim Topolski172
17 Tobes00173
2 Tom Morris174
1 Trang Oul175
1 Uncle G176
1 UninvitedCompany177
2 Van der Hoorn178
6 Vanischenu179
1 Vchorozopoulos180
2 Vinaybio˜enwikibooks181
1 Vishal raina90182
1 Walkerma183
8 Webaware184
64 Whiteknight185
3 Whoop whoop pull up186
19 WilliamJenkins09187
4 Wkpeters188
2 Wutsje189
13 Xania190
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:T4bits~enwikibooks&action=edit&
166
redlink=1
167 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Tacs&action=edit&redlink=1
168 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Tannersf
169 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Taxman
170 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:The_Doc
171 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Theresa_knott
172 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Tim_Topolski&action=edit&redlink=1
173 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Tobes00&action=edit&redlink=1
174 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Tom_Morris
175 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Trang_Oul&action=edit&redlink=1
176 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Uncle_G
177 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:UninvitedCompany
178 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Van_der_Hoorn
179 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Vanischenu&action=edit&redlink=1
180 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Vchorozopoulos
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Vinaybio~enwikibooks&action=edit&
181
redlink=1
https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Vishal_raina90&action=edit&redlink=
182
1
183 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Walkerma
184 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Webaware
185 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Whiteknight
186 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Whoop_whoop_pull_up
187 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:WilliamJenkins09
188 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Wkpeters&action=edit&redlink=1
189 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Wutsje
190 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Xania
454
W, X, Y, Z
3 Xcentaur191
1 Xerol192
2 Yggdrasil˜enwikibooks193
1 Yikrazuul194
1 YouShow˜enwikibooks195
1 Zollerriia196
1 Zondor˜enwikibooks197
191 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Xcentaur
192 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Xerol
193 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Yggdrasil~enwikibooks
194 https://en.wikibooks.org/w/index.php%3ftitle=User:Yikrazuul&action=edit&redlink=1
195 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:YouShow~enwikibooks
196 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Zollerriia
197 https://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Zondor~enwikibooks
455
List of Figures
• GFDL: Gnu Free Documentation License. http://www.gnu.org/licenses/fdl.

html
• cc-by-sa-3.0: Creative Commons Attribution ShareAlike 3.0 License. http://
creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/3.0/
• cc-by-2.0: Creative Commons Attribution 2.0 License. http://creativecommons.
org/licenses/by/2.0/
org/licenses/by/2.0/deed.en
• GPL: GNU General Public License. http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl-2.0.txt
• LGPL: GNU Lesser General Public License. http://www.gnu.org/licenses/lgpl.
html
• PD: This image is in the public domain.
• ATTR: The copyright holder of this file allows anyone to use it for any purpose,
provided that the copyright holder is properly attributed. Redistribution, derivative
work, commercial use, and all other use is permitted.
• EURO: This is the common (reverse) face of a euro coin. The copyright on the design
of the common face of the euro coins belongs to the European Commission. Authorised
is reproduction in a format without relief (drawings, paintings, films) provided they
are not detrimental to the image of the euro.
• LFK: Lizenz Freie Kunst. http://artlibre.org/licence/lal/de
• CFR: Copyright free use.
457
List of Figures
• EPL: Eclipse Public License. http://www.eclipse.org/org/documents/epl-v10.

php
Copies of the GPL, the LGPL as well as a GFDL are included in chapter Licenses198 . Please
note that images in the public domain do not require attribution. You may click on the
image numbers in the following table to open the webpage of the images in your webbrower.
458
List of Figures
1 created by en:b:User:Karl Wick199 on en:b:Main_Page200 GFDL

2 Annabel, Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, Zscout370
3 Theresa knott
4 Jusjih, Karl Wick, Webaware, Whiteknight
5 Green Giant, Karl Wick, Webaware, Whiteknight
6 H Padleckas201 , H Padleckas202
7 Benjah-bmm27, Cwbm (commons), Daniele Pugliesi,
Dbc334, JarektBot, Leyo, MGA73bot2, Maksim, Razorbliss
8 JSJohnson
9 JSJohnson
10 JSJohnson
11 JSJohnson
12 Benjah-bmm27, Daniele Pugliesi, FrescoBot, JarektBot,
Rhadamante
13 Benjah-bmm27203 , Benjah-bmm27204
14 Original uploader was Debacle481205 at en.wikibooks206 PD
15 Edgar181, JarektBot, MGA73bot2, Roland1952, Shizhao,
Slashme
16 BotMultichill, Daniele Pugliesi, Emijrpbot, Hazard-Bot,
JarektBot, MGA73bot2, Shizhao
17 DMacks207 (talk208 ), DMacks209 (talk210 ) PD
18 Benjah-bmm27, Daniele Pugliesi, Dexbot, Edgar181, Fres-
coBot, JarektBot, JuTa, NEUROtiker
19 Karl Wick, Whiteknight, Smallru211
20 Ayacop, Benjah-bmm27, Dexbot, JarektBot, NEUROtiker
21 User:Bangin212 , User:Bangin213 PD
22 Joel Holdsworth (Joelholdsworth214 ), Joel Holdsworth (Joel- PD
holdsworth215 )
holdsworth217 )
199 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/b:User:Karl_Wick
200 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/b:Main_Page
201 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:H_Padleckas
202 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:H_Padleckas
203 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Benjah-bmm27
204 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Benjah-bmm27
205 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/en:User:Debacle481
206 http://en.wikibooks.org
207 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:DMacks
208 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:DMacks
209 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:DMacks
210 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:DMacks
211 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Smallru
212 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Bangin
213 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Bangin
http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Joelholdsworth&action=edit&
214
redlink=1
https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Joelholdsworth&action=edit&
215
redlink=1
216
redlink=1
217
redlink=1
459
List of Figures
24 Yikrazuul218 , Yikrazuul219
holdsworth221 )
26 Karl Wick, Webaware, Whiteknight
27
29
30 Xeniorn
31 Xeniorn, Isatis78222 CC-BY-SA-3.0
32 Xeniorn
34
36 Xeniorn
37 Emijrpbot, Hazard-Bot, Hystrix, JarektBot, Kam Solusar,
Roland1952, K
38 Jü225 , Jü226 PD
39 Puppy8800227
40 Mark91228 , Mark91229 CC-BY-SA-3.0
41 Ben Mills
42 Ben Mills
231 233
43 NEUROtiker230 ⇌ , NEUROtiker232 ⇌ PD
44 BMacZero234 , BMacZero235 PD
53 Green Giant, Karl Wick, Whiteknight
218 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Yikrazuul
219 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Yikrazuul
220
redlink=1
221
redlink=1
222 https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Isatis78&action=edit&redlink=1
225 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:J%C3%BC
226 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:J%C3%BC
227 http://zh.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Puppy8800
228 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Mark91
229 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Mark91
230 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:NEUROtiker
231 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:NEUROtiker
232 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:NEUROtiker
233 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:NEUROtiker
234 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:BMacZero
235 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:BMacZero
460
List of Figures
237 239
54 NEUROtiker236 ⇌ , NEUROtiker238 ⇌ PD
55 Arrowsmaster240 , Arrowsmaster241 PD
56 Karl Wick, Sundance Raphael, Webaware, Whiteknight
57
70
71 NEUROtiker242 , NEUROtiker243 PD
72 Ewen
73 Ewen
74 Darklama, Karl Wick, Webaware, Whiteknight
76 V8rik244 GFDL
77 Benjah-bmm27, H Padleckas, HenkvD, JaGa, JarektBot,
Samulili
Samulili
79 Calvero.
80 Calvero.
81
82 en:User:Slashme245 CC-BY-SA-3.0
83 Roland Mattern PD
84 Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, JarektBot, Master Uegly
85 Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, JarektBot, Master Uegly, Wesal-
ius
86 Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, JarektBot
90 Aloneinthewild, Duesentrieb, HenkvD, JarektBot, Orgul-
lobot, Samulili, Termi commonswiki
237 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:NEUROtiker
239 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:NEUROtiker
240 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Arrowsmaster
241 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Arrowsmaster
244 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:V8rik
245 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Slashme
461
List of Figures
91
92 Lineweaver
93 Morivert246 , Morivert247
95 User:Paginazero250 , User:Paginazero251 PD
96 Aloneinthewild, Duesentrieb, HenkvD, JarektBot, Orgul-
lobot, Samulili, Termi commonswiki
97 Benjah-bmm27, Incnis Mrsi, JarektBot, PatríciaR
98 Aloneinthewild, AngelHerraez, Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot
99 Doit commonswiki, EDUCA33E, Emijrpbot, Fffred com-
monswiki, Inductiveload
100 Rogilbert
101 Unknown CC-BY-SA-3.0
102 V8rik252 GFDL
103 Ewen
104 Ewen
105 The original uploader was Gbleem253 at English PD
Wikipedia254
106 The original uploader was Mykhal255 at English PD
Wikipedia256
107 Unknown CC-BY-SA-3.0
108 User:Rob Hooft257 , User:Rob Hooft258 GFDL
109 Edgar181, JarektBot, MGA73bot2, PatríciaR, Rob Hooft
110 User:Rob Hooft259 , User:Rob Hooft260 GFDL
111 Aloneinthewild, BotMultichill, Edgar181, JarektBot,
MGA73bot2, Rob Hooft
112 Ben261 ; Yikrazuul262 , Ben263 ; Yikrazuul264
113 BorisTM, Conscious, Daniele Pugliesi, Edgar181, Emi-
jrpbot, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, K!roman, MGA73bot2,
Matthias M., PatríciaR
114 Wikimuzg265 , Wikimuzg266 GFDL
246 http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Morivert&action=edit&redlink=1
247 https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Morivert&action=edit&redlink=1
250 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Paginazero
251 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Paginazero
253 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Gbleem
254 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
255 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Mykhal
256 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/
257 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Rob_Hooft
258 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Rob_Hooft
259 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Rob_Hooft
260 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Rob_Hooft
265 http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wikimuzg&action=edit&redlink=1
266 https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Wikimuzg&action=edit&redlink=1
462
List of Figures
115 BorisTM, Edgar181, EugeneZelenko, Geierunited common-

swiki, JarektBot, MGA73bot2, Samulili
116 Fabiuccio enwikibooks
117 Original uploader was Karl Wick267 at en.wikibooks268 PD
118 Darklama, Green Giant, Karl Wick, Webaware,
Whiteknight
120 Karl Wick269 at English Wikibooks270 PD
121 Original uploader was Ghostal271 at en.wikibooks272 PD
125 Edgar181279 , Edgar181280
126 Darklama, Ghostal, Webaware
127 Fabartus, Ghostal, Webaware
128 Ghostal, Webaware
131 Mark Sevecka281 with ISIS Draw(TM) PD
132 Pete Davis
133 Pete Davis
134 Pete Davis
135 Pete Davis
136 Pete Davis
137 Pete Davis
138 Pete Davis
139 Pete Davis
140 Pete Davis
141 Pete Davis
142 Pete Davis
Samulili
Samulili
Samulili
267 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/en:User:Karl_Wick
269 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/User:Karl_Wick
270 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/
271 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/en:User:Ghostal
279 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Edgar181
280 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Edgar181
281 http://de.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Msevecka
463
List of Figures

Samulili
147 Pete Davis
148 Pete Davis
149 Pete Davis
150 Pete Davis
151 Pete Davis
152 Pete Davis
153 Pete Davis
154 Pete Davis
155 Pete Davis
156 Pete Davis
157 Benjah-bmm27, Bilderbot, Emijrpbot, MGA73bot2, Nyt-
tend, Rhadamante, YaCBot
158 Pdavis68
159 Pdavis68
160 Pdavis68
162 Pete Davis
163 Pdavis68
164 Darklama, Hyper enwikibooks
166 user:Vyacheslav Nasretdinov284 , user:Vyacheslav Nasretdi- PD
nov285
167 Pete Davis
168 Pete Davis
169 H Padleckas286 GFDL
170 V8rik287
171 V8rik288
172 Az1568, DenLianda enwikibooks, Webaware
173 Az1568, DenLianda enwikibooks, Webaware
174 BotMultichill, Conscious, David Berardan, JarektBot, Leyo,
Shizhao
175 Yikrazuul289 , Yikrazuul290
176 Arrowsmaster291 , Arrowsmaster292 PD
177 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Dexbot, Edgar181, Emijrpbot, Eu-
geneZelenko, Hystrix, JarektBot
http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Vyacheslav_Nasretdinov&action=
284
edit&redlink=1
https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Vyacheslav_Nasretdinov&action=
285
edit&redlink=1
286 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:H_Padleckas
291 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Arrowsmaster
292 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Arrowsmaster
464
List of Figures
178 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Emijrpbot, EugeneZelenko, Guy-

brush Threepwood, Hazard-Bot, Hystrix, JarektBot,
Kopiersperre, Nothingserious
179 Benjah-bmm27, BotMultichill, Cwbm (commons)
180 Original uploader was Hyper293 at en.wikibooks294 PD
181 BenFrantzDale commonswiki, Benjah-bmm27, Hazard-Bot,
JarektBot, Kerina yin, SchlurcherBot, K
182 CC-BY-2.5
• Ozonolysis.png295 : Chemistorge
• derivative work: Chemistorge296 (talk297 )
,
• Ozonolysis.png298 : Chemistorge
• derivative work: Chemistorge299 (talk300 )
183 BotMultichill, BotMultichillT, Edgar181, JarektBot, Kur-

gus, MGA73bot2, Rob Hooft, SieBot
184 Toby Phillips301 , Toby Phillips302
185 Gentgeen, Karl Wick, Neoptolemus, Webaware
186 Sah002
187 Adrignola, Cfromber
188 Adrignola, Cfromber
189 Cfromber
190 Cfromber
191 Cfromber
192 Cfromber
193 Bilderbot, BotMultichill, Cwbm (commons), Emijrpbot,
Ewen, Grimlock, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, MGA73bot2,
Matthias M., OgreBot
194 Danh303 , Danh304 GFDL
293 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/en:User:Hyper
295 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Ozonolysis.png
296 http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Chemistorge&action=edit&redlink=1
http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User_talk:Chemistorge&action=edit&
297
redlink=1
298 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:Ozonolysis.png
https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Chemistorge&action=edit&redlink=
299
1
https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User_talk:Chemistorge&action=edit&
300
redlink=1
301 http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tobes00&action=edit&redlink=1
302 https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Tobes00&action=edit&redlink=1
303 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Danh
304 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Danh
465
List of Figures
195 GFDL
• File:-TableImage.svg305 : Bastique306
• File:-TableImage.png307 : Maveric149308
• derivative work : Adrignola309
,
• File:-TableImage.svg310 : Bastique311
• File:-TableImage.png312 : Maveric149313
• derivative work : Adrignola314
196 Aloneinthewild, Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, MGA73bot2,

Polimerek
197 Benjah-bmm27, HenkvD, JarektBot, MGA73bot2,
Polimerek
198 JarektBot, MGA73bot2, Polimerek, Walkerma, K
199 Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, MGA73bot2, Polimerek, Walk-
erma, K
200 CommonsDelinker, Edgar181, Fred the Oyster, Leyo
201 Benjah-bmm27, Emijrpbot, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot,
MGA73bot2, Polimerek
202 Benjah-bmm27, Daniele Pugliesi, JarektBot, MGA73bot2,
Polimerek, Walkerma, K
203 FSII, JarektBot, Karelj, Nanotube7 commonswiki,
Rhadamante, Werckmeister, robot
204 Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, MGA73bot2, Polimerek, Walk-
erma
205 Original uploader was Oks315 at it.wikipedia316
206 Original uploader was JSJohnson317 at en.wikibooks318
207 Original uploader was JSJohnson319 at en.wikibooks320
208 JSJohnson
209 Xeniorn
210 Carhas0 enwikibooks
305 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:-TableImage.svg
306 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Bastique
http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=File:-TableImage.png&action=edit&
307
redlink=1
308 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Maveric149
309 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Adrignola
310 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/File:-TableImage.svg
311 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Bastique
https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=File:-TableImage.png&action=edit&
312
redlink=1
313 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Maveric149
314 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Adrignola
315 http://it.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Oks
316 http://it.wikipedia.org
317 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/en:User:JSJohnson
319 http://en.wikibooks.org/wiki/en:User:JSJohnson
466
List of Figures

214 Karl Wick, Whiteknight
215 JSJohnson
216 Az1568, Oasisbob enwikibooks
219 Aloneinthewild, Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot
220 Benjah-bmm27, Bvs-aca, Emijrpbot, EugeneZelenko,
Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Kw0
221 Benjah-bmm27323 (talk324 · contribs325 ), Benjah-bmm27326
(talk327 · contribs328 )
222 Ben Mills
223 Ben Mills329 , Ben Mills330
225 Chanueting, Hystrix, JarektBot, Jynto
226 SVG version by Patricia.fidi333 , SVG version by Patri-
cia.fidi334
227 Sarregouset335 (Talk)336 , Sarregouset337 (Talk)338 GFDL
228 Benjah-bmm27, Bryan Derksen, Edgar181, JarektBot
229 Calvero. PD
230 Yikrazuul339 ; Sarregouset340 (Talk)341 , Yikrazuul342 ; Sar- PD
regouset343 (Talk)344
231 Aloneinthewild, Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Dryke, Emijrp-
bot, EugeneZelenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Rhadamante,
SteinsplitterBot
232 Ed (Edgar181345 ), Ed (Edgar181346 )
233 1989, Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, Jynto, RobertLechner
234 Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, Esquilo, JarektBot
324 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:Benjah-bmm27
325 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/Special:Contributions/Benjah-bmm27
327 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:Benjah-bmm27
328 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/Special:Contributions/Benjah-bmm27
333 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Patricia.fidi
334 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Patricia.fidi
335 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Sarregouset
336 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:Sarregouset
337 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Sarregouset
338 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:Sarregouset
340 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Sarregouset
341 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:Sarregouset
343 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Sarregouset
344 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:Sarregouset
345 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:Edgar181
346 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User_talk:Edgar181
467
List of Figures
235 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Emijrpbot, EugeneZelenko, Hazard-

Bot, JarektBot, KlaudiuMihaila, Rhadamante
236 Benjah-bmm27, Cwbm (commons), Edgar181, JarektBot,
Jynto, Leyo
Bot, JarektBot, KlaudiuMihaila, Rhadamante
238 User Cacycle347 on en.wikipedia348 GFDL
241 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Dryke, EugeneZelenko, Hystrix,
JarektBot
243 IngerAlHaosului353 , IngerAlHaosului354
244 Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, Rhadamante
245 Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, RobertLechner
246 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Daniele Pugliesi, Emijrpbot, Eu-
geneZelenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Jynto
Bot, JarektBot, Jynto
248 Benjah-bmm27, Cwbm (commons), JarektBot, Mikayé
249 converted to svg by -- De.Nobelium355 , converted to svg by
-- De.Nobelium356
250 Benjah-bmm27, Bryan Derksen, Calvero, Dryke, Haneluya,
Interiot commonswiki, JarektBot, Samulili
251
252 Aloneinthewild, Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, Emijrp-
bot, EugeneZelenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot
bot, EugeneZelenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Walkerma
254 Ben Mills
Bot, Hystrix, JarektBot
256 No machine readable author provided. Mysid357 assumed GFDL
(based on copyright claims)., No machine readable author
provided. Mysid358 assumed (based on copyright claims).
257 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, Emijrpbot, EugeneZe-
lenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Sarregouset
Bot, JarektBot, Kw0, Maciejo93, Mixtures, Sarregouset
347 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Cacycle
348 http://en.wikipedia.org
353 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:IngerAlHaosului
354 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:IngerAlHaosului
355 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:De.Nobelium
356 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:De.Nobelium
357 http://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Mysid
358 https://commons.wikimedia.org/wiki/User:Mysid
468
List of Figures
259 Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot

261
lenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Jynto
263 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Dryke, Emijrpbot, EugeneZelenko,
Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Jynto
264
265 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Emijrpbot, EugeneZelenko, Fvas-
concellos, Hazard-Bot, Hystrix, JarektBot, Luigi Chiesa
bot, EugeneZelenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Perhelion
267
Bot, Hystrix, JarektBot
269 Benjah-bmm27, BotMultichill, Cwbm (commons)
270
271 JarektBot, Kw0, MGA73bot2, Samulili, K
272 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, EugeneZelenko, Hazard-
Bot, Hystrix, JarektBot, SchlurcherBot
273 Cwbm (commons), Edgar181, Istvánka, JarektBot, N-regen,
Panoramix303, SalomonCeb
275 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, EugeneZelenko, Hazard-Bot, Jarek-
tBot, Jynto, Rhadamante, SchlurcherBot
lenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot
277 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Edgar181
278
279 Benjah-bmm27, Hystrix, JarektBot, Rhadamante, Sar-
regouset
280
281 Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, Jynto
282
284 Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, Jynto
285 Benjah-bmm27, JarektBot, RobertLechner
286 Ben Mills
287 1989, Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, Emijrpbot, Eu-
geneZelenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Luigi Chiesa
288
289
290
291 Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, Hystrix, JarektBot
292 http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/User:Edgar181
bot, EugeneZelenko, Hazard-Bot, JarektBot, Vladsinger
294 Benjah-bmm27, Edgar181, JarektBot, MGA73bot2, K
469
List of Figures
295 Benjah-bmm27359 , Benjah-bmm27360 PD

296
297
298
299 Basvb, Benjah-bmm27, Bryan Derksen, Edgar181, Emi-
jrpbot, EugeneZelenko, Grendelkhan, Hazard-Bot, Hystrix,
JarektBot
301 Moadeeb363 , Moadeeb364
302 Gentgeen, Karl Wick, Neoptolemus, Webaware
363 http://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Moadeeb&action=edit&redlink=1
364 https://commons.wikimedia.org/w/index.php?title=User:Moadeeb&action=edit&redlink=1
470
137 Licenses
137.1 GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

Version 3, 29 June 2007 The “Corresponding Source” for a work in object code form means all different server (operated by you or a third party) that supports equiv- your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to no-
the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable alent copying facilities, provided you maintain clear directions next to tify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days
Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/> work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source. Re- after the cessation.
to control those activities. However, it does not include the work’s gardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source, you remain
System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but these requirements. * e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by
license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble
which are not part of the work. For example, Corresponding Source transmission, provided you inform other peers where the object code some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice
includes interface definition files associated with source files for the and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder,
The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for software work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked public at no charge under subsection 6d. and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the
and other kinds of works. subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require, such as notice.
by intimate data communication or control flow between those sub- A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed programs and other parts of the work. from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be in- Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
to take away your freedom to share and change the works. By con- cluded in conveying the object code work. licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
trast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can re- this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
freedom to share and change all versions of a program–to make sure generate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source.
A “User Product” is either (1) a “consumer product”, which means any reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
it remains free software for all its users. We, the Free Software Foun-
tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family, material under section 10. 9. Acceptance Not Required for Having
dation, use the GNU General Public License for most of our software;
The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorpora- Copies.
it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors. You
work. 2. Basic Permissions. tion into a dwelling. In determining whether a product is a consumer
can apply it to your programs, too.
product, doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage. For a You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run
All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copy- particular product received by a particular user, “normally used” refers a copy of the Program. Ancillary propagation of a covered work oc-
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price.
right on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated con- to a typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the curring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission to
Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
ditions are met. This License explicitly affirms your unlimited per- status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance. However, nothing
the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for them
mission to run the unmodified Program. The output from running a user actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product. A other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify
if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want
covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has any covered work. These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept
it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free
content, constitutes a covered work. This License acknowledges your substantial commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such this License. Therefore, by modifying or propagating a covered work,
programs, and that you know you can do these things.
rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law. uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product. you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so. 10. Automatic
Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not con- “Installation Information” for a User Product means any methods, pro-
these rights or asking you to surrender the rights. Therefore, you have
vey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in cedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically re-
certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if you
force. You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product ceives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and prop-
modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you from a modified version of its Corresponding Source. The information agate that work, subject to this License. You are not responsible for
with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that control copyright. Those thus making or running the covered works modification has been made. An “entity transaction” is a transaction transferring control of an or-
you received. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction ganization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an orga-
the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or nization, or merging organizations. If propagation of a covered work
their rights. your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as results from an entity transaction, each party to that transaction who
part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work
Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps: Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the party’s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous
User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed
(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License the conditions stated below. Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10 paragraph, plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of
term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the Corre-
giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it. makes it unnecessary. 3. Protecting Users’ Legal Rights From Anti- the work from the predecessor in interest, if the predecessor has it or
sponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by
Circumvention Law. the Installation Information. But this requirement does not apply if can get it with reasonable efforts.
For the developers’ and authors’ protection, the GPL clearly explains neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modi-
that there is no warranty for this free software. For both users’ and No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological fied object code on the User Product (for example, the work has been You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
authors’ sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article installed in ROM). rights granted or affirmed under this License. For example, you may
changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of rights
authors of previous versions. similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures. granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation (in-
The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include
a requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or up- cluding a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any
Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run mod- dates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for sale, or
When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
ified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed. importing the Program or any portion of it. 11. Patents.
circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circum-
can do so. This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protect- vention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself ma-
ing users’ freedom to change the software. The systematic pattern of to the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit opera- terially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates A “contributor” is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use, which tion or modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the the rules and protocols for communication across the network. License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based. The
is precisely where it is most unacceptable. Therefore, we have designed work’s users, your or third parties’ legal rights to forbid circumvention work thus licensed is called the contributor’s “contributor version”.
this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products. If of technological measures. 4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
such problems arise substantially in other domains, we stand ready to Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information pro-
vided, in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly A contributor’s “essential patent claims” are all patent claims owned
extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL,
You may convey verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you documented (and with an implementation available to the public in or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or hereafter
as needed to protect the freedom of users.
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appro- source code form), and must require no special password or key for acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted by this
priately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice; keep in- unpacking, reading or copying. 7. Additional Terms. License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version, but do
Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents. not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of
tact all notices stating that this License and any non-permissive terms
States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of soft- further modification of the contributor version. For purposes of this
added in accord with section 7 apply to the code; keep intact all no-
ware on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to “Additional permissions” are terms that supplement the terms of this definition, “control” includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a
tices of the absence of any warranty; and give all recipients a copy of
avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions. Ad- manner consistent with the requirements of this License.
this License along with the Program.
make it effectively proprietary. To prevent this, the GPL assures that ditional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be
patents cannot be used to render the program non-free. treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent that
You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you con- they are valid under applicable law. If additional permissions apply Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
vey, and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee. 5. only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately under patent license under the contributor’s essential patent claims, to make,
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modi- use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and propa-
Conveying Modified Source Versions. those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by this
fication follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0. Definitions. gate the contents of its contributor version.
License without regard to the additional permissions.
You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications
“This License” refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License. In the following three paragraphs, a “patent license” is any express
to produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a
remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part
“Copyright” also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds patent (such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant
of it. (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
of works, such as semiconductor masks. not to sue for patent infringement). To “grant” such a patent license
* a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified removal in certain cases when you modify the work.) You may place
to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to
it, and giving a relevant date. * b) The work must carry prominent additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
“The Program” refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this Li- enforce a patent against the party.
notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
cense. Each licensee is addressed as “you”. “Licensees” and “recipients” added under section 7. This requirement modifies the requirement in
may be individuals or organizations. section 4 to “keep intact all notices”. * c) You must license the entire If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
work, as a whole, under this License to anyone who comes into pos-
add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through
To “modify” a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work session of a copy. This License will therefore apply, along with any
of that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms: a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of applicable section 7 additional terms, to the whole of the work, and
an exact copy. The resulting work is called a “modified version” of the all its parts, regardless of how they are packaged. This License gives then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
earlier work or a work “based on” the earlier work. no permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not * a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent
invalidate such permission if you have separately received it. * d) If terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or * b) Requiring preser- license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner consistent
the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display Appropriate vation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent license to
A “covered work” means either the unmodified Program or a work
Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive interfaces that that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works downstream recipients. “Knowingly relying” means you have actual
based on the Program.
do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your work need not make containing it; or * c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the cov-
them do so. that material, or requiring that modified versions of such material be ered work in a country, or your recipient’s use of the covered work
To “propagate” a work means to do anything with it that, without per- marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version; or * in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
mission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or au- country that you have reason to believe are valid.
under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a computer or A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
thors of the material; or * e) Declining to grant rights under trademark
modifying a private copy. Propagation includes copying, distribution works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
law for use of some trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or * If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrange-
(with or without modification), making available to the public, and in and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material ment, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a covered
some countries other activities as well. in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of it) with work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the
“aggregate” if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used
contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for any liability covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify or convey a
to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation’s users beyond
To “convey” a work means any kind of propagation that enables other that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license you grant is
what the individual works permit. Inclusion of a covered work in an
parties to make or receive copies. Mere interaction with a user through and authors. automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works
aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of
a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying. based on it.
the aggregate. 6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
All other non-permissive additional terms are considered “further re-
An interactive user interface displays “Appropriate Legal Notices” to strictions” within the meaning of section 10. If the Program as you A patent license is “discriminatory” if it does not include within the
You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of
the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible fea- received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is gov- scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is conditioned on the
sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the machine-readable
ture that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2) tells the erned by this License along with a term that is a further restriction, non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted
Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, in one of these
user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the extent that you may remove that term. If a license document contains a further under this License. You may not convey a covered work if you are
ways:
warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the work under restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License, you a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business
this License, and how to view a copy of this License. If the inter- may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that li- of distributing software, under which you make payment to the third
face presents a list of user commands or options, such as a menu, a * a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product (in- cense document, provided that the further restriction does not survive party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work, and
prominent item in the list meets this criterion. 1. Source Code. cluding a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the Corre- such relicensing or conveying. under which the third party grants, to any of the parties who would
sponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used
receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory patent license (a)
for software interchange. * b) Convey the object code in, or embodied
The “source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you (or
in, a physical product (including a physical distribution medium), ac-
making modifications to it. “Object code” means any non-source form must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the additional copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily for and in connection
companied by a written offer, valid for at least three years and valid
of a work. terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating where to find the with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work,
for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that prod-
applicable terms. unless you entered into that arrangement, or that patent license was
uct model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
A “Standard Interface” means an interface that either is an official granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product
standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of that is covered by this License, on a durable physical medium cus- Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that is tomarily used for software interchange, for a price no more than your Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any
form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions; the above
widely used among developers working in that language. reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source, or implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise
requirements apply either way. 8. Termination.
(2) access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at be available to you under applicable patent law. 12. No Surrender of
The “System Libraries” of an executable work include anything, other no charge. * c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a Others’ Freedom.
than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source. This You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and only provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to propagate or If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord with sub- modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do
Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an section 6b. * d) Convey the object code by offering access from a this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot con-
implementation is available to the public in source code form. A “Ma- designated place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to paragraph of section 11). vey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations
jor Component”, in this context, means a major essential component the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a con-
(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system (if no further charge. You need not require recipients to copy the Corre- However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license sequence you may not convey it at all. For example, if you agree to
any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to produce sponding Source along with the object code. If the place to copy the from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, un- terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from
the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it. object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source may be on a less and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates those to whom you convey the Program, the only way you could satisfy
both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions. If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
conveying the Program. 13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public However, no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copy- cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms, reviewing along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
License. right holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version. 15. courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an abso-
Disclaimer of Warranty. lute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program, unless a
warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper
Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have permis- in return for a fee. mail.
sion to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under
version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single com- THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EX-
TENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short notice
bined work, and to convey the resulting work. The terms of this Li-
OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLD- to Your New Programs like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
cense will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work, but
the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License, ERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM
section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EX- If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest <program> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program
combination as such. 14. Revised Versions of this License. PRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK terms. certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new ver- AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PRO-
sions of the GNU General Public License from time to time. Such new GRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DE-
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to
versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ FECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SER- The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the
attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the
in detail to address new problems or concerns. VICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. Limitation of Liability. appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, your pro-
exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright”
line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. gram’s commands might be different; for a GUI interface, you would
use an “about box”.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program
specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Pub- IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
lic License “or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if nec-
of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU essary. For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCI- This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by GNU GPL, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
Public License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free DENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF
THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or (at
Software Foundation. your option) any later version.
BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING REN- The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your
DERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine
If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPER- This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary
of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy’s public ATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the
statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR- GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License. But first,
choose that version for the Program. OF SUCH DAMAGES. 17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16. POSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. please read <http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
137.2 GNU Free Documentation License

Version 1.3, 3 November 2008 following text that translates XYZ in another language. (Here XYZ in their titles. Section numbers or the equivalent are not considered (section 1) will typically require changing the actual title. 9. TERMI-
stands for a specific section name mentioned below, such as ”Acknowl- part of the section titles. * M. Delete any section Entitled ”Endorse- NATION
Copyright © 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, edgements”, ”Dedications”, ”Endorsements”, or ”History”.) To ”Preserve ments”. Such a section may not be included in the Modified Version.
Inc. <http://fsf.org/> the Title” of such a section when you modify the Document means that * N. Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ”Endorsements” You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
it remains a section ”Entitled XYZ” according to this definition. or to conflict in title with any Invariant Section. * O. Preserve any except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt oth-
Warranty Disclaimers. erwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and will
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this
license document, but changing it is not allowed. 0. PREAMBLE The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice automatically terminate your rights under this License.
which states that this License applies to the Document. These War- If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or appen-
ranty Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this dices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material copied However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license
The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other impli- from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all of from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally, un-
functional and useful document ”free” in the sense of freedom: to as- cation that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has no these sections as invariant. To do this, add their titles to the list of less and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates
sure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it, with or effect on the meaning of this License. 2. VERBATIM COPYING Invariant Sections in the Modified Version’s license notice. These titles your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder fails to no-
without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially. Sec-
must be distinct from any other section titles. tify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days
ondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way to
get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible for You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either after the cessation.
modifications made by others. commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the You may add a section Entitled ”Endorsements”, provided it con-
copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies tains nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated
to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no parties—for example, statements of peer review or that the text has permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by
This License is a kind of ”copyleft”, which means that derivative works other conditions whatsoever to those of this License. You may not use been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a some reasonable means, this is the first time you have received notice
of the document must themselves be free in the same sense. It com- technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further copy- standard. of violation of this License (for any work) from that copyright holder,
plements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft license ing of the copies you make or distribute. However, you may accept
designed for free software. and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the
compensation in exchange for copies. If you distribute a large enough notice.
You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text,
number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
and a passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end
We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
of the list of Cover Texts in the Modified Version. Only one passage Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
software, because free software needs free documentation: a free pro- You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and of Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
gram should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the you may publicly display copies. 3. COPYING IN QUANTITY (or through arrangements made by) any one entity. If the Document this License. If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
software does. But this License is not limited to software manuals;
already includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does
it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have you or by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on not give you any rights to use it. 10. FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS
whether it is published as a printed book. We recommend this Li-
printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the behalf of, you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, LICENSE
cense principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
Document’s license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the on explicit permission from the previous publisher that added the old
1. APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover Texts: one.
The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on the
This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time. Such
back cover. Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify you as The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this Li-
that contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
the publisher of these copies. The front cover must present the full title cense give permission to use their names for publicity for or to as-
be distributed under the terms of this License. Such a notice grants a may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. See
with all words of the title equally prominent and visible. You may add sert or imply endorsement of any Modified Version. 5. COMBINING
world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that work http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/.
other material on the covers in addition. Copying with changes limited DOCUMENTS
under the conditions stated herein. The ”Document”, below, refers to to the covers, as long as they preserve the title of the Document and
any such manual or work. Any member of the public is a licensee, and satisfy these conditions, can be treated as verbatim copying in other Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
is addressed as ”you”. You accept the license if you copy, modify or respects. You may combine the Document with other documents released under If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
distribute the work in a way requiring permission under copyright law. this License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified License ”or any later version” applies to it, you have the option of
versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the In- following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit legibly, variant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and list
A ”Modified Version” of the Document means any work containing the of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit reasonably) on the them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its license
Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with modifica- Free Software Foundation. If the Document does not specify a version
actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent pages. notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
tions and/or translated into another language. number of this License, you may choose any version ever published
(not as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation. If the Document
If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this License
A ”Secondary Section” is a named appendix or a front-matter sec- The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transpar- can be used, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of a version
tion of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
ent copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Document.
the publishers or authors of the Document to the Document’s overall copy. If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name
copy a computer-network location from which the general network- 11. RELICENSING
subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall but different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
using public has access to download using public-standard network
directly within that overall subject. (Thus, if the Document is in part adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original au-
protocols a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added
a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain any thor or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number. ”Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site” (or ”MMC Site”) means any
material. If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably pru-
mathematics.) The relationship could be a matter of historical connec- Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of Invariant World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
dent steps, when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity,
tion with the subject or with related matters, or of legal, commercial, Sections in the license notice of the combined work. provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works. A public
to ensure that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the
philosophical, ethical or political position regarding them. stated location until at least one year after the last time you distribute wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server. A ”Massive
an Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ”History” Multiauthor Collaboration” (or ”MMC”) contained in the site means
edition to the public. in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled ”His- any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC site.
The ”Invariant Sections” are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice that tory”; likewise combine any sections Entitled ”Acknowledgements”, and
says that the Document is released under this License. If a section does any sections Entitled ”Dedications”. You must delete all sections En- ”CC-BY-SA” means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike
It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not allowed to be titled ”Endorsements”. 6. COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS 3.0 license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-
Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to
designated as Invariant. The Document may contain zero Invariant give them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the profit corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
Sections. If the Document does not identify any Invariant Sections Document. 4. MODIFICATIONS You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other doc- California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license published
then there are none. uments released under this License, and replace the individual copies by that same organization.
of this License in the various documents with a single copy that is
You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document un-
The ”Cover Texts” are certain short passages of text that are listed, as included in the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this ”Incorporate” means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
der the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that License for verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other in part, as part of another Document.
the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
the Document is released under this License. A Front-Cover Text may respects.
Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words. and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy An MMC is ”eligible for relicensing” if it is licensed under this License,
of it. In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version: You may extract a single document from such a collection, and dis- and if all works that were first published under this License somewhere
A ”Transparent” copy of the Document means a machine-readable tribute it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole or in
copy, represented in a format whose specification is available to the * A. Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title dis- of this License into the extracted document, and follow this License part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections, and
general public, that is suitable for revising the document straightfor- tinct from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions in all other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document. 7. (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
wardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of pixels) (which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section of AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available drawing the Document). You may use the same title as a previous version if The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in
editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or for automatic the original publisher of that version gives permission. * B. List on A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate the site under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August
translation to a variety of formats suitable for input to text formatters. the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities responsible and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or 1, 2009, provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing. ADDENDUM:
A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file format whose markup, for authorship of the modifications in the Modified Version, together distribution medium, is called an ”aggregate” if the copyright resulting How to use this License for your documents
or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart or discourage sub- with at least five of the principal authors of the Document (all of its from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights of the com-
sequent modification by readers is not Transparent. An image format principal authors, if it has fewer than five), unless they release you pilation’s users beyond what the individual works permit. When the
is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount of text. A copy To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy
from this requirement. * C. State on the Title page the name of the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not apply to
that is not ”Transparent” is called ”Opaque”. of the License in the document and put the following copyright and
publisher of the Modified Version, as the publisher. * D. Preserve the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves derivative
license notices just after the title page:
all the copyright notices of the Document. * E. Add an appropriate works of the Document.
Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain copyright notice for your modifications adjacent to the other copyright
ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, LaTeX input for- notices. * F. Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license Copyright (C) YEAR YOUR NAME. Permission is granted to copy,
If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these copies distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU
mat, SGML or XML using a publicly available DTD, and standard- notice giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of the
conforming simple HTML, PostScript or PDF designed for human the terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below. Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version pub-
entire aggregate, the Document’s Cover Texts may be placed on cov- lished by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections,
modification. Examples of transparent image formats include PNG, * G. Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections ers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the electronic
XCF and JPG. Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can and required Cover Texts given in the Document’s license notice. * no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license
equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form. Otherwise is included in the section entitled ”GNU Free Documentation License”.
be read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or H. Include an unaltered copy of this License. * I. Preserve the section they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole aggregate.
XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are not generally Entitled ”History”, Preserve its Title, and add to it an item stating at 8. TRANSLATION
available, and the machine-generated HTML, PostScript or PDF pro- least the title, year, new authors, and publisher of the Modified Ver- If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover
duced by some word processors for output purposes only. sion as given on the Title Page. If there is no section Entitled ”History” Texts, replace the ”with … Texts.” line with this:
in the Document, create one stating the title, year, authors, and pub- Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may distribute
lisher of the Document as given on its Title Page, then add an item translations of the Document under the terms of section 4. Replacing
The ”Title Page” means, for a printed book, the title page itself, plus Invariant Sections with translations requires special permission from with the Invariant Sections being LIST THEIR TITLES, with the
such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material this describing the Modified Version as stated in the previous sentence. * Front-Cover Texts being LIST, and with the Back-Cover Texts being
J. Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for their copyright holders, but you may include translations of some or all
License requires to appear in the title page. For works in formats Invariant Sections in addition to the original versions of these Invari- LIST.
which do not have any title page as such, ”Title Page” means the text public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise the
network locations given in the Document for previous versions it was ant Sections. You may include a translation of this License, and all the
near the most prominent appearance of the work’s title, preceding the license notices in the Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, pro- If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
beginning of the body of the text. based on. These may be placed in the ”History” section. You may omit
a network location for a work that was published at least four years vided that you also include the original English version of this License combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the sit-
before the Document itself, or if the original publisher of the version it and the original versions of those notices and disclaimers. In case of a uation.
The ”publisher” means any person or entity that distributes copies of refers to gives permission. * K. For any section Entitled ”Acknowledge- disagreement between the translation and the original version of this
the Document to the public. ments” or ”Dedications”, Preserve the Title of the section, and preserve License or a notice or disclaimer, the original version will prevail. If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
in the section all the substance and tone of each of the contributor ac- recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
A section ”Entitled XYZ” means a named subunit of the Document knowledgements and/or dedications given therein. * L. Preserve all If a section in the Document is Entitled ”Acknowledgements”, ”Dedi- free software license, such as the GNU General Public License, to per-
whose title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses the Invariant Sections of the Document, unaltered in their text and cations”, or ”History”, the requirement (section 4) to Preserve its Title mit their use in free software.
137.3 GNU Lesser General Public License
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE The “Corresponding Application Code” for a Combined Work means You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that, You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library
the object code and/or source code for the Application, including any taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the portions side by side in a single library together with other library facilities that
Version 3, 29 June 2007 data and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse engineer- are not Applications and are not covered by this License, and convey
from the Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Com- ing for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of the follow- such a combined library under terms of your choice, if you do both of
bined Work. 1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL. ing: the following:
Copyright © 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License * a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL. 2. Conveying * a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work
license document, but changing it is not allowed. that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities,
Modified Versions. conveyed under the terms of this License. * b) Give prominent no-
covered by this License. * b) Accompany the Combined Work with a
copy of the GNU GPL and this license document. * c) For a Com- tice with the combined library that part of it is a work based on the
This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a fa- Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined
the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public Li- bined Work that displays copyright notices during execution, include
cility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application that the copyright notice for the Library among these notices, as well as a form of the same work.
cense, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below. 0. uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the facility
Additional Definitions. reference directing the user to the copies of the GNU GPL and this
is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified version: license document. * d) Do one of the following: o 0) Convey the 6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.
Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this License, and
As used herein, “this License” refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser * a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to the Corresponding Application Code in a form suitable for, and under
General Public License, and the “GNU GPL” refers to version 3 of the ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the function terms that permit, the user to recombine or relink the Application The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new ver-
GNU General Public License. or data, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its with a modified version of the Linked Version to produce a modified sions of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time.
purpose remains meaningful, or * b) under the GNU GPL, with none Combined Work, in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but
“The Library” refers to a covered work governed by this License, other of the additional permissions of this License applicable to that copy. GPL for conveying Corresponding Source. o 1) Use a suitable shared may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below. library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism
3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files. is one that (a) uses at run time a copy of the Library already present Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library
An “Application” is any work that makes use of an interface provided on the user’s computer system, and (b) will operate properly with a as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU
by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library. Defin- The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from modified version of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Lesser General Public License “or any later version” applies to it, you
ing a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode of a header file that is part of the Library. You may convey such object Linked Version. * e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that
using an interface provided by the Library. code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated ma- would otherwise be required to provide such information under section published version or of any later version published by the Free Software
terial is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure layouts 6 of the GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is Foundation. If the Library as you received it does not specify a version
and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates (ten or necessary to install and execute a modified version of the Combined number of the GNU Lesser General Public License, you may choose
A “Combined Work” is a work produced by combining or linking an Work produced by recombining or relinking the Application with a
Application with the Library. The particular version of the Library fewer lines in length), you do both of the following: any version of the GNU Lesser General Public License ever published
modified version of the Linked Version. (If you use option 4d0, the by the Free Software Foundation.
with which the Combined Work was made is also called the “Linked Installation Information must accompany the Minimal Corresponding
Version”. * a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the Source and Corresponding Application Code. If you use option 4d1,
Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by you must provide the Installation Information in the manner specified If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide
The “Minimal Corresponding Source” for a Combined Work means the this License. * b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying Corresponding Source.) whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License
Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source GPL and this license document. shall apply, that proxy’s public statement of acceptance of any ver-
code for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, sion is permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the
are based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version. 4. Combined Works. 5. Combined Libraries. Library.

Organic Chemistry PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Organic Chemistry PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Organic Chemistry

3 Unit 1: Foundational concepts of organic chemistry 11

4 History of organic chemistry 13

7 Electronegativity content from Wikipedia 25

9 Electron dot structures & formal charge 39

11 Acids and bases 51

12 Unit 2: Alkanes and cycloalkanes 55

21 Methane and carbon chains 91

27 Newman projections and conformers 117

29 Stereoisomers and chirality 121

31 Unit 3: Stereochemistry 127

33 Optical activity 143

33.2 What Is Plane Polarized Light? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

35 Meso compounds 149

38 Diastereomers with stereocenters 155

41 R-S notational system 163

42 Unit 4: Haloalkanes 165

46 Unit 5: Alcohols 179

50 Unit 6: Amine 189

51 Unit 7: Alkenes 191

52 Naming Alkenes 193

54 Relative stability 199

56 Substitution and Elimination Reaction Mechanisms 209

58 Unit 8: Alkynes 221

59 The triple carbon-carbon bond 223

60 Alkyne properties 225

61 Naming alkynes 227

63 Alkyne reactions 231

64 Unit 9: Dienes 233

65 Kinds of dienes 235

67 Diene properties and reactions 239

68 Unit 10: Aromatics 241

69 History of Aromatics 243

70 Benzene Structure 245

72 Monosubstituted Benzenes 251

73 Polysubstituted Benzenes 257

74 Aromatics in history 259

75 Benzene structure 261

76 Benzene properties 263

77 Overview of electrophilic aromatic substitution reactions 265

78 Friedel-Crafts alkylation 267

79 Friedel-Crafts acylation 269

80 Aromatic reactions 271

82 Nucleophilic Aromatic Substitution 275

83 Electrophilic Aromatic Substitution 277

84 External links 283

86 Unit 11: Ketones and aldehydes 287

87 Unit 12: Carboxylic acids 295

91 Unit 13: Carboxylic acid derivatives 305

92 Unit 14: Analytical techniques 313

93 Elemental analysis 315

96 Paper chromatography 321

97 Thin layer chromatography 323

98 Gas chromatography 325

99 Column chromatography 327

100 Detection methods 329

101 Spectroscopy 331

102 Mass Spectroscopy 337

103 Infrared spectroscopy. 339

104 References & notes 343

105 Unit 15: Organometallics 345

106 Appendix A: Introduction to reactions 351

107 How to write organic reactions 353